hmmwv-manuals

Army Tm 9-2320-280-10 Air Force To 36A12-1A-2091-1 Marine Corps Tm 2320-10/6B

(SUPERSEDES TM 9-2320-280-10, 18 JUNE 1991) OPERATOR'S MANUAL FOR TRUCK, UTILITY: CARGO/TROOP CARRIER, 1-1/4 TON, 4X4, M998 (2320-01-107-7155) (EIC: BBD); M998A1 (2320-01-371-9577) (EIC: BBN); TRUCK, UTILITY: CARGO/TROOP CARRIER, 1-1/4 TON, 4X4, W/WINCH, M1038 (2320-01-107-7156) (EIC: BBE); M1038A1 (2320-01-371-9578) (EIC: BBP); TRUCK, UTILITY: HEAVY VARIANT, 4X4, M1097 (2320-01-346-9317) (EIC: BBM); M1097A1 (2320-01-371-9583) (EIC: BBU); M1097A2 (2320-01-380-8604) (EIC: BB6); M1123 (2320-01-455-9593) (EIC: B6G); TRUCK, UTILITY: TOW CARRIER, ARMORED, 1-1/4 TON, 4X4, M966 (2320-01-107-7153) (EIC: BBC); M966A1 (2320-01-372-3932) (EIC: BBX); M1121 (2320-01-956-1282) (EIC: B6H); TRUCK, UTILITY: TOW CARRIER, ARMORED, 1-1/4 TON, 4X4, W/WINCH, M1036 (2320-01-107-7154) (EIC: BBH); TRUCK, UTILITY: TOW CARRIER, W/SUPPLEMENTAL ARMOR, 1-1/4 TON, 4X4, M1045 (2320-01-146-7191); M1045A1 (2320-01-371-9580) (EIC: BBR); M1045A2 (2320-01-380-8229) (EIC: BB5); TRUCK, UTILITY: TOW CARRIER, W/SUPPLEMENTAL ARMOR, 1-1/4 TON, 4X4, W/WINCH, M1046 (2320-01-146-7188); M1046A1 (2320-01-371-9582) (EIC: BBT); TRUCK, UTILITY: ARMAMENT CARRIER, ARMORED, 1-1/4 TON, 4X4, M1025 (2320-01-128-9551) (EIC: BBF); M1025A1 (2320-01-371-9584) (EIC: BBV); M1025A2 (2320-01-380-8233) (EIC: BB3); TRUCK, UTILITY: ARMAMENT CARRIER, ARMORED, 1-1/4 TON, 4X4, W/WINCH, M1026 (2320-01-128-9552) (EIC: BBG); M1026A1 (2320-01-371-9579) (EIC: BBQ); TRUCK, UTILITY: ARMAMENT CARRIER, W/SUPPLEMENTAL ARMOR, 1-1/4 TON, 4X4, M1043 (2320-01-146-7190); M1043A1 (2320-01-372-3933) (EIC: BBY); M1043A2 (2320-01-380-8213) (EIC: BB4); TRUCK, UTILITY: ARMAMENT CARRIER, W/SUPPLEMENTAL ARMOR, 1-1/4 TON, 4X4, W/WINCH, M1044 (2320-01-146-7189); M1044A1 (2320-01-371-9581) (EIC: BBS); TRUCK, UTILITY: S250 SHELTER CARRIER, 4X4, M1037 (2320-01-146-7193) (EIC: BBK); TRUCK, UTILITY: S250 SHELTER CARRIER, 4X4, W/WINCH, M1042 (2320-01-146-7187); TRUCK, AMBULANCE, 2-LITTER, ARMORED, 4X4, M996 (2310-01-111-2275) (EIC: BBB); M996A1 (2310-01-372-3935) (EIC: BB2); TRUCK, AMBULANCE, 4-LITTER, ARMORED, 4X4, M997 (2310-01-111-2274) (EIC: BBA); M997A1 (2310-01-372-3934) (EIC: BBZ); M997A2 (2310-01-380-8225) (EIC: BB8); TRUCK, AMBULANCE, 2-LITTER, SOFT TOP, 4X4, M1035 (2310-01-146-7194); M1035A1 (2310-01-371-9585) (EIC: BBW); M1035A2 (2310-01-380-8290) (EIC: BB9).

ARMY TM 9-2320-280-10

6_image_0.png

AIR FORCE TO 36A12-1A-2091-1 MARINE CORPS TM 2320-10/6B CHANGE HEADQUARTERS, DEPARTMENTS OF THE ARMY, NO. 3 THE AIR FORCE, AND MARINE CORPS WASHINGTON, D.C., 15 July 2004

Operator'S Manual

TRUCK, UTILITY: CARGO/TROOP CARRIER, 1-1/4 TON, 4X4, M998 (2320-01-107-7155) (EIC: BBD); M998A1 (2320-01-371-9577) (EIC: BBN); TRUCK, UTILITY: CARGO/TROOP CARRIER, 1-1/4 TON, 4X4, W/WINCH, M1038 (2320-01-107-7156) (EIC: BBE); M1038A1 (2320-01-371-9578) (EIC: BBP); TRUCK, UTILITY: HEAVY VARIANT, 4X4, M1097 (2320-01-346-9317) (EIC: BBM); M1097A1 (2320-01-371-9583) (EIC: BBU); M1097A2 (2320-01-380-8604) (EIC: BB6); M1123 (2320-01-455-9593) (EIC: B6G); TRUCK, UTILITY: TOW CARRIER, ARMORED, 1-1/4 TON, 4X4, M966 (2320-01-107-7153) (EIC: BBC); M966A1 (2320-01-372-3932) (EIC: BBX); M1121 (2320-01-456-1282) (EIC B6H); TRUCK, UTILITY: TOW CARRIER, ARMORED, 1-1/4 TON, 4X4, W/WINCH, M1036 (2320-01-107-7154) (EIC: BBH); TRUCK, UTILITY: TOW CARRIER, W/SUPPLEMENTAL ARMOR, 1-1/4 TON, 4X4, M1045 (2320-01-146-7191); M1045A1 (2320-01-371-9580) (EIC: BBR); M1045A2 (2320-01-380-8229) (EIC: BB5); TRUCK, UTILITY: TOW CARRIER, W/SUPPLEMENTAL ARMOR, 1-1/4 TON, 4X4, W/WINCH, M1046 (2320-01-146-7188); M1046A1 (2320-01-371-9582) (EIC: BBT); TRUCK, UTILITY: ARMAMENT CARRIER, ARMORED, 1-1/4 TON, 4X4, M1025 (2320-01-128-9551) (EIC: BBF); M1025A1 (2320-01-371-9584) (EIC: BBV); M1025A2 (2320-01-380-8233) (EIC: BB3); TRUCK, UTILITY: ARMAMENT CARRIER, ARMORED, 1-1/4 TON, 4X4, W/WINCH, M1026 (2320-01-128-9552) (EIC: BBG); M1026A1 (2320-01-371-9579) (EIC: BBQ); TRUCK, UTILITY: ARMAMENT CARRIER, W/SUPPLEMENTAL ARMOR, 1-1/4 TON, 4X4, M1043 (2320-01-146-7190) M1043A1 (2320-01-372-3933) (EIC: BBY); M1043A2 (2320-01-380-8213) (EIC: BB4); TRUCK, UTILITY: ARMAMENT CARRIER, W/SUPPLEMENTAL ARMOR, 1-1/4 TON, 4X4, W/WINCH, M1044 (2320-01-146-7189); M1044A1 (2320-01-371-9581) (EIC: BBS); TRUCK, UTILITY: S250 SHELTER CARRIER, 4X4, M1037 (2320-01-146-7193) (EIC: BBK); TRUCK, UTILITY: S250 SHELTER CARRIER, 4X4, W/WINCH, M1042 (2320-01-146-7187); TRUCK, AMBULANCE, 2-LITTER, ARMORED, 4X4, M996 (2310-01-111-2275) (EIC: BBB); M996A1 (2310-01-372-3935) (EIC: BB2); TRUCK, AMBULANCE, 4-LITTER, ARMORED, 4X4, M997 (2310-01-111-2274) (EIC: BBA); M997A1 (2310-01-372-3934) (EIC: BBZ); M997A2 (2310-01-380-8225) (EIC: BB8); TRUCK, AMBULANCE, 2-LITTER, SOFT TOP, 4X4, M1035 (2310-01-146-7194); M1035A1 (2310-01-371-9585) (EIC: BBW); M1035A2 (2310-01-380-8290) (EIC: BB9).

TM 9-2320-280-10

Chapter Description
CHAPTER 1. INTRODUCTION
Section I. General Information
Section II. Equipment Description
CHAPTER 2. OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
Section I. Description and Use of Operator's Controls and Indicators
Section II. Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services
Section III Operation Under Usual Conditions
Section IV. Operation Under Unusual Conditions
Section V. Cargo/Troop Carrier and S250 Shelter Carrier Operation
Section VI. TOW/Armament Carrier Operation
Section VII. Ambulance Operation
CHAPTER 3. MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS
Section I. Lubrication
Section II. Troubleshooting
Section III. Maintenance Procedures
APPENDIX A. REFERENCES
APPENDIX B. COMPONENTS OF END ITEM AND BASIC ISSUE ITEMS LISTS
Section I. Introduction
Section II. Components of End Item
Section III. Basic Issue Items
APPENDIX C. ADDITIONAL AUTHORIZATION LIST
Section I. Introduction
Section II. Additional Authorization List
APPENDIX D. EXPENDABLE/DURABLE SUPPLIES AND MATERIALS LIST
Section I. Introduction
Section II. Expendable/Durable Supplies and Materials List
APPENDIX E. STOWAGE AND SIGN GUIDE
APPENDIX F. ON-VEHICLE EQUIPMENT LOADING PLANS
APPENDIX G. LUBRICATION INSTRUCTIONS
INDEX

Chapter 1 Introduction

Section I. General Information

1-1. Scope

a. This manual contains instructions for operating and servicing M998 series vehicles.

These vehicles are:

19_image_0.png

(1) M998 and M998A1 Cargo/Troop Carriers (2) M1038 and M1038A1 Cargo/Troop Carriers, W/W (3) M1097, M1097A1, M1097A2, and M1123 Heavy Variants (4) M966, M966A1, and M1121 TOW Carriers, Armored (5) M1036 TOW Carrier, Armored, W/W (6) M1045, M1045A1, and M1045A2 TOW Carriers, W/Supplemental Armor (7) M1046 and M1046A1 TOW Carriers, W/Supplemental Armor, W/W (8) M1025, M1025A1, and M1025A2 Armament Carriers, Armored (9) M1026 and M1026A1 Armament Carriers, Armored, W/W (10) M1043, M1043A1, and M1043A2 Armament Carriers, W/Supplemental Armor (11) M1044 and M1044A1 Armament Carriers, W/Supplemental Armor, W/W (12) M1037 S250 Shelter Carrier (13) M1042 S250 Shelter Carrier, W/W (14) M996 and M996A1 2-Litter Ambulances, Armored (15) M997, M997A1, and M997A2 4-Litter Ambulances, Armored (16) M1035, M1035A1, and M1035A2 2-Litter Ambulances, Soft Top b. The material presented here provides operators with information and procedures needed to provide the safest and most efficient operation of these vehicles. This information includes: (1) Operator forms and records. (2) Descriptions of each vehicle and its operation. (3) The purpose of each vehicle. (4) Vehicle limitations. (5) The function of all controls and indicators. (6) Operating instructions for each vehicle. (7) Cautions and warnings to operators regarding safety to personnel and equipment.

(8) How and when to use special purpose kits. (9) Operator maintenance checks and service procedures.

(10) Troubleshooting procedures to be followed by operators if the vehicle malfunctions.

1-2. Maintenance Forms And Records

(Army) Department of the Army forms and procedures used for equipment maintenance will be those prescribed by DA Pam 738-750, The Army Maintenance Management System (TAMMS). (Marine Corps) Refer to TM 4700-15/1 series.

1-3. Hand Receipt Manual

This operator's manual has a companion document with a TM number followed by "-HR" (which stands for Hand Receipt). The TM 9-2320-280-10-HR consists of preprinted hand receipts (DA Form 2062) that list end item related equipment (i.e., COEI, BII, and AAL) you must account for. As an aid to property accountability, additional -HR manuals may be requisitioned from the following source in accordance with procedures in chapter 12, AR 25-30: Commander U.S. Army Publications Distribution Center 2800 Eastern Blvd. Baltimore, MD 21220-2896

1-4. Reporting Equipment Improvement Recommendations (Eir)

If your vehicle needs improvement, let us know. Send us an EIR. You, the user, are the only one who can tell us what you don't like about your equipment. Let us know why you don't like the design or performance. The preferred method for submitting QDRs is through the Army Electronic Product Support (AEPS) website under the Electronic Deficiency Reporting System (EDRS). The web address is: https://aeps.ria.army.mil. This is a secured site requiring a password that can be applied for on the front page of the website. If the above method is not available to you, put it on an SF 368, Product Quality Deficiency Report (PQDR), and mail it to us at: Department of the Army, U.S. Army Tankautomotive and Armaments Command, ATTN: AMSTA-TR-E/PQDR MS 267, 6501 E. 11 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48397-5000. We'll send you a reply. 1-2 Change 3

1-5. Equipment Improvement Report And Maintenance Digest (Eir Md)

The quarterly Equipment Improvement Report and Maintenance Digest, TB 43-0001-62 series, contains valuable field information on the equipment covered in this manual. The information in the TB 43-0001-62 series is compiled from some of the Equipment Improvement Reports that you prepared on the vehicles covered in this manual. Many of these articles result from comments, suggestions, and improvement recommendations that you submitted to the EIR program. The TB 43-0001-62 series contains information on equipment improvements, minor alterations, proposed Modification Work Orders (MWOs), warranties (if applicable), actions taken on some of your DA Form 2028s (Recommended Changes to Publications), and advance information on proposed changes that may affect this manual. The information will help you in doing your job better and will help in keeping you advised of the latest changes to this manual. Also refer to DA Pam 25-30, Consolidated Index of Army Publications and Blank Forms, and appendix A, References, of this manual. (Marine Corps) Submit QDR's in accordance with MCO 4855-10. For those with access to the World Wide Web (WWW), the EIR MD can be viewed through the Army Electronic Product Support. The site is http://aeps.ria.army.mil.

1-6. Break-In Service

Upon receipt of vehicle, or after engine replacement, break-in precautions must be observed during the first 500 miles (805 kilometers) of operation. For breakin procedure, refer to paragraph 2-9.

Section Ii. Equipment Description 1-7. Equipment Characteristics, Capabilities, And Features

The 1-1/4 ton, 4x4, M998 series vehicles are tactical vehicles designed for use over all types of roads, as well as cross-country terrain in all weather conditions. The vehicles have four driving wheels powered by a V-8 liquid-cooled diesel engine. Four-wheel hydraulic service brakes and a mechanical parking brake are common to all models in the M998 series. All vehicles are equipped with a pintle hook for towing. Tiedown and lifting eyes are provided for air, rail, or sea shipment.

1-8. Metric System

The equipment/system described herein contains metric components and requires metric, common, and special tools; therefore, metric units in addition to standard units will be used throughout this publication. In addition, a metric conversion table is located on the inside back cover of this publication.

1-9. Cargo/Troop Carriers

(M998, M998A1, M1038, And M1038A1)

a. Differences. The only difference between the M998 and M998A1 cargo/troop carriers and the M1038 and M1038A1 cargo/troop carriers is that the M998 and M998A1 do not have winches and the M1038 and M1038A1 do. This difference affects: •Vehicle Length •Vehicle Weight •Shipping Dimensions •Approach Angle •Special Winch-Assisted Operations It does not affect the basic purpose, performance, or special limitations of the vehicles.

b. Purpose of the Vehicle. M998, M998A1, M1038, and M1038A1 cargo/ troop carriers are used to transport equipment, materials, and/or personnel. The cargo carrier is capable of transporting a payload (including crew) of 2,500 pounds (1,134 kilograms). The troop carrier is capable of transporting a two-man crew and eight passengers. Both use a troop seat kit for troop transport operations. The cargo/troop carrier also has a four-man crew configuration. The M1038 and M1038A1 are equipped with winches. This feature permits recovery operations of similar vehicles.

c. Performance. Fully-loaded M998, M998A1, M1038, and M1038A1 cargo/ troop carriers will climb road grades as steep as 60% (31°) and traverse a side slope of up to 40% (22°). The vehicle fords hard bottom water crossing up to 30 inches (76 centimeters) without a deep water fording kit and 60 inches (152 centimeters) with the kit. Refer to table 1-15 for cruising range.

d. Special Limitations. None. e. Special Instructions in the Manual.

(1) Refer to paragraph 2-2, Controls, Indicators, and Equipment. (2) Refer to paragraph 2-44, Troop Seat Kit Operation. (3) Refer to chapter 2, section V, Cargo/Troop Carrier and S250 Shelter Carrier Operation.

23_image_0.png

23_image_1.png

(WITH 2-MAN SOFT TOP INSTALLED) M1038 AND M1038A1 W/WINCH (WITH 4-MAN SOFT TOP INSTALLED) 1-5

1-10. Heavy Variant Cargo/Troop Carriers (M1097, M1097A1, M1097A2, And M1123)

a. Differences. The difference between the M998 and M998A1 cargo/troop carriers and the M1097, M1097A1, M1097A2, and M1123 heavy variant cargo/troop carriers is that the M1097, M1097A1, M1097A2, and M1123 are specifically designed to accommodate a higher payload capacity. The M1123 and A2 models have new bumpers, which make the vehicles slightly longer. A 9,000 lb winch is also available for the M1123 and A2 models as an option. These differences affect:

b. Purpose of the Vehicle. M1097, M1097A1, M1097A2, and M1123 heavy variant cargo/troop carriers are used to transport equipment, materials, and/or personnel. The heavy variant troop carrier is capable of transporting a two-man crew and eight passengers. The heavy variant cargo carrier is capable of transporting a payload (including crew) of 4,400 pounds (1,998 kilograms). The M1097, M1097A1, M1097A2, and M1123 use a troop seat kit for troop transport operations, a 200 ampere umbilical power cable to power shelter equipment, and stowage racks for ammunition and equipment. For higher payload capacity, the M1097, M1097A1, M1097A2, and M1123 are equipped with a reinforced frame, crossmembers, lifting shackles, heavy-duty rear springs, shock absorbers, reinforced control arms, heavy-duty tires and rims, and a transfer case and differential with a modified gear ratio.

c. Performance. Fully-loaded M1097, M1097A1, M1097A2, and M11 2 3 heavy variant cargo/troop carriers will climb road grades as steep as 60% (31°) and traverse a side slope of up to 40% (22°). The vehicle fords hard bottom water crossing up to 30 inches (76 centimeters) without a deep water fording kit and 60 inches (152 centimeters) with the kit. Refer to table 1-15 for cruising range.

d. Special Limitations. None.

e. Special Instructions in the Manual.

(1) Refer to paragraph 2-2, Controls, Indicators, and Equipment. (2) Refer to paragraph 2-44, Troop Seat Kit Operation. (3) Refer to chapter 2, section V, Cargo/Troop Carrier and S250 Shelter Carrier Operation (if equipped).

25_image_0.png

25_image_1.png

M1097A2

25_image_2.png

M1123 Change 1 1-7

1-11. Tow Carriers, Armored (M966, M966A1, M1036, And M1121)

a. Differences. The only difference between the M966, M966A1, and M1121 TOW carrier armored vehicles and the M1036 TOW carrier armored vehicle is that the M966, M966A1, and M1121 do not have winches and the M1036 does. This difference affects:

b. Purpose of the Vehicle. M966, M966A1, M1036, and M1121 TOW carriers are used to mount and operate the TOW missile launcher system with armor protection for crew, TOW system components, and ammunition. The M1036 is equipped with a winch. This feature permits recovery operations of similar vehicles.

c . Performance. Fully-loaded M966, M966A1, M1036, and M1121 T O W carriers will climb road grades as steep as 60% (31°) and traverse a side slope of up to 40% (22°). The vehicles ford hard bottom water crossings up to 30 inches (76 centimeters) without a deep water fording kit and 60 inches (152 centimeters) with the kit. Refer to table 1-15 for cruising range.

d. Special Limitations. Weapon station azimuth is limited to 300° left and right of vehicle centerline when Vehicle Power Conditioner (VPC) cables are connected. With launcher installed, elevation is limited to 20° and depression is limited to 10°.

e. Special Instructions in the Manual.

(1) Refer to paragraph 2-2, Controls, Indicators, and Equipment. (2) Refer to chapter 2, section VI, TOW/Armament Carrier Operation.

1-8 Change 1

27_image_0.png

M966, M966A1, AND M1121

■

27_image_1.png

M1036 W/WINCH

Change 1

1-12. Tow Carriers, W/Supplemental Armor (M1045, M1045A1, M1045A2, M1046, And M1046A1)

a. Differences. The difference between the M1045, M1045A1, and M1045A2 TOW carriers w/supplemental armor and the M1046 and M1046A1 TOW carriers w/supplemental armor is that the M1045, M1045A1, and M1045A2 do not have winches and the M1046 and M1046A1 do. The A2 models have new bumpers, which make the vehicles slightly longer. A 9,000 lb winch is also available for the A2 models as an option. These differences affect:

b. Purpose of the Vehicle. The M1045, M1045A1, M1045A2, M1046, and M1046A1 provide added ballistic protection for TOW system components, crew, and ammunition. The M1046 and M1046A1 are equipped with winches. This feature permits recovery operations of similar vehicles.

c. Performance. Fully-loaded M1045, M1045A1, M1045A2, M1046, and M1046A1 TOW carriers w/supplemental armor will climb road grades as steep as 60% (3-1°) and traverse a side slope of up to 40% (220). The vehicles ford hard bottom water crossings up to 30 inches (76 centimeters) without a deepwater fording kit and 60 inches (152 centimeters) with the kit. Refer to table 1-15 for cruising range.

d. Special Limitations. Weapon station azimuth is limited to 300° left and right of vehicle centerline when Vehicle Power Conditioner (VPC) cables are connected. With launcher installed, elevation is limited to 20° and depression is limited to 10°.

e. Special Instructions in the Manual. (1) Refer to paragraph 2-2, Controls, Indicators, and Equipment. (2) Refer to chapter 2, section VI, TOW/Armament Carrier Operation.

1-10

29_image_0.png

M1046 AND M1046A1 W/WINCH

1-13. Armament Carriers, Armored (M1025, M1025A1, M1025A2, M1026, And M1026A1)

a. Differences. The difference between the M1025, M1025A1, and M1025A2 armament carriers and the M1026 and M1026A1 armament carriers is that the M1025 and M1025A1 do not have winches and the M1026 and M1026A1 do. The A2 models have new bumpers, which make the vehicles slightly longer. A 9,000 lb winch is also available for the A2 models as an option. These differences affect:

b. Purpose of the Vehicle. The M1025, M1025A1, M1025A2, M1026, and M1026A1 armament carriers provide mounting and firing of the MK19 automatic grenade launcher; M2, caliber .50 machine gun; and M60, 7.62 mm machine gun; ring-mounted with 360° arc of fire, with armor protection for crew, weapon components, and ammunition. The M1026 and M1026A1 are equipped with winches. This feature permits recovery operations of similar vehicles. c. Performance. Fully-loaded M1025, M1025A1, M1025A2, M1026, and M1026A1 armament carriers will climb road grades as steep as 60% (31°) and traverse a side slope of up to 40% (22°). The vehicles ford hard bottom water crossings up to 30 inches (76 centimeters) without a deep water fording kit and 60 inches (152 centimeters) with the kit. Refer to table 1-15 for cruising range.

d. Special Limitations. None. e. Special Instructions in the Manual. (1) Refer to paragraph 2-2, Controls, Indicators, and Equipment. (2) Refer to chapter 2, section VI, TOW/Armament Carrier Operation.

1-12

31_image_0.png

M1025A2 (WITH M60, 7.62 MM MACHINE GUN MOUNTED)

31_image_1.png

M1026 AND M1026A1 W/WINCH (WITH MK19 GRENADE LAUNCHER MOUNTED)

1-13

1-14. Armament Carriers, W/Supplemental Armor (M1043, M1043A1, M1043A2, M1044, And M1044A1)

a. Differences. The difference between the M1043, M1043A1, and M1043A2 armament carriers w/supplemental armor and M1044 and M1044A1 armament carriers w/supplemental armor is that the M1043, and M1043A1, do not have winches and the M1044 and M1044A1 do. The A2 models have new bumpers which make the vehicles slightly longer. A 9,000 lb winch is also available for the A2 models as an option. These differences affect:

b. Purpose of the Vehicle. The M1043, M1043A1, M1043A2, M1044, and M1044A1 armament carriers w/supplemental armor provide added ballistic protection for armament components, crew, and ammunition. The M1044 and M1044A1 are equipped with winches. This feature permits recovery operations of similar vehicles.

c. Performance. Fully-loaded M1043, M1043A1, M1043A2, M1044, and M1044A1 armament carriers w/supplemental armor will climb road grades as steep as 60% (31°) and traverse a side slope of up to 40% (220). The vehicles ford hard bottom water crossings up to 30 inches (76 centimeters) without a deep-water fording kit and 60 inches (152 centimeters) with the kit. Refer to table 1-15 for cruising range.

d. Special Limitations. None. e. Special Instructions in the Manual.

(1) Refer to paragraph 2-2, Controls, Indicators, and Equipment. (2) Refer to chapter 2, section VI, TOW/Armament Carrier Operation.

1-14

33_image_0.png

M1043 AND M1043A1

33_image_1.png

M1044 AND M1044AI W/WINCH (WITH M2, CAUBER .50 MACHINE GUN MOUNTED) 1-15

1-15. S250 Shelter Carriers (M1037 And M1042)

a. Differences. The only difference between the M1037 shelter carrier and the M1042 shelter carrier is that the M1037 does not have a winch and the M1042 does. This difference affects:

b. Purpose of the Vehicle. The M1037 and M1042 shelter carriers provide the capability to secure and transport the S250 electrical equipment shelter with a total payload (including crew) of 3,600 pounds (1,634 kilograms). The M1042 is equipped with a winch. This feature permits recovery operations of similar vehicles.

c. Performance. Fully-loaded M1037 and M1042 shelter carriers will climb road grades as steep as 60% (31°) and traverse a side slope of up to 40% (22°). The vehicles ford hard bottom water crossings up to 30 inches (76 centimeters) without a deepwater fording kit and 60 inches (152 centimeters) with the kit. Refer to table 1-15 for cruising range.

d. Special Limitations. None.

e. Special Instructions in the Manual. (1) Refer to paragraph 2-2, Controls, Indicators, and Equipment. (2) Refer to chapter 2, section V, Cargo/Troop Carrier and S250 Shelter Carrier Operation.

1-16

35_image_0.png

M1042 W/WINCH 1-17

1-16. 2-ULITTER AMBULANCES, ARMORED (M996 AND M996A1); 4-LITTER AMBULANCES, ARMORED (M997, M997A1, AND M997A2) a. Differences. The M996 and M996A1 are armored 2-litter ambulances. The M997, M997A1, and M997A2 are 4-litter ambulances with armor protection and air conditioning for crew and patients. The A2 models have new bumpers, which make the vehicles slightly longer. A 9,000 lb winch is also available for the A2 models as an option. These differences affect:

B. Purpose Of The Vehicle.

(1) M996 and M996A1 Armored 2-Litter Ambulances. The M996 and M996A1 ambulances are capable of transporting up to two litter patients, six ambulatory patients, or a combination of litter and ambulatory patients. Additionally, medical personnel, equipment, and a driver can be accommodated in the vehicle. The patient compartment is heated with a vehicle-mounted fuel burning heater. For operation in an NBC environment, the M996 and M996A1 are equipped with a Gas-Particulate Filter Unit (GPFU) with heaters capable of supporting up to five personnel equipped with either M25 series protective masks or M13 series patient protective masks. The GPFU forces temperature-controlled, filtered air to the mask facepieces, which increases protection, eases breathing, and reduces stress and heat fatigue during extended periods of NBC operation.

(2) M997, M997A1, and M997A2 Armored 4-Litter Ambulances. The M997, M997A1, and M997A2 ambulances are capable of transporting up to four litter patients, eight ambulatory patients, or a combination of litter and ambulatory patients. Additionally, medical personnel, equipment, and a driver can be accommodated in the vehicle. The ambulance can be heated, ventilated, or air conditioned, depending on environmental conditions. For operation in an NBC environment, the M997, M997A1, and M997A2 are equipped with a Gas- Particulate Filter Unit (GPFU) with heaters capable of supporting up to seven personnel equipped with either M25 series protective masks or M13 series patient protective masks. The GPFU forces temperature-controlled, filtered air to the mask facepieces, which increases protection, eases breathing, and reduces stress and heat fatigue during extended periods of NBC operation.

c. Performance. Fully-loaded M996, M996A1, M997, M997A1, and M997A2 ambulances will climb road grades as steep as 60% (31°) and traverse a side slope of up to 40% (220). The vehicles ford hard bottom water crossings up to 30 inches (76 centimeters) without a deep water fording kit and 60 inches (152 centimeters) with the kit. Refer to table 1-15 for cruising range.

d. Special Limitations. None. e. Special Instructions in the Manual.

(1) Refer to paragraph 2-2, Controls, Indicators, and Equipment. (2) Refer to chapter 2, section VII, Ambulance Operation.

1-18

37_image_0.png

M996 AND M996A1

37_image_1.png

M997A2 1-19

1-17. 2-Litter Ambulances, Soft Top (M1035, M1035A1, And M1035A2)

a. Differences. The difference between the M1035, M1035A1, and M1035A2 2-litter soft top ambulances is that the M1035A2 is longer, due to new bumpers, and can be equipped with an optional 9,000 lb winch. These differences affect:

c. Performance. Fully-loaded M1035,'M1035A1, and M1035A2 ambulances will climb road grades as steep as 60% (31°) and traverse a side slope of up to 40% (22°). The vehicles ford hard bottom water crossings up to 30 inches (76 centimeters) without a deep water fording kit and 60 inches (152 centimeters) with the kit. Refer to table 1-15 for cruising range.

d. Special Limitations. None. e. Special Instructions in the Manual. (1) Refer to paragraph 2-2, Controls, Indicators, and Equipment. (2) Refer to chapter 2, section VII, Ambulance Operation.

1-20

39_image_0.png

M1035 AND M1035A1

39_image_1.png

M1035A2 1-21

1-18. Tabulated Data

Table 1-1. Differences Between Models
Equipment/Function
Personnel/Cargo x x x
Operations
TOW Launcher x x x x
Mounting
Armament Mounting x x x x
S250 Shelter x x x
Configuration
Ambulance:
Two Litter Patients x x
Four Litter Patients x
Eight Ambulatory Patients x
Six Ambulatory Patients x
Two Litter and Four Ambulatory Patients x
One Litter and Three Ambulatory Patients x
Vehicle Winch * * x * x x x * x * x *
Communications:
AN/GRC-160 x x x x x x x x x x x x
AN/VRC-12 Series x x
Collective NBC x x
Protection
Basic Armor x x x x x x
Supplemental Armor x x x x
Howitzer Prime Mover x
* Identifies an optional winch available for A2 models.

This paragraph organizes vehicle specifications, special equipment, and model differences in table form for easy reference by operators.

1-22 Change 1

Table 1-2. Capacities
Vehicle Description Capacity
Standard Metric
All Cooling system 26 qt 24.6 L
All Engine (crankcase only) 7 qt 6.6 L
All Engine (crankcase with new filter) 8 qt 7.6 L
All Differential (each) 2 qt 1.9 L
All Transmission (3L80) 6 qt 5.7 L
(Except M1123 and A2) (drain and refill)
M1123 and A2 Series Vehicles Transmission (4L80-E) (drain and refill) 7.7 qt 7.3 L
All (Except M1097, A1, A2, and M1123 Transfer case (218) 3.5 qt 3.3 L
Series Vehicles)
M1097, A1, A2, and M1123 Series Vehicles Transfer case (242) 3.35 qt 3.17 L
All Fuel tank 25 gal. 94.6 L
All Steering system 1 qt 0.95 L
All Steering system (with steering cooler) 1.25 qt 1.18 L
All (Except M1097, A1, A2, and M1123 Series Vehicles) Brake master cylinder 0.69 pt 0.33 L
M1097, A1, A2, and Brake master cylinder 1.12 pt 0.53 L
M1123 Series Vehicles
All (Except M1097, A1, A2, and M1123 Total brake system 1.2 pt 0.57 L
Series Vehicles)
M1097, A1, A2, and Total brake system 1.63 pt 0.77 L
M1123 Series Vehicles
All Windshield washer 1 qt 0.95 L
All Geared hub 1 pt 0.47 L
Vehicle Description Expected Temperatures
Above +15° +40° to -15°F +40° to -65°F
(above -9°C) (+4° to -26°C) (+4° to -54°C)
All Cooling system 1/4 ethylene 2/5 ethylene 3/5 ethylene
glycol, glycol, glycol,
3/4 water 3/5 water 2/5 water
All Engine OE/HDO 30 OE/HDO 10 OEA
All Fuel tank DF1, DF2 DF1 DF1, DFA*
All Temp. Alternate JP-8
All Differentials GO 80/90 GO 80/90 GO 80/90
All Geared hubs GO 80/90 GO 80/90 GO 80/90
Transmission Dexron® II or Dexron® II or Dexron® II or
(3L80) Dexron® III Dexron® III Dexron® III
All Transmission Dexron® III Dexron® III Dexron® III
(4L80-E)
All Transfer case Dexron® II or Dexron® II or Dexron® II or
Dexron® III Dexron® III Dexron® III
All Steering system Dexron® II or Dexron® II or Dexron® II or
Dexron® III Dexron® III Dexron® III
All Brake system Brake Fluid Brake Fluid Brake Fluid
Silicone (BFS) Silicone (BFS) Silicone (BFS)
All Windshield 1/3 cleaning 1/2 cleaning 2/3 cleaning
washer compound, compound, compound,
reservoir 2/3 water 1/2 water 1/3 water

Table 1-3. General Service Data Table 1-4. Engine Data (6.2 L)

Type 6.2 liter diesel, naturally-aspirated, liquid-cooled
Cylinders 8(V)
Brake horsepower 1 50 horsepower @ 3600 rpm
Idle speed (engine rpm) 650 ± 25 rpm
Operating speed (engine rpm) 1500-2300 rpm
Oil pressure at idle 1 5 psi (103 kPa)
Normal operating oil pressure 40-50 psi (276-345 kPa)
Type 6.5 liter diesel, naturally-aspirated, liquid-cooled
Cylinders 8(V)
Brake horsepower 1 60 horsepower @ 3400 rpm
Idle speed (engine rpm) 700 ± 25 rpm
Operating speed (engine rpm) 1500-2300 rpm
Oil pressure at idle 1 0 psi (69 kPa)
Normal operating oil pressure 40-50 psi (276-345 kPa)
Surge tank cap pressure 1 5 psi (103 kPa)
Thermostat:
Starts to open 1 90°F (88°C)
Fully open 21 2°F (1 00°C)
Radiator Downflow type
Fan 1 0 blade, 19 inch (48 cm)
Normal operating coolant temperature 190°-230°F (88°-110°C)

Table 1-5. Engine Data (6.5 L) Table 1-6. Cooling System Data Tm 9-2320-280-10

General Information
Model Turbo Hydra-Matic 3L80
Type Three-speed automatic
Oil type Dexron® II or Dexron III®
Transmission Range Selection
Recommended Shift Lever Position Operating Condition
"R" (reverse) Clear of traffic and obstructions, using
ground guide.
"N" (neutral) Vehicle stopped with parking brake applied.
"D" (drive) Normal driving and fording.
"2" (second) Hill climbing and "engine braking" to slow
vehicle when descending steep hills.
"1" (first) Maximum "engine braking" when descending
very steep hills, climbing steep hills, or
driving through deep mud, sand, or snow.

Table 1-7. Transmission Data (3L80)

General Information
Model Turbo Hydra-Matic 4L80-E
Type Four-speed automatic
Oil type Dexron® III
Transmission Range Selection
Recommended Shift Lever Position Operating Condition
"P" (park) Vehicle stopped with parking brake applied.
"R" (reverse) Clear of traffic and obstructions, using
ground guide.
"N" (neutral) Vehicle stopped with parking brake applied.
" D " (overdrive) Normal driving and fording.
"D" (drive) Hilly terrain and towing a trailer.
"2" (second) Hill climbing and "engine braking" to slow
vehicle when descending steep hills.
"1" (first) Maximum "engine braking" when descending
very steep hills, climbing steep hills, or
driving through deep mud, sand, or snow.

Table 1-8. Transmission Data (4L80-E)

General Information
Model New Process Gear 218 (MOD)
Type Two-speed, locking, chain driven
Oil type Dexron® II
CAUTION
Damage to drivetrain will occur if transfer case ranges are not selected properly. Refer to paragraph 2-
11, Placing Vehicle in Motion, and paragraph 2-29, Operating on Unusual Terrain, for specific
instructions.
Transfer Case Range Selection
Recommended Shift Lever Position Operating Condition
"H" (high range) This drive range shall be selected whenever possible.
High range should be used when operating on all
primary, secondary, and off-road surfaces, where little
or no wheel slippage exists. This range is also to be
used when encountering sharp, continuous turns on
high traction surfaces.
"H/L" (high lock range) This drive range shall be selected only when
continuous wheel slippage is evident; i.e., when
operating in mud, snow, loose sand, or on ice, and
increased control or additional traction is required.
"L" (low range) This drive range shall be selected only when high
ranges do not provide sufficient power to negotiate
steep hills or downgrades. This range shall also be
used when the vehicle is mired and cannot be
extracted using the high lock range.
"N" (neutral) Vehicle is disabled and must be towed.
General Information
Model New Process Gear 242 (MOD)
Type Two-speed, locking, chain driven
Oil type Dexron® II
CAUTION
11 for specific instructions on Placing Vehicle in Motion, and paragraph 2-29, Operating on Unusual Damage to drivetrain will occur if transfer case ranges are not selected properly. Refer to paragraph 2-
Terrain.
Transfer Case Range Selection
Recommended Shift Lever Position Operating Condition
"H" (high range) This drive range shall be selected whenever possible.
High range should be used when operating on all
primary, secondary, and off-road surfaces, where little
or no wheel slippage exists. This range is also to be
used when encountering sharp, continuous turns on
high traction surfaces.
"H/L" (high lock range) This drive range shall be selected for off- highway hilly
terrain or when continuous wheel slippage is evident;
i.e., when operating in mud, snow, loose sand, or on
ice, and increased control or additional traction is
required.
"L" (low range) This drive range shall be selected only when high
ranges do not provide sufficient power to negotiate
steep hills or downgrades. This range shall also be
used when the vehicle is mired and cannot be
extracted using the high lock range.
"N" (neutral) Vehicle is disabled and must be towed.

Table 1-11. Maximum Vehicle Operating Speeds (3L80 Transmission)

Transmission Transfer Case Range Selection
Range Selection "L" Low Range "H" High Range "H/L" High Lock Range
"R" (reverse) 11 mph 29 mph 11 mph
(18 kph) (47 kph) (18 kph)
"D" (drive) 27 mph 55 mph 55 mph
(43 kph) (88 kph) (88 kph)
"2" (second) 19 mph 48 mph 48 mph
(31 kph) (77 kph) (77 kph)
"1" (first) 11 mph 29 mph 29 mp
(18 kph) (47 kph) (47 kph)
Transmission Transfer Case Range Selection
Range Selection "L" Low Range "H" High Range "H/L" High Lock Range
"R" (reverse) 11 mph 29 mph 11 mph
(18 kph) (47 kph) (18 kph)
" D " (overdrive) 27 mph 55 mph 55 mph
(43 kph) (88 kph) (88 kph)
"D" (drive) 27 mph 55 mph 55 mph
(43 kph) (88 kph) (88 kph)
"2" (second) 19 mph 48 mph 48 mph
(31 kph) (77 kph) (77 kph)
"1" (first) 11 mph 29 mph 29 mph
(18 kph) (47 kph) (47 kph)

Table 1-12. Maximum Vehicle Operating Speeds (4L80-E Transmission)

Tm 9-2320-280-10

Table 1-13. Vehicle Dimensions (All except M1123 and A2 Vehicles)
Length Overall Height Overall* Height Minimum Reducible
Vehicle Inches Centimeters Inches Centimeters Inches Centimeters
M966/M966A1 180 457 73 185 71 180
69** 175
M996/M996A1 202 513 86 218 77 196
M997/M997A1 202 513 102 259 102 259
M998/M998A1 180 457 69 175 55 140
M1025/M1025A1 180 457 73 185 71 180
69** 175
M1026/M1026A1 185 470 73 185 71 180
69** 175
M1035/M1035A1 180 457 69 175 55 140
M1036 185 470 73 185 71 180
69** 175
M1037 189 480 69 175 55 140
M1038/M1038A1 185 470 69 175 55 140
M1042 185 470 69 175 55 140
M1043/M1043A1 180 457 73 185 71 180
69** 175
M1044/M1044A1 185 470 73 185 71 180
69** 175
M1045/M1045A1 180 457 73 185 71 180
69** 175
M1046/M1046A1 185 470 73 185 71 180
M1097/M1097A1 180 457 69** 175 55 140
M1121 180 457 73 185 71 180
Width Overall Ground Clearance
Under Axle Under Chassis
Vehicle Inches Centimeters Inches Centimeters Inches Centimeters
All 85 216 16 41 24 61

Tm 9-2320-280-10

Table 1-14. Vehicle Dimensions (M1123 and A2 Vehicles)
Vehicle Length Overall Height Overall* Height
Minimum Reducible
Inches Centimeters Inches Centimeters Inches Centimeters
M997A2 204.5 519.5 102 259 102 259
M1025A2 190.5 483.9 73 185 71 180
69** 175
M1035A2 190.5 483.9 69 175 55 140
M1043A2 190.5 483.9 73 185 71 180
69** 175
M1045A2 190.5 483.9 73 185 71 180
69** 175
M1097A2 190.5 483.9 69 175 55 140
M1123 182.5 463.6 69 175 55 140
Width Overall Ground Clearance
Under Axle Under Chassis
Vehicle Inches Centimeters Inches Centimeters Inches Centimeters
All 85 216 16 41 24 61

Tm 9-2320-280-10

Table 1-15. Vehicle Cruising Range

When vehicle is driven on hard surface and hilly terrain at a speed of 30-40 mph (48-64 kph), the ranges shown in this table can be expected when using bias ply tires. Cruising range may increase by approximately 30 miles (48 km) when using radial tires.

Vehicles Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) Cruising Range
M998, M1035, M1038 7,700 lb (3,496 kg) 337 mi (542 km)
M966, M1025, M1026, M1036, M1121 8,200 lb (3,723 kg) 320 mi (515 km)
M1043, M1044, M1045, 8,400 lb (3,814 kg) 312 mi (502 km)
M1046
M996, M1037, M1042 8,660 lb (3,932 kg) 300 mi (483 km)
M997 9,100 lb (4,131 kg) 275 mi (442 km)
M1097 10,000 lb (4,540 kg) 275 mi (442 km)
M998A1, M1035A1, M1038A1 7,880 lb (3,578 kg) 337 mi (542 km)
M966A1, M1025A1, 8,380 lb (3,805 kg) 320 mi (515 km)
M1026A1
M1043A1, M1044A1, 8,580 lb (3,895 kg) 312 mi (502 km)
M1045A1, M1046A1
M996A1 8,840 lb (4,013 kg) 300 mi (483 km)
M997A1 9,280 lb (4,213 kg) 275 mi (442 km)
M1097A1 10,000 lb (4,540 kg) 275 mi (442 km)
M1035A2 10,300 lb (4,676 kg) 337 mi (542 km)
M1025A2 10,300 lb (4,676 kg) 320 mi (515 km)
M1043A2, M1045A2 10,300 lb (4,676 kg) 312 mi (502 km)
M997A2 9,280 lb (4,213 kg) 275 mi (442 km)
M1097A2, M1123 10,300 lb (4,676 kg) 275 mi (442 km)
NOTE

TM 9-2320-280-10

Capacities
Vehicle Description Standard Metric
M1026, M1036, Max. Load 3,360 lb 1,525 kg
M1038, M1042, (Fifth Layer)
M1044, M0146, Max. Load 3,780 lb 1,716 kg
M1026A1, (Fourth Layer)
M1038A1,
M1044A1, M1046A1 Max. Load 4,310 lb 1,957 kg
(Third Layer)
Max. Load 5,020 lb 2,279 kg
(Second Layer)
Max. Load 6,000 lb 2,724 kg
(First Layer)
Table 1-17. 9,000 lb Winch Data (Optional)
Capacities
Vehicle Description Standard Metric
M1097A2, M1025A2, Max. Load 6,200 lb 2,815 kg
M1043A2, M1123, (Fifth Layer)
M1045A2, Max. Load 7,000 lb 3,178 kg
M997A2, (Fourth Layer)
M1035A2
Max. Load 8,000 lb 3,632 kg
(Third Layer)
Max. Load 8,500 lb 3,859 kg
(Second Layer)
Max. Load 9,000 lb 4,086 kg
(First Layer)
Capacities
Vehicle Description Standard Metric
Min. Load 4,700 lb 2,134 kg
All vehicles except Max. Load 5,200 lb 2,361 kg
M966, M996, M997, (Fifth Layer)
M1035, M1121, Min. Load 5,600 lb 2,542 kg
M966A1, M996A1,
M997A1, M1035A1, Max. Load 6,000 lb 2,724 kg
M997A2, M1035A2 (Fourth Layer)
Min. Load 6,800 lb 3,087 kg
Max. Load 8,500 lb 3,859 kg
(Third Layer)
Min. Load 8,700 lb 3,950 kg
Max Load 9,600 lb 4,358 kg
(Second Layer)
Min. Load 9,620 lb 4,367 kg
Max. Load 10,500 lb 4,767 kg
(First Layer)

Table 1-16. 6,000 lb Winch Data

Table 1-17.1. 10,500 lb Winch Data (Optional)

Tm 9-2320-280-10

Table 1-18. Curb Weight
Vehicle Curb Weight Vehicle Curb Weight
M998 5,200 lb (2,361 kg) M997 7,180 lb (3,260 kg)
M1038 5,327 lb (2,418 kg) M1045 6,438 lb (2,923 kg)
M966 6,051 lb (2,747 kg) M1046 6,565 lb (2,981 kg)
M1025 5,960 lb (2,706 kg) M1043 6,411 lb (2,911 kg)
M1026 6,087 lb (2,763 kg) M1044 6,538 lb (2,968 kg)
M1037 5,425 lb (2,463 kg) M1035 5,297 lb (2,405 kg)
M996 6,748 lb (3,064 kg) M1042 5,551 lb (2,520 kg)
M1036 6,178 lb (2,805 kg) M1097 5,600 lb (2,542 kg)
M998A1 5,380 lb (2,443 kg) M997A1 7,360 lb (3,341 kg)
M1038A1 5,507 lb (2,500 kg) M1045A1 6,618 lb (3,005 kg)
M966A1 6,231 lb (2,829 kg) M1046A1 6,745 lb (3,062 kg)
M1025A1 6,140 lb (2,788 kg) M1043A1 6,591 lb (2,992 kg)
M1026A1 6,267 lb (2,845 kg) M1044A1 6,718 lb (3,050 kg)
M996A1 6,928 lb (3,145 kg) M1035A1 5,477 lb (2,487 kg)
M1097A1 5,600 lb (2,542 kg) M1025A2 6,780 lb (3,078 kg)
M1045A2 7,258 lb (3,295 kg) M1043A2 7,230 lb (3,282 kg)
M1097A2 5,900 lb (2,679 kg) M1035A2 6,100 lb (2,769 kg)
M997A2 7,660 lb (3,478 kg) M1121 6,051 lb (2,747kg)
M1123 5,900 lb (2,679 kg)

Refer to FM 5-36 for information on trailer weights.

Loaded
Model Empty Cross-Country Highway
M966, M966A1, M996, M996A1, M997, 3 4 4
M997A1, M997A2, M998, M998A1, M1025,
M1025A1, M1025A2, M1026, M1026A1,
M1036, M1044, M1044A1, M1045, M1045A1,
M1045A2, M1046, M1046A1, M1121
M1035, M1035A1, M1035A2 2 3 3
M1037, M1038, M1038A1, M1042, M1043, 2 4 4
M1043A1, M1043A2, M1097, M1097A1,
M1097A2, M1123

Table 1-19. Vehicle Bridge Classification

Less Payload and Crew GVW
Front Rear Front Rear
Axle Axle Total Axle Axle Total
lbs. lbs. lbs. lbs. lbs. lbs.
Vehicle (kgs) (kgs) (kgs) (kgs) (kgs) (kgs)
M966 3,111 2,940 6,051 3,550 4,650 8,200
(1,412) (1,335) (2,747) (1,612) (2,111) (3,723)
M966A1 3,191 3,040 6,231 3,628 4,752 8,380
(1,449) (1,380) (2,829) (1,647) (2,157) (3,805)
M996 3,063 3,685 6,748 3,673 4,987 8,660
(1,391) (1,673) (3,064) (1,667) (2,264) (3,932)
M996A1 3,143 3,785 6,928 3,750 5,090 8,840
(1,427) (1,718) (3,145) (1,703) (2,311) (4,013)
M997 3,253 3,945 7,180 3,860 5,240 9,100
(1,477) (1,791) (3,260) (1,752) (2,379) (4,131)
M997A1 3,315 4,045 7,360 3,936 5,344 9,280
(1,505) (1,836) (3,341) (1,787) (2,426) (4,213)
M997A2 3,565 4,205 7,770 N/A N/A 10,300
(1,619) (1,909) (3,528) (4,676)
M998 2,900 2,300 5,200 3,350 4,350 7,700
(1,317) (1,044) (2,361) (1,521) (1,975) (3,495)
M998A1 2,980 2,400 5,380 3,429 4,451 7,880
(1,353) (1,089) (2,443) (1,557) (2,021) (3,578)
M1025 3,122 2,848 5,960 3,685 4,515 8,200
(1,417) (1,293) (2,706) (1,673) (2,050) (3,723)
M1025A1 3,192 2,948 6,140 3,766 4,614 8,380
(1,449) (1,338) (2,788) (1,710) (2,095) (3,805)
M1025A2 3,350 3,430 6,780 N/A N/A 10,300
(1,521) (1,557) (3,078) (4,676)
M1026 3,259 2,828 6,087 3,840 4,360 8,200
(1,480) (1,284) (2,763) (1,743) (1,979) (3,723)
M1026A1 3,339 2,928 6,267 3,925 4,435 8,380
(1,516) (1,329) (2,847) (1,782) (2,013) (3,805)
M1035 2,890 2,407 5,297 3,350 4,350 7,700
(1,312) (1,092) (2,405) (1,521) (1,975) (3,496)
M1035A1 2,970 2,507 5,477 3,429 4,451 7,880
(1,349) (1,138) (2,487) (1,557) (2,021) (3,578)
M1035A2 3,330 2,770 6,100 N/A N/A 10,300
(1,512) (1,258) (2,769) (4,676)
M1036 3,253 2,925 6,178 3,700 4,500 8,200
(1,477) (1,328) (2,805) (1,680) (2,043) (3,723)
M1037 2,720 2,480 5,200 3,362 5,298 8,660
(1,235) (1,126) (2,360) (1,526) (2,405) (3,932)
M1038 3,052 2,275 5,327 3,400 4,300 7,700
(1,386) (1,032) (2,418) (1,544) (1,952) (3,496)
M1038A1 3,132 2,375 5,507 3,480 4,400 7,880
(1,422) (1,078) (2,500) (1,580) (1,998) (3,578)
M1042 2,866 2,454 5,320 3,387 5,273 8,660
(1,301) (1,114) (2,415) (1,538) (2,394) (3,932)

Table 1-20. Axle Weights.

Change 3 1-35

TM 9-2320-280-10

Table 1-20. Axle Weights (Cont'd).
Less Payload and Crew GVW
Front Axle Rear Axle Total Front Axle Rear Axle Total
lbs. lbs. lbs. lbs. lbs. lbs.
Vehicle (kgs) (kgs) (kgs) (kgs) (kgs) (kgs)
M1043 3,300 3,111 6,411 3,961 4,439 8,400
(1,498) (1,412) (2,911) (1,798) (2,015) (3,814)
M1043A1 3,380 3,211 6,591 4,045 4,535 8,580
(1,535) (1,458) (2,993) (1,836) (2,059) (2,895)
M1043A2 3,680 3,530 7,210 N/A N/A 10,300
(1,671) (1,603) (3,273) (4,676)
M1044 3,445 3,093 6,538 4,092 4,308 8,400
(1,564) (1,404) (2,968) (1,858) (1,956) (3,814)
M1044A1 3,525 3,193 6,718 4,180 4,400 8,580
(1,600) (1,450) (3,050) (1,898) (1,998) (3,895)
M1045 3,265 3,173 6,438 3,725 4,675 8,400
(1,482) (1,441) (2,923) (1,691) (2,122) (3,814)
M1045A1 3,346 3,272 6,618 3,805 4,775 8,580
(1,520) (1,485) (3,005) (1,727) (2,168) (3,895)
M1045A2 3,679 3,585 7,264 N/A N/A 10,300
(1,670) (1,628) (3,298) (4,676)
M1046 3,407 3,158 6,565 3,850 4,550 8,400
(1,547) (1,434) (2,981) (1,748) (2,066) (3,814)
M1046A1 3,487 3,258 6,745 3,932 4,648 8,580
(1,583) (1,479) (3,062) (1,785) (2,110) (3,895)
M1097 2,950 2,650 5,600 3,500 6,500 10,000
(1,339) (1,203) (2,542) (1,589) (2,951) (4,540)
M1097A1 2,950 2,650 5,600 3,500 6,500 10,000
(1,339) (1,203) (2,542) (1,589) (2,951) (4,540)
M1097A2 3,160 2,740 5,900 N/A N/A 10,300
(1,435) (1,244) (2,679) (4,676)
M1121 3,111 2,940 6,051 3,550 4,650 8,200
(1,412) (1,335) (2,747) (1,612) (2,111) (3,723)
M1123 3,220 2,630 5,850 N/A N/A 10,300
(1,462) (1,194) (2,656) (4,676)

Chapter 2 Operating Instructions Section I. Description And Use Of Operator'S Controls And Indicators

2-1. Know Your Controls And Indicators

Before you attempt to operate your equipment, be sure you are familiar with the location and function of all controls and indicators. The location and function of the controls and indicators are described in this section.

· This vehicle has been designed to operate safely and efficiently within the limits specified in this TM. Operation beyond these limits is prohibited IAW AR 750-1 without written approval from the Commander, U.S. Army Tank-automotive and Armaments Command, ATTN: AMSTA-CM-S, Warren, MI 48397-5000.

· Do not use the hand throttle as an automatic speed or cruise control. The hand throttle does not automatically disengage when brake is applied, resulting in increased stopping distances and possible hazardous and unsafe operation. Injury to personnel or damage to equipment may result.

· Except where noted, the controls and indicators in this section are applicable to all vehicles covered in this manual.

· In this manual, the term "left" indicates the driver side of the vehicle. The term "right" indicates the opposite side of the vehicle.

2-1

2-2. Controls, Indicators, And Equipment

A. Driver'S Compartment.

56_Image_0.Png Key Item And Function

1 Rotary switch has "ENG STOP," 'RUN," and "START." When positioned to "RUN," glow plugs are activated to heat engine precombustion chambers. When positioned to "START," the starter will engage and crank the engine.

2 Wait-to-start lamp assembly illuminates when glow plugs are activated, goes out when engine is ready to be started.

3 Brake warning lamp assembly illuminates if parking brake is applied or if a hydraulic imbalance (leak, etc.) exists between the front and rear brake systems.

4 Air restriction gauge signals the operator that a restriction exists in the air cleaner.

Key Item And Function

5 Engine oil pressure gauge indicates the oil pressure when the engine is running.

6 High beam lamp assembly illuminates when front headlights are switched to high beam position. 7 Coolant temperature gauge indicates engine coolant temperature.

8 Defroster control knob directs heated air to the windshield for defrosting. 9 Instrument panel lights illuminate instrument panel gauges.

10 Heater control knob varies temperature of heated air into vehicle. 11 Heater fan switch controls the blower motor speed. The switch has "HI" (high), "OFF", and 'LO" (low) settings to regulate defroster and heater air flow into vehicle.

12 Voltmeter indicates the charging level and activity of the battery charging system. 13 Speedometer/odometer indicates vehicle speed and accumulated mileage.

14 Fuel gauge indicates amount of fuel in fuel tank.

15 Hand throttle increases engine speed for use during cold weather starting, winch operation, deep water fording, and to obtain maximum alternator output for communications/electrical requirements, and is not to be used as an automatic speed or cruise control.

16 Accelerator pedal is the operator's foot control for varying engine speed.

17 Service brake pedal is depressed to slow or stop vehicle.

18 Dimmer switch permits the operator to select high or low headlight beam. 19 Light switch controls operation of vehicle service lights and blackout lights. 20 Directional signal /emergency flasher indicator light illuminates during directional signal or emergency flasher use.

58_image_0.png

forward to close.

6 Simplified Test Equipment/Internal Combustion Engine-Reprogrammable (STE/ICE-R) diagnostic connector is attaching point for the vehicle test meter (VTM) to facilitate vehicle electrical and engine systems diagnoses.

7 Transmission shift lever is used to select vehicle driving range, "R" (reverse), "N" (neutral), "D" (drive), " oD " (overdrive) (M1123 and A2 vehicles only), "2" (second), "1" (first), and "P" (park).

8 Transfer case shift lever is used to select vehicle driving range, "L" (low range), "N" (neutral), "H" (high range), and "H/L" (high lock range).

9 Transmission indicator lamp comes on when ignition switch is turned on, and goes off when ignition switch is turned off. It is used to flash the diagnostic trouble codes when the transmission control module (TCM) is placed in the diagnostic mode.

10 Transfer case indicator lamp illuminates when transfer case has completed the low-range shift and high lock range shift.

11 Parking brake lever is used to apply parking brake. Safety release button must be depressed to release parking brake in new configuration.

12 Fording control switch (deep water fording kit only) allows operator to select "VENT" during normal operating conditions or "DEEP FORD" for deep water fording.

13 Steering wheel lock cable permits steering wheel to be locked to prevent unauthorized use of vehicle.

NEW CONFIGURATION

2-4 Change 1

59_image_0.png

Key Item And Function

14 Windshield washer/wiper control knob operates a two-speed electric wiper motor and when

59_image_1.png

depressed operates windshield washer.

15 Companion seat is removed to provide access to batteries.

16 Battery box latches release to permit removal of companion seat for access to batteries. 17 Batteries provide 24-volt power to vehicle electrical system.

18 Slave receptacle is located at outside front of battery box. It is the connecting point for the slave

59_image_2.png

cable for slave-starting the vehicle.

2-5

Tm 9-2320-280-10 Key Item And Function

1 Engine access cover is removed to

60_image_0.png

provide access to rear of engine.

2 Radio rack serves as mounting point for AN/GRC-160 or AN/VRC-12 radios.

3 Microphone bracket serves as mounting point for microphone.

4 Fire extinguisher bracket is located under front of driver's seat and is the stowage location for fire extinguisher. For new configuration vehicles, the bracket is located on the side of the driver's seat.

5 Wing head screws (two each) secure front access plate for stowage area under driver's seat.

6 Driver's seat adjusting slots permit driver's seat to be locked in a forward or rearward position. For the new configuration vehicles, the adjusters are located on front of driver's seat.

7 Catch assembly holds M16A1 rifle safely in place for travel. Adjustable catch assembly configuration holds M16A1 rifle when positioned all the way in or M203 grenade launcher when extended out.

8 Stock brace holds stock end of M16A1 rifle or M203 grenade launcher in position for travel.

9 First aid kit is located underneath the driver's seat and is used for crew emergency first aid treatment.

60_image_1.png

2-6 Change 1

10 Jack retaining strap (M1097 only) is located behind the driver's seat and is used to secure the jack firmly to the vehicle floor.

61_image_0.png

61_image_1.png

Change 1 2-7

Key Item And Function

1 Transmission oil dipstick tube (located right rear of engine) is fill point for transmission fluid.

62_image_0.png

2 Engine oil dipstick (on vehicles without deep water fording kit) is located behind alternator on left

62_image_1.png

side of engine and removed to check engine oil level.

3 Engine oil dipstick (on vehicles with deep water fording kit) is located behind alternator on left side

62_image_2.png

of engine and is removed to check engine oil level.

4 Engine oil filler cap (located front center of engine) is removed from oil filler neck to add oil to engine.

62_image_3.png

Key Item And Function

5 Radiator drainvalve (located beneath right front of engine on lower radiator crossover pipe) is

63_image_0.png

turned counterclockwise to drain coolant from the radiator.

6 Coolant surge tank cap (located right rear of engine) is removed from surge tank to add coolant to

63_image_1.png

cooling system.

2-9

Key Item And Function

1 Fuel filter (located left rear of engine on firewall) filters water from fuel system.

2 Windshield washer reservoir cap (located left rear of engine) unsnaps to add windshield washer fluid to reservoir.

3 Fuel filter drainvalve (located left rear of engine compartment on cowl, beneath and in front of windshield washer reservoir) is draining point for water collected in fuel filter.

4 Master cylinder cover (located left of engine) is removed to fill and/or check brake fluid level.

64_image_0.png

5 Air cleaner assembly (located right rear of engine) houses air cleaner element which filters dirt and

64_image_1.png

dust from air before it enters combustion chamber.

6 Air cleaner dump valve when squeezed, releases dirt, mud, or water from air cleaner body assembly.

65_image_0.png

Key Item And Function

7 Cargo tiedowns (eight each) provide tiedown points for use in cargo operations (M998, M998A1, M1038, and M1038A1 only).

8 Tailgate chains and hooks secure tailgate to rear of vehicle body (all except M996, M996A1, M997, M997A1, and M997A2).

9 Tailgate opens and closes to allow access to vehicle cargo area (all except M996, M996A1, M997, M997A1, and M997A2).

10 Lifting shackles (located at front and rear of vehicle) are used to lift or tie down vehicle.

11 Trailer receptacle provides electrical power for towed equipment. 12 Towing pintle (rear bumper) provides connection point for towing.

13 Pintle pin locks pintle latch to towing pintle.

14 Pintle latch pulls up to open towing pintle and pushes down to lock towing pintle.

66_image_0.png

1 Windshield folddown hinges (soft top models only) are used as a hinge point when lowering windshield. Hinge pins are removed when detaching windshield assembly.

2 Hitch pin and hinge pin are removed to allow windshield to be lowered or detached. 3 Windshield hinges (soft top models only) secure windshield in the raised (up) position with hinge

66_image_1.png

pins installed. Hinge pins are removed when lowering or detaching windshield.

4 Fuel tank filler cap (located at right rear side of vehicle) is removed to permit fuel servicing.

2-12

Key Item And Function

5 Hood latches (one on each side of hood) unlatch to release hood.

67_image_0.png

6 Hood support rod supports hood in the raised position.

67_image_1.png

2-13

D. Tow Carrier (M966, M996A1, M1036, M1045, M1045A1, M1045A2, M1046, And M1046A1) Equipment. Warning Note Key Item And Function 2-14

Never open one end of the cargo shell door without first ensuring that the opposite end is securely closed. Not doing so may cause both ends to open at same time causing damage to equipment, mission abort, or injury to personnel.

This manual identifies HMMWV equipment which permits the mounting and operation of the TOW launcher system. Specific instructions for employing the TOW and TOW 2 launcher on the HMMWV are covered in TM 9-1425-450-12 and TM 9-1425-472-12.

1 Cargo shell door strap serves as a grab strap to lower cargo shell door.

2 Cargo shell door assist cylinders provide a lift boost for raising and holding cargo shell door open.

3 Cargo shell door is a double-actuating door which pivots at either end. When door forward latch is released from inside vehicle, door opens rearward and functions as a TOW loader's door to facilitate mounting of TOW launcher and missile loading. When door rear latch is released, door opens forward and permits access to cargo area from rear of vehicle for stowing TOW launcher and equipment or ground mounting TOW launcher.

4 Cargo shell door rear latch is pulled upward to open cargo shell door from rear of vehicle.

5 Launch tube brackets (located on underside of cargo shell door) serve as stowage points for missile launch tube.

6 Cargo shell door retaining cables limit cargo shell door travel when opened from either end.

7 Cargo shell door forward latch locking device prevents accidental opening of cargo shell door from inside vehicle.

8 Cargo shell door forward latch is pulled downward to open door from inside vehicle. 9 Cargo shell door front grab handle serves as a grabbing point for lowering door when inside vehicle.

69_image_0.png

2-15

Key Item And Function

70_Image_0.Png

1 Telephone set footman loops (two each) and strap secure telephone set beneath rear of left cargo shell.

2 Cable reel footman loops (two each) and strap secure cable reel forward of telephone set stowage location.

3 M16 ammo box rack serves as stowage base for two M16 ammo boxes and is located forward of the cable reel stowage location.

4 M16 ammo box footman loops and straps (four each) secure two M16 ammo boxes to ammo rack.

5 Combat ration footman loops (four each) and straps (three each) secure one case of combat rations right rear of M16 ammo rack.

6 Fuel can footman loops (two each) and strap secure fuel can to fuel can stowage bracket.

7 Fuel can stowage bracket located between the left wheelhouse and missile rack permits vertical stowage of fuel can.

8 Tripod head mounting bracket secured to left rear wheelhouse permits mounting of traversing unit end of tripod in the stowed position.

2-16

Key Item And Function

71_Image_0.Png

9 Missile stowage rack provides stowage for six TOW missile rounds. It consists of a base, a first tier, and a second tier. Tiers pivot upward to facilitate missile stowage and quick access to missiles during reload operations. Missiles are mounted in each rack with warheads facing front of vehicle. Missiles stowed between rack base and second tier are held in without straps. Missiles mounted on top of the second tier are secured with straps located fore and aft of rack.

10 Second tier mounting straps (four each) located fore and aft of missile rack secure two missile rounds to second tier of rack.

11 Missile guidance set (MGS) battery stowage boxes provide stowage for two MGS batteries. 12 Water can footman loops and straps (two each) secure stowed water can between missile rack and left wheelhouse.

13 Missile rack tier retaining springs (two each) retain raised first or second tiers of missile rack to permit stowage of missiles or access to missiles for reloading operations.

14 Missile rack second tier locking latches (two each) located fore and aft of missile rack secure second tier of missile rack to first tier of missile rack.

15 Missile rack first tier locking latches (two each) located right side of missile rack secure first tier of missile rack to rack base.

16 Missile rack support braces (two each) support first and second missile rack tiers and pivot to outside to allow easy access to missiles for stowage or reloading.

2-17

Key Item And Function

72_Image_0.Png

1 Night sight battery case stowage brackets (two each) provide mounting locations for night sight battery cases.

2 Night sight battery case footman loops and straps (four each) secure two night sight battery cases to night sight battery case stowage brackets.

3 Night sight battery case mounting bracket footman loops (two each) and straps (four each) provide stowage of night sight case to top front of right wheelhouse.

4 Boresight collimator case footman loops and straps (four each) secure boresight collimator case to top rear of right wheelhouse.

5 Combat ration footman loops and straps (two each) secure one case of combat rations.

6 Night sight coolant cartridge case stowage bracket provides mounting location for night sight coolant cartridge cases.

7 Night sight coolant cartridge case footman loops and straps (four each) secure two night sight coolant cartridge cases to night sight coolant cartridge case stowage bracket.

8 Tripod legs mounting bracket and strap provide stowage for leg end of tripod.

9 Day sight and carrying bag stowage bracket provide stowage location for day sight and carrying bag in front of tripod.

10 Day sight and carrying bag footman loops and straps (four each) secure day sight to day sight stowage bracket.

2-18

Key Item And Function

73_Image_0.Png

11 Gunner's platform provides an adjustable non-slip platform for TOW gunner. Also serves as mounting base for the MGS in the stowed position.

12 Missile guidance set footman loops and straps secure MGS to the gunner's platform during extended travel mode.

13 Gunner's platform locking pins (two each) secure gunner's platform to selected height risers.

15 Traversing unit stowage pedestal provides mounting base for TU mount adapter. 16 Lower traversing unit mount adapter clamp secures TU mount adapter to the stowage pedestal or weapon station pedestal mount.

17 Upper traversing unit mount adapter clamp secures TU to TU mount adapter. 18 Gunner's platform risers provide support and height adjustment for gunner's platform.

19 Gunner's platform locking lugs and holes (two each) secure gunner's platform to fully lowered position when locking pin is installed.

14 Traversing unit (TU) mount adapter adapts TU to the TU stowage pedestal or weapon station pedestal mount.

Key Item And Function

74_Image_0.Png

1 Turret positioning handle provides positive right-hand grip to rotate weapon station. Hole in handle serves as securing point for weapon station pedestal mount cover.

2 Gunner's backrest provides back support for a gunner positioned in weapon station.

3 Hatch cover securing latches (three each) secure cover to weapon station. 4 Gunner's sling serves as seat rest or restraint for a gunner positioned in weapon station.

5 Weapon station brake handle locks the weapon station at the gunner's desired azimuth. Handle is placed in the down position for locking and pulled up when traversing the weapon station.

6 Hatch cover retaining latches (two each) secure to latch catches for retaining station cover in the open position.

7 Hatch cover retaining catches (two each) are connection points for retaining latches.

8 Hatch cover handle is grab handle to assist gunner in opening and closing station cover. 9 Weapon station hatch cover provides sealed protective covering for roof opening when TOW is not mounted to weapon station.

Key Item And Function

10 Missile guidance set retaining latches (four each) secure MGS to MGS weapon station mounting tray.

11 Missile guidance set weapon station mounting tray is mounting point for the MGS when the TOW launcher is assembled on the weapon station.

12 TOW carrier level gauge (inclinometer) measures levelness of the vehicle to alert TOW crew when vehicle is beyond recommended side slope operation.

13 Weapon station pedestal mount cover retainer secures pedestal mount cover in the open position. 14 Weapon station pedestal mount cover protects pedestal mount opening when TOW launcher is not mounted.

15 Weapon station pedestal mount is mounting point for TU adapter bracket and TOW launcher. 16 Weapon station serves as rotating mounting platform for TOW components during the launcher mode of operation. It can be continuously rotated 360° without vehicle power conditioner (VPC) cables connected.

17 Vehicle power conditioner (VPC) mounting plate provides a mounting point for the VPC. This bracket is mounted to the radio rack.

18 Field glasses bracket serves as mounting point for field glasses.

75_image_0.png

2-21 Key Item And Function

1 Camouflage screen stowage straps (four each) secure camouflage screen and support to tailgate.

2 NBC overgarments straps (two each) secure two sets of NBC overgarments and four sets of gloves

76_image_0.png

to floor (under left rear passenger seat).

3 NBC overgarments straps (eight each) secure two sets of overgarments (one set on each side) to cargo shell.

4 Night sight vision goggles stowage straps secure two sets of night sight vision goggles to floor (under right rear passenger seat).

5 Radiac meter stowage straps secure radiac meter to floor (under right rear passenger seat).

76_image_1.png

2-22

Key Item And Function

6 Power connector is located lower right side of "B" pillar and supplies power for vehicle power conditioner (VPC).

7 Power conditioner cable supplies vehicle power to TOW launcher equipment.

77_image_0.png

8 Vehicle power conditioner cable cleat (for vehicles with serial numbers 99,999 and below) secures the VPC cable to the inner right side of the "B" pillar when the cable is not connected to the power conditioner.

9 Vehicle power conditioner cable cleat (for vehicles with serial numbers 100,000 and above) secures

77_image_1.png

the VPC cable behind the passenger seat when the cable is not connected to the power conditioner.

2-23 e. Armament Carrier (M1025, M1025A1, M1025A2, M1026, M1026A1,

78_image_0.png

M1043, M1043A1, M1043A2, M1044, and M1044A1) Equipment.

Key Item And Function

1 Turret positioning handle provides positive right-hand grip to rotate weapon station.

2 Gunner's backrest provides back support for a gunner positioned in weapon station. 3 Hatch cover securing latches (three each) secure cover to weapon station. 4 Gunner's sling serves as seat rest or restraint for a gunner positioned in weapon station.

5 Weapon station brake handle locks the weapon station at the gunner's desired azimuth. Handle is placed in the down position for locking.

6 Hatch cover retaining latches (two each) secure to latch catches for retaining station cover in the open position.

7 Hatch cover retaining catches (two each) are connection points for retaining latches.

8 Hatch cover handle is grab handle to assist gunner in opening and closing station cover.

9 Weapon station hatch cover provides sealed protective covering for roof opening when weapons are not mounted to weapon station.

10 Armament mount is mounting bracket for weapon adapter.

11 Universal weapons adapter provides mounting base for the M60 7.62 mm machine gun, M2 caliber .50 machine gun, and MK19 grenade launcher.

12 Universal weapons adapter pin assembly secures weapon adapter to the armament mount.

13 Weapon station serves as rotating mounting platform for weapon components. Can be continuously rotated 360 degrees.

Operation and identification of cargo shell door components and gunner's platform can be found in para. 2-2d.

Key Item And Function

79_Image_0.Png

14 Spare barrel and cleaning kit footman loops and straps (two each) secure spare barrel and cleaning kit for M2 caliber .50 machine gun.

15 Ammo box rack provides stowage base for caliber .50 ammo box. 16 Ammo box footman loop and strap secure caliber .50 ammo box to ammo box rack. 17 Water can footman loop and strap secure 5 gal. water can to water can bracket; 18 Water can bracket provides stowage base for 5 gal. water can.

19 Ammo box rack provides stowage base for 40 mm ammo box. 20 Ammo box footman loops and straps (two each) secure 40 mm ammo box to ammo box rack.

21 Ammo box rack provides stowage base for caliber .50 ammo box.

22 Ammo box footman loop and strap secure caliber .50 ammo box to ammo box rack. 23 Ammo box rack provides stowage base for two 40 mm ammo boxes. 24 Ammo box footman loops and straps (two each) secure two 40 mm ammo boxes to ammo box rack.

25 Ammo box rack provides stowage base for three 40 mm ammo boxes.

26 Tripod mounting bracket and straps (two each) provide stowage for M3 tripod. 27 Ammo box footman loops and straps (two each) secure three 40 mm ammo boxes to ammo box rack.

Key Item And Function

1 Gun mount adapter plate provides mounting base for stowage of 40 mm gun mount adapter.

2 Gun mount footman loops and straps (two each) secure 40 mm gun mount adapter to gun mount adapter plate.

3 Pintle adapter bracket provides mounting base for stowage of pintle adapter.

4 Pintle adapter footman loop and strap secure pintle adapter to pintle adapter bracket.

5 Ammo box rack serves as stowage base for two caliber .50 ammo boxes. 6 Ammo box footman loops and straps (two each) secure two caliber .50 ammo boxes to ammo box rack.

7 Night sight case stowage brackets (two each) provide mounting for night sight case.

8 Night sight case footman loops and straps (two each) secure night sight case to night sight stowage brackets.

9 Grenade launcher stowage brackets (two each) provide mounting base for stowage of MK19 grenade launcher.

10 Grenade launcher straps and footman loops (two each) secure MK19 grenade launcher to grenade launcher stowage brackets.

11 Gun stop restricts movement of stowed MK19/40 mm grenade launcher.

12 Machine gun mounting brackets (two each) provide mounting base for stowage of M2 caliber .50 machine gun.

13 Machine gun straps and footman loops (two each) secure M2 caliber .50

80_image_0.png

machine gun to machine gun mounting brackets.

2-26 Change 1

e.1. Armament Carrier (M1025, M1025A1, M1026, M1026A1) Equipment

81_image_0.png

(cargo barrier and net kit)

Key Item And Function

14 Cargo barrier prevents movement of cargo into the cab area during vehicle operation.

15 Stowage compartment net secures cargo to the cargo floor and limits movement of cargo during vehicle operation.

16 Antiskid strips (nine each) prevent cargo from sliding around in the cargo

81_image_1.png

area.

Change 1 2-27

F. 81 Mm Mortar Carrier (M998, M998A1, M1038, And M1038A1) Equipment. Key Item And Function

1 Bipod stowage straps and tray secure bipod assembly to the wheelhouse.

2 Mortar ammunition container provides stowage for mortar rounds and equipment. 3 Four-round ready rack provides stowage for four mortar rounds. Ready rack can be removed from mortar ammunition container and placed near firing position.

4 Aiming post straps (two each) secure aiming post and stowage bag to mortar ammunition container.

5 Ready rack straps and bracket secure four-round ready rack to mortar ammunition container. 6 Ammunition straps (three each) secure mortar ammunition in ammunition container. 7 Mortar base plate stowage strap and brackets secure mortar base plate to mortar ammunition

82_image_0.png

container.

Key Item And Function

8 Troop seat support provides support for forward end of troop seat when seat is lowered.

9 Troop seat provides seating for mortar crewman.

10 Lockpins (two each) secure troop seat in raised position. 11 M14 chest strap and bracket secure M14 lighting equipment chest to mortar equipment rack.

12 Mortar equipment stowage rack provides stowage for M14 chest, tool chest, and M166 chest.

13 Tool chest strap and bracket secure tool chest to mortar equipment rack. 14 Troop seat bumpers (two each) provide support for troop seat in lowered position.

15 Stowage clips (two each) secure cleaning staff to vehicle. 16 Cannon stowage straps and brackets (two each) provide stowage for 81 mm cannon.

17 M166 chest strap and bracket secures M166 sight unit carrying case to

83_image_0.png

mortar equipment rack.

Tm 9-2320-280-10

g. S250 Shelter Carrier (M1037 and M1042) Equipment.

Key Item And Function Caution

The M1037 and M1042 shelter carriers are specifically designed to be operated with the S250 shelter installed. It can be driven safely for short distances (to and from maintenance or from the rail head when being delivered) without the shelter installed. However, this should not be done for long distances. Driving for long distances without the shelter installed will cause damage to equipment.

1 Shelter reinforcement brackets (four each) secure S250 Shelter Carrier to vehicle body.

2 Rear Suspension Tiedown Kit is used to compress rear suspension to obtain an overall height of 102 in. (259 cm) with S250 shelter.

84_image_0.png

2-30 Change 3 H. Soft Top Ambulance (M1035, M1035A1, And M1035A2) Equipment. Key Item And Function

3 Litter straps (eight each) secure litters to litter rack during transportation of litter patients.

4 Upper litter tray provides a platform for loading litter on upper litter rack. 5 Upper litter rack provides a platform for securing upper litter tray.

6 Litter stop secures litter in upper litter tray during loading, unloading, and transportation. 7 Litter tray handle provides positive grip to slide upper litter tray during loading or unloading.

8 Lower litter rack provides a platform for securing lower litter.

9 Upper litter rack stop notch allows upper litter tray stop to be inserted during upper litter tray stowage.

10 Tray stop secures upper litter tray to upper litter rack during stowage.

85_image_0.png

Tm 9-2320-280-10 I. Four-Litter Ambulance (M997, M997A1, And M997A2) Equipment. Key Item And Function

1 Four-litter ambulance provides transport for up to eight ambulatory patients or four litter patients and two attendants. The ambulance has armor protection, self-contained heating, air-conditioning, and collective NBC protection for crew and patients.

10 Side stowage doors (two each) provide access to stowage areas on the left and right sides of the vehicle.

16 Litter stowage compartment provides stowage for litters and litter rail extension.

17 Stowage compartment latch secures litter stowage compartment cover in closed position.

18 Door holders (two each) engage receptacles on side of ambulance body to secure rear doors in open position.

19 Rear door handles (two each) are turned to the horizontal position to unlatch rear doors and to the vertical position to latch rear doors. Ensure that doors are closed and handles are securely latched before placing vehicle in motion.

2-32 Change 1 4 Air-conditioner intake louver provides air intake for air-conditioner. 5 Antenna base mount provides support for AS-1729/VRC antenna. 6 Red cross placards are at six locations on the ambulance; one each on the rear doors, sides, front, and top of ambulance body.

7 Rear doors (two each) provide access into the ambulance for patients and crew. The right rear door must be opened first, and closed last, when entering or leaving the vehicle. Ensure that doors are securely closed and latched before placing the vehicle in motion.

7.1 Spreader Bar Tiedowns (two each) are used during transport operations.

8 Placard retaining clips (twelve each) hold the red cross placards in open position, or folded when the vehicle is used for non-ambulance operations.

9 Door holder receptacles (two each) engage the door holders and secure the rear doors in the fully open position.

11 Stowage compartment latches (four each) secure the side stowage doors in the closed position.

12 Lifting shackles (located at front and rear of vehicle) are used to tie down the vehicle during transport operations.

13 Backup light assembly (two each) provides warning to personnel standing at the rear of the vehicle and light for vehicle operator when backing up ambulance.

14 Trailer receptacle provides electrical power to towed equipment. 15 Rear step assembly lowers and folds out to provide easy access to ambulance interior. Step assembly must be in stowed position before closing rear doors in preparation for movement.

2 Heater exhaust pipe vents exhaust gases from ambulance heater. 3 Air-conditioner condenser exhaust louver vents exhaust heat from airconditioner condenser.

87_image_0.png

Change 1 2-33

Key Item And Function

1 Safety strap secures the rear step assembly in the stowed position.

2 Rear step retractor assembly provides a lift boost for raising the rear step assembly into stowed position.

3 Rear step assembly lowers and folds out to provide easy access to ambulance interior. Step assembly is secured in stowed position with safety strap and rear step latch assembly. Step assembly must be in stowed position before closing rear doors in preparation for movement.

4 Blackout switch assembly activates interior blackout lights and extinguishes white ceiling lights and spotlights when rear step assembly is lowered and interior lights switch is set to either "NORMAL" or "B/O." 5 Rear step strikers (two each) engage rear step latch assemblies to secure rear step assembly in stowed position.

6 Rear step latch assemblies (two each) engage rear step strikers to secure rear step assembly in stowed position.

7 Rear step latch cable is pulled to release rear step strikers so rear step assembly can be lowered. 8 Bottom step becomes an attendant's seat when rear step assembly is in stowed position.

9 Safety strap attachment hole is connecting point for safety strap when rear step assembly is in the stowed position.

10 Rear step knob secures pivoting lower step in fully lowered position or stowed position.

11 Retention cable assemblies (two each) provide support for rear step assembly in lowered position.

89_image_0.png

Key Item And Function

1 Air-conditioning louvers (six each) can be adjusted to direct cool air into patient area.

2 Bulkhead door latch assembly secures bulkhead door in open position. 3 Electrical control panels provide centralized control of lighting, heating, and cooling for ambulance interior.

4 Blackout lamp (one per side) provides blue light illumination during blackout conditions.

5 Heater, A/C, and vent operation data plate provide instructions for operating heating, airconditioning, and ventilation systems within the ambulance interior.

6 Strap assemblies (two per side) provide a handhold to enable patients and attendant to move around when vehicle is in motion.

7 Ceiling lamps (two per side) provide white light illumination for ambulance interior. 8 Litter handle bumpers (eight per side) protect litter handles from damage and restrict litter movement when ambulance is in motion.

9 Oxygen cylinder straps, footman loops, and bumpers provide stowage for two oxygen cylinders on each bulkhead.

10 Attendant seat bracket and strap assembly provide stowage for attendant seat.

11 Spineboard bracket and strap assembly provide stowage for short spineboard. 12 24-volt receptacle (two each) provides a 24-VDC electrical source for ambulance accessories. The other 24-volt receptacle is located on the electrical control panel.

13 Litter skids provide a track to guide litter into position on litter rack. 14 Stowage covers (two each) secure and cover equipment stowed under lower litter rack. Each cover is secured by five turnbuttons.

16 Medical cabinet doors and hasps (two each) provide secure stowage areas for medical supplies and equipment.

17 Bulkhead doors (two each) provide walk-through access between vehicle cab and ambulance interior. Left bulkhead door must be closed before right door is closed and latched.

18 Bulkhead door handle latches bulkhead door closed when handle is turned to vertical position. 19 Portable heart monitor stowage provides storage area for portable heart monitor.

15 Heater vents (four each) direct heated air into ambulance compartment.

91_image_0.png

Key Item And Function

1 Upper litter rack (one per side) provides additional litter capacity, and when folded downward, provides backrest for ambulatory patients.

2 Spotlight assembly (two per side) provides a movable source of illumination. Switch on back of spotlight assembly activates light when interior light switch is activated.

3 IV bag hangers (four per side) provide suspension point for patient IV bag.

4 IV bag stowage straps (four per side) secure IV bag in stowed position.

5 Upper litter rack ring (two per side) is the attaching point for litter rack support straps. 6 Litter rack support straps (two per side) support upper litter rack. 7 Spotlight mount (five per side) provides mounting points for movable spotlights. Three wall mounts and two mounts located on the underside of upper litter rack are located on each side of ambulance.

8 Rear door blackout switch activates interior blackout lights and extinguishes all interior white light illumination when rear doors are opened and interior lights switch is set to either "NORMAL" or "B/O." 9 Litter rack front latch, when activated, releases front striker to allow upper litter rack to lower to backrest position.

10 Litter rack front striker engages litter rack front latch assembly to secure upper litter rack in raised position.

11 Bulkhead door blackout light switch activates interior blackout lights and extinguishes all interior white light illumination when bulkhead doors are opened and interior lights switch is set to either "NORMAL" or "B/O." 12 NBC heaters (five in ambulance body, two in cab) provide a flow of heated, filtered air to NBC protective masks worn by crew and patients.

13 Aspirator/resuscitator stowage brackets secure aspirator/resuscitator in stowed position.

14 Front litter rack straps (four per side) secure front litter handles to litter rack. 15 Litter rack tension strap applies tension to upper litter rack to restrict movement of litter rack during vehicle movement.

16 Rear litter rack straps (four per side) secure rear litter handles to litter rack. 17 Spineboard bracket and strap assembly provides stowage for long spineboard.

18 Upper litter rack rear latch assembly (one per side) when unlocked and depressed allows rear of upper litter rack to be lowered to ease loading of patients.

19 Litter rack handle slides out to ease loading of patients into upper litter rack.

93_image_0.png

Key Item And Function

94_Image_0.Png

1 Intercom control (C-2298/VRC) provides communication with the driver and radio control facilities when used with an M24 series protective mask, radio handset, or other audio accessories. A second intercom control is located in the cab on the radio rack.

2 Web shelf net assembly provides stowage area in front of bulkhead.

Key Item And Function

95_Image_0.Png

3 Attendant seat slides along the attendant seat rails providing a sliding and removable seat for the ambulance attendant.

4 Seatbelt assembly secures the attendant to the attendant seat when ambulance is in motion.

5 Rail notch secures the attendant seat in one of three locations along the attendant seat rails. 6 Attendant seat rails (two each) provide a track along which the attendant seat can be positioned.

7 Attendant seat latch is pushed to the attendant's right to release the locking mechanism holding the attendant seat stationary at rail notch locations.

96_image_0.png

KEY ITEM AND FUNCTION

Not E

The following items are located in the crew compartment overhead.

1 NBC door paddle handle permits NBC door to be opened or closed. 2 NBC door provides access to gas-particulate filter unit and stowage area. 3 Antenna base mount provides mounting for AS-1729/VRC antenna and cabling.

4 NBC door latch secures NBC door in open position. 5 Air-conditioner sight glass allows vehicle operator to visually check status of air-conditioning charging condition.

6 Heating, ventilating, and air-conditioning (HVAC) system compartment door provides access to HVAC components.

7 Air intake filter door provides access to air-conditioner air intake filter.

2-42 Change 1

Key Item And Function

97_Image_0.Png Note

The NBC control box for the M997, M997A1, and M997A2 ambulance has seven heater fuses and one spare fuse.

8 NBC control box houses circuitry and controls for the collective NBC protection system. 9 NBC system switch controls operation of the collective NBC protection system.

10 20 amp fuses protect NBC heater circuits from overload damage.

Tm 9-2320-280-10 J. Two-Litter Ambulance (M996 And M996A1) Equipment. Key Item And Function

1 Two-litter ambulance provides transport for up to six ambulatory patients or two litter patients and two attendants. The ambulance has armor protection, self-contained heating and ventilation, and collective NBC protection for crew and patients.

2 Heater exhaust pipe vents exhaust gases from ambulance heater. 3 Antenna base mount provides support for AS-1729/VRC antenna. 4 Heater intake louver provides air intake for heating and ventilating systems. 5 Rear door vent provides ventilation for patient compartment. 6 Rear doors (two each) provide access for patients and crew into the ambulance. The right rear door must be opened first, and closed last, when entering or leaving the vehicle. Ensure that the door is securely closed and latched before placing the vehicle in motion.

6.1 Spreader bar tiedowns (two each) are used during transport operations.

7 Door holder receptacles (two each) engage the door holders and secure the rear doors in the fully open position.

8 Placard retaining clips (eight each) hold the red cross placards in open position or folded when the vehicle is used for non-ambulance operations.

9 Red cross placards are at five locations on the ambulance; one each on the right rear door, sides, front, and top of ambulance body.

10 Stowage compartment latches (four each) secure the side stowage doors in the closed position.

11 Side stowage doors (two each) provide exterior stowage areas on the left and right sides of the vehicle.

12 Lifting shackles (located at front and rear of vehicle) are used to tie down the vehicle during transport operations.

13 Backup light assembly (two each) provide warning to personnel standing at the rear of the vehicle and light for vehicle operator when backing up ambulance.

14 Trailer receptacle provides electrical power to towed equipment. 15 Rear step assembly lowers and folds out to provide easy access to ambulance interior. Step assembly must be in stowed position before closing rear doors in preparation for movement.

16 Litter stowage compartment provides stowage for litters and litter rail extension.

17 Stowage compartment latch secures litter stowage compartment cover in closed position.

18 Door holders (two each) engage receptacles on side of ambulance body to secure rear doors in open position.

19 Rear door handles (two each) are turned to the horizontal position to unlatch rear doors, and to the vertical position to latch rear doors. Ensure that doors are closed and handles are securely latched before placing vehicle in motion.

99_image_0.png

99_image_1.png

Key Item And Function

1 Electrical control panels provide centralized control of lighting, heating, and ventilation for ambulance interior.

2 Blackout lamp (one per side) provides blue light illumination during blackout conditions. 3 Strap assemblies (four per side) provide an assist to patients and crew when moving about in ambulance interior.

4 Ceiling lamps (two per side) provide white light illumination for ambulance interior.

5 Splint set stowage strap assemblies (two each) secure splint set in stowed position. 6 Oxygen cylinder straps, footman loops, and bumpers provide stowage for oxygen cylinders on each bulkhead.

7 Attendant seat bracket and strap assembly provides stowage for attendant seat. 8 Attendant seat shown in stowed position. When installed on attendant seat rails, provides a movable seat for ambulance attendant.

9 Spineboard bracket and strap assembly provides stowage for short spineboard.

10 Medical instrument and supply set stowage strap assembly (two per side) secures medical instruments and supplies in stowage.

11 24-volt receptacle (two each) provides a 24-VDC electrical source for ambulance accessories. The other 24-volt receptacle is located on the electrical control panel.

12 Ambulatory patient seat latch (one per side) secures folding patient seat back in closed position. 13 Ambulatory patient seat provides seating for three ambulatory patients on each side of ambulance. 14 Stowage area under litter rack provides additional stowage space.

15 Portable heart monitor stowage provides storage area for portable heart monitor.

16 Bulkhead doors (two each) provide walk-through access between vehicle cab and ambulance interior. Left bulkhead door must be closed before right door is closed and latched.

17 Shelf assembly provides area in front of bulkhead for blanket kit and splint kit stowage.

18 Bulkhead door handle latches bulkhead door closed when handle is turned to vertical position. 19 Heater/fresh air vent directs heated air during heater operation or fresh air if ventilation system is activated.

20 Blanket set stowage strap assembly secures medical blanket set in stowed position.

101_image_0.png

Key Item And Function

1 Spotlight mount (three per side) provides mounting points for movable spotlights.

2 IV bag hangers (four per side) provide suspension points for patient IV bags. 3 IV bag stowage straps (four per side) secure IV bags in stowed position.

4 Spotlight assembly (one per side) provides a movable source of illumination. Switch on back of spotlight assembly activates light when interior light switch is activated.

5 Rear door blackout switch activates interior blackout lights and extinguishes all interior white light illumination when rear doors are opened and interior lights switch is set to either "NORMAL" or "B/O." 6 Intercom control (C-2298/VRC) provides communication with the driver and radio control facilities when used with an M24 series protective mask, radio handset and speaker, or other audio accessories. A second intercom control is located in the cab.

7 NBC heaters (three in ambulance body, two in cab) provide a flow of heated, filtered air to NBC protective masks worn by crew and patients.

8 Bulkhead door blackout light switch activates interior blackout lights and extinguishes all interior white light illumination when bulkhead doors are opened and interior lights switch is set to either "NORMAL" or "B/O".

9 Litter handle bumpers (four per side) protect litter handles from damage and restrict litter movement when ambulance is in motion.

10 Front litter rack straps (one per side) secure front litter handles to litter rack. 11 Aspirator/resuscitator stowage brackets secure aspirator/resuscitator in stowed position. 12 Bulkhead door latch assembly secures bulkhead door in open position.

13 Medical stowage cover latch secures stowage cover in closed position.

14 Medical stowage cover secures medical stowage in compartment beneath litter rack. 15 Litter skids (two each) provide a track to guide litter into position on litter rack.

16 Rear litter rack straps (two per side) secure rear litter handles to litter rack.

17 Spineboard bracket and strap assembly provide stowage for long spineboard.

103_image_0.png

2-49

104_image_0.png

Key Item And Function

1 Vent cover retaining clips (two each) secure vent cover in either open or closed position.

2 Rear door vent provides fresh air ventilation for ambulance interior, or can serve as an exhaust vent when used in conjunction with heating/ventilation system.

3 Vent cover opens to allow fresh air ventilation of ambulance interior.

2-50

105_image_0.png

Key Item And Function

4 NBC door provides access to gas-particulate filter unit. 5 Wing head screws (two each) secure NBC door in closed position.

NBC door strap must be in good condition and properly installed to prevent injury to personnel in driver's position or damage to equipment.

6 NBC door strap acts as a safety strap to prevent NBC door from accidentally opening and injuring driver.

2-51

Key Item And Function

106_Image_0.Png

1 NBC heaters (three in ambulance body, two in cab) provide a flow of heated, filtered air to NBC protective masks worn by crew and patients.

2 Antenna base mount provides mounting for AS-1729/VRC antenna and cabling.

3 Heating and ventilating system compartment door provides access to heating and ventilating system components.

4 Wing head screws (seven each) secure heating and ventilating system compartment door in closed position.

2-52 Key Item And Function

107_Image_0.Png Note

The NBC control box for the M996 and M996A1 ambulance has five heater fuses and one spare fuse.

5 NBC control box houses circuitry and controls for the collective NBC protection system.

6 NBC system switch controls operation of the collective NBC protection system.

7 20 amp fuses protect NBC heater circuits from overload damage.

2-53 Key Item And Function

1 Safety strap secures the rear step assembly in the stowed position.

2 Rear step retractor assembly provides a lift boost for raising the rear step assembly into stowed position.

3 Rear step assembly lowers and folds out to provide easy access to ambulance interior. Step assembly is secured in stowed position with safety strap and rear step latch assembly. Step assembly must be in stowed position before closing rear doors in preparation for movement.

4 Blackout switch assembly activates interior blackout lights and extinguishes white ceiling lights and spotlights when rear step assembly is lowered and interior lights switch is set to either "NORMAL" or "B/O." 5 Rear step strikers (two each) engage rear step latch assemblies to secure rear step assembly in stowed position.

6 Rear step latch assemblies (two each) engage rear step strikers to secure rear step assembly in stowed position.

7 Rear step latch cable is pulled to release rear step strikers so rear step assembly can be lowered.

8 Bottom step becomes an attendant's seat when rear step assembly is in stowed position.

9 Safety strap attachment hole is connecting point for safety strap when rear step assembly is in the stowed position.

10 Rear step knob secures pivoting lower step in fully lowered position or stowed position.

11 Retention cable assembly (two each) provides support for rear step assembly in lowered position.

2-54

108_image_0.png

Key Item And Function

109_Image_0.Png

12 Attendant seat slides along the attendant seat rails, providing a sliding and removable seat for the ambulance attendant.

13 Seatbelt assembly secures the attendant to the attendant seat when ambulance is in motion.

14 Rail notch secures the attendant seat in one of three locations along the attendant seat rails.

15 Attendant seat rails (two each) provide a track along which the attendant seat can be positioned.

16 Attendant seat latch is pushed to the attendant's right to release the locking mechanism holding the attendant seat stationary at rail notch locations.

2-55 K. Troop/Cargo Winterization Kit Equipment. Key Item And Function

1 Diverter assembly (damper) regulates amount of fresh outside air, interior

110_image_0.png

air, or a mixture of both to be circulated through the heater assembly.

2 Heater guard assembly protects personnel from accidental contact with hot heater components.

3 Heater provides a flow of heated air to interior of troop/cargo enclosure assembly.

4 Heater deflector directs heated air from heater to all areas of troop/cargo enclosure assembly.

5 Circuit breaker protects heater assembly from damage caused by electrical overloading. The circuit breaker is waterproof and automatically resets.

6 Heater control assembly operates heater and controls blower motor speed.

2-56

Key Item And Function

7 Dome light provides white light illumination for interior of top enclosure

111_image_0.png

assembly.

8 Blackout light provides blue light illumination for interior of top enclosure assembly during blackout conditions.

9 Heater data plate provides heater operating instructions.

10 Blackout/dome light switch controls operation of blackout lights and dome lights.

11 Door switch assembly activates blackout light or dome light when door is in closed position.

2-57 Key Item And Function

1 Rear door provides access into enclosure assembly for personnel.

112_image_0.png

2 Grab handle serves as a grabbing point to assist personnel when entering into enclosure assembly.

3 Antenna mounting bracket provides mounting point for AS 1729/VRC antenna and AB-652/GR antenna.

4 Trailer receptacle provides electrical power to towed equipment.

5 Fuel can mounting bracket provides easily accessible storage location for fuel can.

6 Door handle is turned to the horizontal position to unlatch rear door and to the vertical position to latch rear door. Door should be closed and securely latched before placing vehicle in motion.

2-58

Key Item And Function

7 Skid strips allow cargo to be easily loaded and unloaded from vehicle.

113_image_0.png

8 Rear step assembly lowers and folds out to provide easy access to interior of top enclosure assembly. Step assembly must be in stowed position before closing rear door in preparation for vehicle movement.

9 Blackout curtain blocks light illumination from inside top enclosure

113_image_1.png

assembly.

2-59

Section Ii. Preventive Maintenance Checks And Services

2-3. General

A permanent record of the services, repairs, and modifications made to these vehicles must be recorded. (Army) See DA Pam 738-750 for a list of the forms and records required and how to complete them. (Marine Corps) Refer to TM 470015/1 series.

2-4. Cleaning Instructions

a. Cleaning is an after operation service performed by the operator/crew to keep the vehicle in a state of readiness. Facilities and material available to operators for vehicle cleaning can vary greatly in differing operating conditions. However, vehicles must be maintained in as clean a condition as available cleaning equipment, materials, and tactical situations permit.

Damage to equipment will result.

Remember to clean windshield wipers of debris on a regular basis to ensure proper vision.

b. Cleaning Materials. Detailed descriptions of specific cleaning compounds, cleaning solvents, drycleaning solutions, and corrosion-removing compounds are found in TM 9-247.

c. General Guidelines. Table 2-1 provides a general guide of cleaning materials used in removing contaminants from various parts of the vehicle.

2-60

Table 2-1. General Cleaning Instructions
Cleaning Materials Used to Remove
Surface Oil/Grease Salt/Mud/Dust/Debris Surface Rust/Corrosion
Body Detergent; water; rags. Soapy water; soft brush; Corrosion-removing com
damp and dry rags. pound; bristle brush; dry
rags; and lubricating oil.*
Vehicle Interior Detergent; damp and Damp and dry rags. Corrosion-removing com-
(Metals) dry rags. pound; bristle brush; dry
rags; and lubricating oil.*
Glass Window cleaning Window cleaning Not applicable.
compound; dry rags. compound; dry rags.
Ballistic Glass Detergent; soapy water, Detergent; soapy water; Not applicable.
plastic polish; dry rags. plastic polish; dry rags.
Plastic Windows Soapy water; cream Soapy water; cream Not applicable.
cleaner; dry rags.*** cleaner; dry rags.***
NOTE
For removal of fungus and mold on soft top vehicle windows,
refer to para. 3-18.
Vehicle Interior Water; damp and dry Soapy water; damp and Not applicable.
(Seats and Straps) rags. dry rags.
Frame Detergent rinsed with Soapy water; damp and Corrosion-removing com
water; dry rags. dry rags. pound; wire brush; dry
rags; and lubricating oil.*
Engine and Drycleaning solvent; Soapy water; soft wire Bristle brush; warm
Transmission water; rags. brush; damp and dry rags. water; and dry rags.
Radiator Not applicable. Low pressure water or Not applicable.
air; soapy water; damp
and dry rags.
Oil Cooler Not applicable. Low pressure water or Not applicable.
air; soapy water; damp
and dry rags.**
Master Cylinder Detergent; rinsed with Soapy water; damp and Not applicable.
soapy water, dry rags. dry rags.
Rubber Damp and dry rags. Damp and dry rags. Not applicable.
Insulation
Tires Soapy water; damp rags. Soapy water; damp rags. Not applicable.
Wood Detergent; water; Low pressure water; Not applicable.
damp and dry rags. soapy water; damp and
dry rags.
After cleaning, apply light grade of lubricating oil to all unprotected surfaces to prevent *
continued rust.
** Cleaning between oil cooler and radiator. If more space is needed to clean mud and debris
between the oil cooler and radiator, refer to unit maintenance.
Operator Participation. Operator may perform this cleaning procedure under the supervision of unit level maintenance.
***After cleaning window zippers, apply zipper lubricant (appendix D, item 29).

2-5. Preventive Maintenance Checks And Services (Pmcs)

a. Designated Intervals.

Designated intervals are performed under usual operating conditions. PMCS intervals must be performed more frequently when operating under unusual conditions.

(1) BEFORE checks and services of PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE must be performed prior to placing vehicle or its components in operation.

(2) DURING checks and services of PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE must be performed while the vehicle and/or its components/systems are in operation.

(3) AFTER checks and services of PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE are performed upon completion of mission.

(4) WEEKLY checks and services of PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE are performed once every 7 days.

(5) MONTHLY checks and services of PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE are performed once every 30 days.

b. Procedures.

(1) For troubleshooting malfunctions, refer to table 3-1 or notify your supervisor.

(2) Use DA Form 2404 or DA Form 5988-E (automated) and report malfunctions to unit maintenance at once.

(3) Tools included with vehicle are to be used when making PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE checks and services. Wiping cloths are needed to remove dirt or grease.

(4) Refer to appropriate TMs for PMCS requirements on mounted systems (i.e., TOW missiles systems, radios, etc.).

(5) When performing lubrication procedures, you should be familiar with the equipment. Notify organizational maintenance or your supervisor if you have any questions relating to lubrication points.

C. Troublespots. Note

Dirt, grease, oil, and debris may cover up a serious problem. Clean as you check. Following precautions printed on container, use drycleaning solvent (SD-3) on all metal surfaces. On rubber or plastic material, use soap and water.

(1) Check all bolts, nuts, and screws. If loose, bent, broken, or missing, either tighten or report conditions to unit maintenance.

(2) Look for loose or chipped paint, and rust or cracks at welds. Remove rust and loose paint, and spot paint as required. If a cracked weld is found, report situation to unit maintenance.

(3) Inspect electrical wires and connectors for cracked or broken insulation.

Also look for bare wires, and loose or broken connections. Tighten loose connections. Report other problems to unit maintenance.

(4) Check hoses and fluid lines for wear, damage, and leaks. Ensure clamps and fittings are tight. (Refer to para. 2-6 for information on leaks.) (5) Check hinges for security and operation. (6) Check data, caution, and warning plates for security and legibility.

2-62 Change 3

2-5. Preventative Maintenance Checks And Services (Pmcs)

(Cont'D)

d. Not Ready/Available. If a vehicle is not able to perform the mission, equipment will be reported as not ready/available. Refer to DA Pam 738-750.

e. Correct Assembly or Stowage. Check each component for installation as an assembly, in the right place, and with no missing parts.

2-6. Fluid Leakage.

Wetness around seals, gaskets, fittings, or connections indicates leakage. A stain also denotes leakage. If a fitting or connector is loose, tighten it. If broken or defective, report it. Use the following as a guide: a. Class I. Leakage indicated by wetness or discoloration, but not great enough to form drops.

b. Class II. Leakage great enough to form drops, but not enough to cause drops to drip from item being checked/inspected.

c. Class III. Leakage great enough to form drops that fall from the item being checked/inspected.

Operation is allowable with Class I or II leakage except for brake system. Any brake fluid leakage must be reported. WHEN IN DOUBT, NOTIFY YOUR SUPERVISOR. When operating with Class I or II leaks, check fluid levels more frequently. Class III leaks must be reported immediately to your supervisor or to unit maintenance. Failure to do this will result in damage to vehicle and/or components.

2-7. Lubrication Requirements

For lubrication requirements and procedures, refer to appendix G.

2-63

Table 2-2. Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services
Location Item Item to Crewmember Not Fully Mission
No. Interval Check/ Procedure Capable if: Service
WARNING
Always remember the WARNINGS, CAU
TIONS, and NOTES before operating this
vehicle and prior to PMCS.
NOTE
Perform your before, after, and weekly checks
if:
a. You are the assigned driver but have not operated
the vehicle since the last weekly inspection.
b. You are operating the vehicle for the first time.
c. See separate manuals for smoke generator, TOW
launcher, and radios.
Table 2-2. Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services (Cont'd)
Location Item Item to Crewmember Not Fully Mission
No. Interval Check/ Procedure Capable if: Service
DRIVER CAUTION 1 Before Left Front,
Side If leaks are detected in Exterior the area of the transfer
case oil cooler, do not attempt to tighten
retaining nuts; internal damage to the transfer
case oil cooler may result. Notify unit maintenance.
NOTE
If leakage is detected, further investigation is
needed to determine the location and cause of
the leak.
a. Visually check underneath a. Any brake fluid vehicle for any evidence of leak; class III leak
fluid leakage. of oil, fuel, or coolant.
b. Visually check front and b. Any damage left side of vehicle for that will prevent
obvious damage that would operation. impair operation.
Table 2-2. Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services (Cont'd)
Item Location Crewmember Not Fully Mission
No. Interval Item to Check/ Service Procedure Capable If:
DRIVER
2 Before Left Side WARNING
Tires Operating a vehicle with
a tire in an underinflated
condition or with a ques tionable defect may lead
to premature tire failure
and may cause equipment
damage and injury or
death to personnel.
Visually check tires for presence Tire missing,
and under inflation. deflated, or unserviceable.
DRIVER
3 Before Rear NOTE
Exterior If leakage is detected,
further investigation is
needed to determine the
location and cause of
the leak.
a. Visually check underneath a. Any brake fluid
vehicle for evidence of fluid leak; class III
leakage. leak of oil, fuel, or
coolant.
b. Visually check rear of b. Any damage
vehicle for obvious damage that would prevent
that would impair operation. operation.
c. Inspect bumper supports c. Any damage
for cracks before towing trailer. that would prevent
operation.
Location Table 2-2. Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services (Cont'd)
Item No. Item to Check/ Crewmember Procedure Not Fully Mission Capable if:
Interval Service
4 Before Exhaust Louvers DRIVER (M996 and M996A1 only) Check air exhaust louvers to
ensure they are clear and free
of debris that would restrict air
flow. Clean any dirt or debris
from louvers.
5 Before Right NOTE
Front, Side If leakage is detected,
Exterior needed to determine
of the leak.
a. Visually check underneath vehicle for evidence of fluid a. Any brake fluid leak; class III
leak of oil, fuel, or coolant.
b. Visually check front and b. Any damage
right side of vehicle for obvi- that would prevent operation.
ous damage that would
DRIVER further investigation is the location and cause leakage. impair operation.
Table 2-2. Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services (Cont'd) Location
Crewmember Item Not Fully Mission Item to Interval Procedure No. Capable If: Check/
Service DRIVER
6 Before Right Side WARNING Tires Operating a vehicle with
a tire in an underinflated condition or with a ques
tionable defect may lead to premature tire failure
and may cause equipment damage and injury or
death to personnel. Visually check tires for Tire missing,
presence and under inflation. deflated, or unserviceable.
DRIVER 7 Before Front NOTE
If leakage is detected, investigation is needed
to determine the location and cause of the leak.
a. Visually check front of a. Any damage vehicle for obvious damage that will prevent
that would impair operation. operation. b. Visually check underneath b. Any brake fluid
vehicle for evidence of fluid leak; class III leakage. leak of oil, fuel, or
coolant.
DRIVER 7.1 Before Power CAUTION
Steering - Do not permit dirt, dust, or Reservoir - grit to enter power steering
r e s e r v o i r. Damage to power steering system will result
if power steering fluid becomes contaminated.
- Do not overfill power steering reservoir.
Damage to power steering system will result.
Table 2-2. Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services (Cont'd)
Item No. Interval Location Item to Check/ Service Crewmember Procedure Not Fully Mission Capable If:
7.1 Before Power Steering Reservoir (Cont'd) Check fluid in power steering reservoir. Fluid should be be tween "HOT" and "COLD" marks. Add fluid if level is
below "COLD" mark. DRIVER
8 Before Cooling System WARNING
If engine has been recently operated, do not remove radiator cap to check
coolant level. Cooling system is under pressure,
and escaping steam or coolant can cause burns.
CAUTION
Overheating, caused by lack of coolant, will cause engine damage.
Check coolant level in coolant tank. Level should be at or
above the "FULL COLD" line Add coolant if below the
"FULL" line.
DRIVER
9 Before Seat and NOTE
Seatbelts Vehicle operation with
inoperative seatbelts
may violate AR 385-55.
a. Check all seatbelts, including troop seat safety strap
for security, damage, and operation of buckle and clasp
ends.
b. Check operation of seat b. Seat adjustment
adjusting mechanism lock broken or
(driver's seat only). missing.
Location Table 2-2. Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services (Cont'd)
Item No. Interval Item to Check/ Service Crewmember Procedure Not Fully Mission Capable If:
10 Before Fire Extin- DRIVER a. Check for missing or a. Fire extinguisher
guisher damaged fire extinguisher. missing or damaged.
b. Check gauge for proper pressure of about 150 psi b. Pressure gauge needle in recharge
(1034 kPa). area.
c. Check for damaged or c. Seal broken
missing seal. or missing.
11 Deleted
Table 2-2. Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services (Cont'd)
Location Item Item to Crewmember Not Fully Mission
No. Interval Check/ Procedure Capable if: Service
DRIVER
12 Before Instrument WARNING Panel If gauges, instruments, or
instrument lights are inoperable or not within
ranges described in these checks, immediately
shut off engine and notify supervisor or unit
maintenance personnel. Continued operation of
vehicle may result in injury or damage to
equipment.
NOTE
If engine is warm, wait-to start light may not come on.
During cranking or after starting, light may go on
and off a few times.
a. Check wait-to-start light a. Wait-to-start and brake warning light. Turn light does not come
rotary switch to "RUN". Wait- on when engine is to-start and brake warning cold or wait light
light should come on. stays on continually. Brake warning light
does not come on.
Location Crewmember
Item No. Interval Item to Check/ Procedure Not Fully Mission Capable If:
Service
12 Before Instrument b. Start engine and check b. Engine will
Panel the following: not start.
(Cont'd) c. Engine oil pressure c. Oil pressure is
gauge. less than 6 psi (103
kPa) at idle.
d. Voltmeter. d. Voltmeter needle
stays in yellow or red
range.
e. Air restriction gauge. e. Air restriction
indicator reaches
red zone.
f. Brake warning light f. Brake warning
should go off when hand light stays on after
brake is released. hand brake is
released or comes on
while driving.
g. Check fuel gauge.
h. Check coolant h. Coolant temp
temperature gauge. erature gauge inop
erative or reads
greater than 230°F
(110°C).

Table 2-2. Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services (Cont'd)

126_image_0.png

2-72 Change 1

Table 2-2. Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services (Cont'd)
Item No. Interval Location Item to Check/ Service Crewmember Procedure Not Fully Mission Capable If:
14 Before Brakes DRIVER NOTE
Engine must be warmed
up and idling, trans
mission in "D" (drive), transfer in "H" (high),
and parking brake
released to perform the
following check.
a. Check brake pedal travel. a. Brakes will not
With vehicle at idle, transfer stop the vehicle.
in H, and transmission in D,
allow vehicle to move forward.
As vehicle moves, slowly de
press brake pedal. Pedal
should travel 1 to 1-1/2
inches before brakes take hold. After brakes take hold,
pedal may exceed the 1 to
1-1/2 inch travel. This is
normal.
b. Check parking brake. b. Parking brake
With parking brake fully inoperable or
applied, transmission in D unable to hold
or R, and transfer in H, vehicle vehicle.
should not move.
c. Check parking brake c. Parking brake
lever safety mechanism (if lever safety
equipped) to ensure that it mechanism (if
latches when parking brake is equipped) is not
applied. functioning
properly.
Location Table 2-2. Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services (Cont'd)
Item No. Interval Item to Check/ Service Crewmember Procedure Not Fully Mission Capable If:
System M997A1, and M997A2 only)
15 Before NBC DRIVER (M996, M996A1, M997, a. Check NBC system power switch for proper operation and security of mounting. All system fuses, including spares, should be present. b. Check NBC heater for
proper operation. When knob is turned clockwise, the light should come on,
indicating heater is working. c. Check for steady flow of air at hose outlets. If light does not come on, notify supervisor, and record on DA Form 2404.
DRIVER
16 Before Weapon Station (TOW and armament carriers, M966, M966A1, M1036, M1045, M1045A1, M1045A2, M1046, M1046A1, M1025, M1025A1, M1025A2, M1026, M1026A1, M1043, M1043A1, M1043A2, M1044, M1044A1, and M1121 only)
NOTE Weapon station binding should be checked with weapon system or equivalent weight applied to turret. Refer to appropriate system TM to determine weight of weapon system.
a. Check weapon station for binding by rotating 360 degrees in both directions at least five times. a. Weapon station binds.
Table 2-2. Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services (Cont'd)
Item Interval Location Item to Crewmember Not Fully Mission
No. Check/ Procedure Capable If:
Service
16 Before Weapon b. (Armament carriers only). b. Armament weapons
Station Check armament mounting required for mission:
(Cont'd) plate and bearing sleeve for Mounting plate or
security of mounting and bearing sleeve missing
obvious damage that would or any damage that
impair operation. will prevent or
impair mounting of
armament weapons.
c. (TOW vehicles only). Check c. Level vial is
inclinometer for proper opera- broken or no bubble
tion. Check level vial for breaks is present.
and/or bubbles.
DRIVER
17 During Controls a. Monitor all gauges. a. Engine oil
and Indicators pressure gauge reads less than approx
imately 40 psi
(276 kPa) under
normal driving con
ditions or less than
6 psi (41 kPa) at idle.
Coolant temperature
gauge reads greater
than 230°F (110°C).
Air restriction gauge
indicates restriction
in the air cleaner.
Voltmeter indicates a
loss of voltage.
b. Check speedometer
operation.
c. (Marine Corps only.)
Check hour/tachometer
operation.
DRIVER
18 During Brakes Check brakes for pulling or Brakes pull or grab.
grabbing.
DRIVER
19 During Steering Be alert for excessive sway, Handling is unstable
leaning to one side, or unstable turning is
handling. Check steering difficult or free
response for unusual free play, binding, or
play, binding, or shimmy. shimming detected.
Table 2-2. Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services (Cont'd)
Item Location Crewmember Not Fully Mission
No. Interval Item to Procedure
Check/ Service Capable If:
DRIVER
19.1 During Pedal Accelerator Check response to accelerator feed. Check for sticking or Pedal sticking or binding.
binding pedal.
DRIVER
20 During Power- Be alert for unusual noises or Unusual noise or
train vibrations from engine, trans- vibration detected.
mission, transfer, differentials,
propeller shafts (especially under load), axle shafts,
or wheels.
DRIVER
21 During Trans- Check transmission for Transmission slips
mission proper operation. or will not shift.
DRIVER Climatic conditions require air
22 During Ambulance NOTE conditioning and A/C
Air-condi- Perform the following is inoperable, and
tioner if outlet duct air is
inspection only if the air
(M997, conditioner is required not cooler than
ambient
M997A1, for climatic conditions.
and Turn air conditioner on and temperature.
M997A2 set blower to maximum cooling
only) speed settings. Wait 5 minutes
to allow temperature to stabi
lize. Check outlet ducts for cool
air.
DRIVER
22.1 After Gear a. Check transmission shift a. Lever inoperable
Shifter lever operation. Shift trans- or binds between
Lever mission through all operating range detents.
ranges. Lever should move
freely through all range positions.
b. Check transfer shift lever b. Lever inoperable
operation. With transmission or does not engage
in "N," shift transfer lever in all ranges with
through all range positions. engine not running.
Lever should move freely
through all range positions.
Item No. Interval Location Item to Check/ Crewmember Procedure Not Fully Mission Capable If:
Service DRIVER
23 After Trans CAUTION
mission - Do not permit dirt, dust,
fluid fluid or grit to enter trans
mission oil dipstick tube.
Internal transmission
damage will result if
transmission oil becomes
contaminated.
- Do not overfill transmission.
Damage to transmission will
result. An over-full
transmission can also indicate a transfer case fluid
leak. Notify unit
maintenance if transmission
fluid is above crosshatch
mark.
NOTE
- Apply brake and move shift lever through each gear
range. Pause for about three
seconds in each range,
ending in "P".
- Transmission fluid level
should be checked with
engine running, parking
brake set, transmission shift
lever in "N," and vehicle on
level ground. Fluid level
should be at crosshatch
marks on dipstick.
- Let the vehicle idle with all
accessories off for three
minutes.
- Engine operating temp
erature of 190-230°F (88- 110°C) must be reached
before performing AFTER
checks.
Check transmission fluid
level. If level is below the crosshatch marks, add
sufficient fluid to bring the
level to the crosshatch marks.

Table 2-2. Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services (Cont'd)

Location Table 2-2. Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services (Cont'd)
Item No. Interval Item to Check/ Service Crewmember Procedure Not Fully Mission Capable If:
24 After Fuel Filter DRIVER WARNING Do not perform fuel system checks, inspec
tions, or maintenance
while smoking or near
fire, flames, or sparks.
Fuel may ignite, causing
damage to vehicle and injury or death to
personnel.
NOTE
A rubber hose can be attached to drainvalve
to catch fuel in container
before opening drain
valve. If fuel is clear, put
fuel back in fuel tank.
a. Check fuel for contamin- a. Fuel is not clear
ation. With engine running, after draining 1 pint
open drainvalve. Allow fuel to drain in suitable container (0.47 L).
until it runs clear. Close valve.
NOTE
Fuel retained in the drain
valve may drip when vehicle vibrations occur.
This is normal and does
not constitute a leak.
Wipe drainvalve with rag until excess fuel is
removed.
b. Check for leaks. b. Class III
leakage evident.
c. Stop engine and remove
rubber hose from drainvalve,
if installed.
Table 2-2. Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services (Cont'd)
Location Item Item to Crewmember Not Fully Mission
No. Interval Check/ Procedure Capable if: Service
DRIVER
25 After Left Side WARNING Tires Operating a vehicle with
a tire in an underinflated condition or with
questionable defect may lead to premature tire
failure and may cause equipment damage and
injury or death to personnel.
Visually check tires for under- Tire deflated or inflation, cuts, gouges, otherwise unser
cracks, or bulges. viceable. Remove all penetrating
objects.
DRIVER
26 After Mirror NOTE (Left Side) Vehicle operation with
damaged or missing outside rearview mirrors
may violate AR 385-55. Check mirror for presence,
cracks, and serviceability.
DRIVER
NOTE 27 After Left Front, Side If leakage is detected,
Exterior further investigation is needed to determine the
location and cause of the leak.
a. Visually check underneath a. Any brake vehicle for evidence of fluid fluid leak; Class III
leakage. leak of oil, fuel, or coolant.
Table 2-2. Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services (Cont'd)
Location Crewmember Not Fully Mission
No. Interval Item to Check/ Service Procedure Capable If:
27 After Left Front, S i d e b. Visually check halfshaft cv boots and ball joint boots
E x t e r i o r ( C o n t ' d ) for presence, rips, tears, or cuts.
c . Inspect frame crossmem- c . Crossmembers or
bers and underbody support underbody support
for missing hardware, cracks, are missing any
bends, and breaks. Notify unit hardware, broken,
maintenance if rust is present, cracked, or if a bent
but the base metal is sound. or rusted-through
condition is present that would affect
vehicle operation.
d. Visually check for body d. Any damage
damage that would impair that will prevent
operation of vehicle. operation.
DRIVER
After Rear Exterior NOTE If leakage is detected, further investigation is
needed to determine the location and cause of
the leak.
a. Visually check underneath a. Any brake fluid
vehicle for evidence of fluid leak; class III leak
leakage. of oil, fuel, or coolant.
b. Visually check halfshaft cv boots and ball joint boots
for presence, rips, tears, or cuts.
c . Inspect frame cross- c . Crossmembers or
members and underbody underbody support
support for missing hardware, are missing any
cracks, bends, and breaks. Notify unit maintenance if rust hardware, broken, cracked, or if a bent
is present, but the base metal or rusted-through
is sound. condition is present
that would affect
vehicle operation.
d. Inspect bumper or cross- d. Bumper, cross
member and inner braces in area around towing pintle for member or an inner brace is cracked or
cracks or breaks. broken.
Item 28
Table 2-2. Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services (Cont'd)
Item Location Item to Crewmember Not Fully Mission
No. Interval Check/ Procedure Capable if:
Service
DRIVER
(M996, M996A1, M997,
M997A1, and M997A2 only)
29 After Patient a. Check presence and a. One or more
Compart- operation of ceiling white lights inoperative or
ment lights, blackout lights, and unserviceable.
spotlights.
b. Check operation of b. Any blackout
blackout switches at rear switch inoperable.
step, rear doors, and bulk head door.
c. Inspect condition and security of litter racks and
components.
d. Inspect upper litter rack d. Hinges or latches
hinges and latches for inoperative, dam
proper operation, damage, aged, or missing.
or missing components.
e. Inspect tension straps, sup
port straps, litter straps, and footman loops for security of
mounting, damage, and
missing components.
f. Inspect oxygen bottles and mounting components for
security of stowage when
oxygen bottles are in
stowed position.
g. Inspect IV straps and hangers for security of
mounting, damage, and
missing components.
Table 2-2. Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services (Cont'd)
Location Item Item to Crewmember Not Fully Mission
No. Interval Check/ Procedure Capable if: Service
29 After Patient h. Check operation of rear h. Rear door han Compart- doors, handles, and latching dles and latching
ment mechanisms. Check for mechanisms do not (Cont'd) loose or missing compo- operate properly.
nents. Door should not bind Missing or damaged and should close securely components. Rear
when latched shut. doors do not operate properly.
i. Inspect rear door seals, i. Door seals allow step seals, bulkhead door emission of light
and rear door vent seals signature under (M996 and M996A1 only) for blackout conditions
proper installation and (detectable from 50 ft condition. Door seals must [15 ml of vehicle).
not allow emission of light signature under blackout conditions.
DRIVER
30 After Right Side WARNING Tires Operating a vehicle with a tire
in an underinflated condition or with questionable
defect may lead to premature tire failure and
may cause equipment damage and injury or death to personnel.
Visually check tires for under- Tire deflated, inflation, cuts, gouges, cracks, or otherwise
or bulges. Remove all unserviceable. penetrating objects.
DRIVER
NOTE 31 After Mirror (Right Vehicle operation with
Side) damaged or missing outside rearview mirrors
may violate AR 385-55. Check mirror for presence,
cracks, and serviceability.
Item No. Interval Location Item to Check/ Crewmember Procedure Not Fully Mission Capable If:
Service DRIVER
32 After Right Front, NOTE If leakage is detected,
Side further investigation is
Exterior needed to determine the
location and cause of
the leak.
a . Visually check underneath a . Any brake fluid
vehicle for evidence of fluid leak; class III leak of
l e a k a g e . oil, fuel, or coolant.
b. Visually check halfshaft
cv boots and ball joint boots for presence of rips, tears,
cuts.
c . Inspect frame crossmem- c . Crossmembers or
bers and underbody support underbody support
for missing hardware, cracks, bends, and breaks. Notify unit are missing any hardware, broken,
maintenance if rust is present cracked, or if a bent
but the base metal is sound. or rusted-through condition is present
that would affect vehicle operation.
d . Visually check front and d . Any damage that
right side of vehicle for obvi- will prevent opera
ous damage that would im- tion.
pair operation.
DRIVER
33 After Engine Oil CAUTION
- Do not permit dirt, dust, or grit to enter
engine oil dipstick tube.
Internal engine damage
will result if engine oil becomes contaminated.
- Do not overfill engine
crankcase. Damage to
engine will result.
Table 2-2. Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services (Cont'd)
Item No. Interval Location Item to Check/ Service Crewmember Procedure Not Fully Mission Capable If:
33 After Engine Oil (Cont'd) Check engine oil level. Level should be between "ADD" and "FULL." If level is below Oil appears milky.
"ADD," add oil to bring level between the "ADD" and "FULL"
marks.
DRIVER
34 After Power WARNING
Steering Notify unit maintenance
Lines and Fittings if power steering system has class III leak. Loss of
power assist could occur if this condition exists.
Check power steering lines Class III leakage
35 Deleted and fittings for leaks. evident.
Item No. Interval Location Item to Check/ Crewmember Procedure Not Fully Mission Capable If:
Service DRIVER
36 After Cooling System Inspect radiator hoses for leakage. Class III leakage evident.
DRIVER
37 After Master Cylinder Visually check master cylinder lines for leaks and security of Any leak or cover missing.
cover.
DRIVER
37.1 After Windshield a. Visually check windshield
Washer washer jar for damage.
Jar b. Check windshield washer
fluid level.
DRIVER
38 After Lights CAUTION
Never set the rotary switch to "RUN" to check
the lights. This drains the batteries and can
burn out the glow plugs and control box.
NOTE Vehicle operation with
damaged or inoperable headlights may violate
AR 385-55.
a. Check for presence and operation of service drive,
turn signal, blackout marker, marker, blackout drive, and
side marker lights.
b . Check operation of tail/stop lights. Push down brake pedal
approximately 1/4 in. Ta i l / s t o p - lights should come on.
Table 2-2. Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services (Cont'd)
Item Location Crewmember Not Fully Mission
No. Interval Item to Check/ Service Procedure Capable If:
DRIVER
39 After Horn NOTE
Vehicle operation with
inoperative horn may
violate AR 385-55.
Check operation of horn if
tactical situation permits.
DRIVER
40 After Wind- NOTE
shield and Vehicle operation with
Wipers damaged windshield
may violate AR 385-55.
a . Check windshield for dam- a. Windshield is
age that would impair opera- cracked, broken, or
tor's vision. discolored (cloudy) sufficiently to impair
operator's vision.
NOTE
Vehicle operation with
inoperative wipers may
violate AR 385-55.
b. Check windshield wiper
and blade for presence and
damage.
c. Check windshield wipers
and washer for proper
operation.
DRIVER
41 After Light NOTE
Switches Ensure all switches are
in the "OFF" position.
Failure to turn switches
to the "OFF" position
when not in use will
drain the batteries.
Check and ensure all switches
are in the "OFF" position.
Table 2-2. Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services (Cont'd)
Item No. Interval Location Item to Check/ Service Crewmember Procedure Not Fully Mission Capable If:
41.1 Weekly Hand Throttle DRIVER a. Check hand throttle and mounting bracket for security. Check throttle release button to ensure hand throttle cable
operates properly. b. Check hand throttle cable for corrosion, nicks, breaks, or burns.
42 Weekly Tires DRIVER WARNING
- Do not exceed 30 psi (207 kPa) cold bias tire inflation pressure. Overinflation of tire may result in premature tire failure, damage to equipment, and injury or death to personnel.
- Do not exceed 50 psi (345 kPa) cold radial tire inflation pressure. Overinflation of tire may result in damage to equipment and injury or death to personnel.
NOTE - Check tire size designator
on sidewall for tire con struction identification: 36x12.50-16.5 LT-Bias ply, 37x12.50R 16.5 LT-Radial.
- Both radial and bias tires are non-directional. They provide equal traction and performance when installed in either direction.
Table 2-2. Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services (Cont'd)
Item No. Interval Location Item to Check/ Service Crewmember Procedure Not Fully Mission Capable If:
NOTE
Refer to TM 9-2610-200-14 for additional tire
information.
42 Weekly Tires a. Check tire tread depth. a. Any tread is
(Cont'd) Tread should not be worn be- worn to height of
yond level of wear bar (1/16 in. tread wear indicator
(1.59 mm) or less). Wear bars are molded across the (1/16 in. (1.59 mm) or less). Any cut,
tread pattern in the valley be- gouge, or crack that
tween the center rib and lugs. extends to the cord
The tread wear indicator body or any bulges.
letters (TWI) are molded on Tires exhibit
the sidewall to aid in locating excessive inner and
the wear bar. outer wear or
The wear bars are not evi
dent on new or very low
mileage tires. The wear
bars will appear after
usual use.
balance.
NOTE

142_image_0.png

Table 2-2. Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services (Cont'd) Location
Crewmember Item Not Fully Mission Item to Interval Procedure No. Capable If: Check/
Service 42 Weekly Tires b. Deleted. b. Deleted.
(Cont'd) c. Check for missing or loose c. Any wheel stud
wheel stud nuts and lug nuts. nut or lug nut is Tighten loose lug nuts and broken or missing.
have unit maintenance tighten stud nuts and lug nuts to
proper torque.
Table 2-2. Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services (Cont'd)
Location Item Interval No. Item to Check/ Service Crewmember Procedure Not Fully Mission Capable If:
42 Weekly Tires (Cont'd) NOTE Perform step d for bias tires and step e for radial tires. (BIAS TIRES ONLY)
WARNING Do not exceed 30 psi (207 kPa) cold bias tire inflation pressure. Over inflation of tire may result in premature tire failure, damage to equipment, and injury or death to personnel. Check tire size designator on sidewall for tire construction identification: 36x12.50-16.5 LT-Bias ply.
d. Gauge tires for correct air pressure using tire inflation gauge. Adjust as necessary.
FRONT REAR
VEHICLE Standard Metric Standard Metric
AT GVW (psi) (kPa) (psi) (kPa)
M966, M998, M1025, M1026, M1035, M1036, M1038, M1043, M1044, M1045, M1046, M1121 20 138 22 152
M996, M997, M1037, M1042 20 138 30 207
UNLOADED* M998, M1038 (only) 16 110 18 124
MUD, SAND, AND SNOW (30 mph [48 kph] max. speed) All models 12 83 16 110
CROSS COUNTRY M998 series (except M1097) 15 103 20 138
*Driver plus one passenger
Table 2-2. Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services (Cont'd)
Location Item Crewmember Not Fully Mission
Item to Interval Procedure
No. Check/ Capable If:
Service
42 Weekly Tires (Cont'd) (RADIAL TIRES ONLY)
WARNING
Do not exceed 50 psi
(345 kPa) cold radial tire
inflation pressure. Over
inflation of tire may
result in premature tire
failure, damage to
equipment, and injury
or death to personnel.
Check tire size designator
on sidewall for tire construc tion identification: 37x12.50R
16.5 LT-Radial.
e. Gauge tires for correct air
pressure using tire inflation
gauge. Adjust as necessary.
VEHICLE FRONT REAR
Standard Metric Standard Metric
AT GVW (psi) (kPa) (psi) (kPa)
M966, M966A1, M998, 20 138 25 172
M998A1, M1025, M1025A1,
M1026, M1026A1, M1035,
M1035A1, M1036, M1038,
M1038A1, M1043, M1043A1,
M1043A2, M1044, M1044A1,
M1045, M1045A1, M1046,
M1046A1, M1121
M996, M996A1, M997, 20 138 30 207
M997A1, M997A2, M1037,
M1042
M1025A2, M1035A2, M1045A2, 25 172 40 276
M997A2, M1043A2, M1097A1, 35 241 40 276
M1097A2, M1123
M1097 36 248 42 290
UNLOADED* All models 15 103 18 124
MUD, SAND, AND SNOW 12 83 20 138
(30 mph [48 kph] max. speed)
All models
*Driver plus one passenger
Table 2-2. Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services (Cont'd)
Item Interval No. Location Item to Check/ Service Crewmember Procedure Not Fully Mission Capable If:
42 Weekly Tires (Contd)
FRONT REAR
VEHICLE Standard Metric Standard Metric
AT GVW (psi) (kPa) (psi) (kPa)
CROSS COUNTRY M998 and M998A1 series (except M1097 and M1097A1) M998A2 series, M1097, 15 20 103 138 20 138 30 207
M1097A1, and M1123
43 Weekly Exhaust System DRIVER Check exhaust system for security of all mounts, tightness of clamps and bolts, rusted conditions, damaged Any mounts are broken, pipes are rusted through or broken, and any
44 Weekly Shock Absorbers pipes, and any indication of an exhaust leak. DRIVER a. Visually inspect shock absorb- ers for leaks, damage, and indication of an exhaust leak. a. Class III leakage or damage is evident;
security of mounting. If leaks are found, notify your supervisor. mounting damaged or loose.
b. Check that spring coil is centered on shock absorber. b. Spring coil has shifted off center.
SHOCK ABSORBER SPRING COIL
Table 2-2. Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services (Cont'd)
Item Location Item to Crewmember Not Fully Mission
No. Interval Check/ Procedure Capable If:
Service
DRIVER
45 Weekly Doors and Check operation of doors and
Windows windows.
DRIVER
46 Weekly Tailgate Check operation of tailgate.
Check that tailgate latches
securely and operates
properly.
DRIVER
47 Weekly Armament (TOW and armament carriers
Carriers M966, M966A1, M1036,
M1045, M1045A1, M1045A2, M1046, M1046A1, M1025,
M1025A1, M1025A2, M1026,
M1026A1, M1043, M1043A1,
M1043A2, M1044, M1044A1,
and M1121 only)
a. Inspect cargo shell door a. Lift cylinders or
for bends, warping, binding, latches bent, warped,
warped, and ease of operation. binding, or inopera
Inspect latching mechanisms tive.
for proper operation. Inspect
lift cylinders for bends
and security of mounting.
a.1. Inspect retaining wire a.1. Retaining wire
rope for damage and security rope is damaged,
of mounting. missing, or not
secured.
b. Inspect strap assembly
for frays and security of
mounting.
c. Check cargo shell door
for alignment as follows:
(1) Insert a piece of paper
between the door seal and door opening.
(2) With door closed, seal
should offer resistance to
pulling out paper. If door seal
does not offer resistance,
adjustment is required.
Table 2-2. Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services (Cont'd) Location
Crewmember Item Not Fully Mission Item to Interval Procedure No. Capable If: Check/
Service DRIVER
48 Weekly Patient (M996, M996A1, M997, Compart- M997A1, and M997A2 only)
ment WARNING
Be sure cables are securely connected to
the steps before using. Failure to do so may
cause injury to personnel. a. Inspect step assembly.
b. Check operation of step latch. Latch should securely
engage step striker to secure step assembly in the stowed
position. c. Check operation of attend- c. Seatbelt, atten
ant seat and rail. Inspect seat dant seat, or rail is and rail for damage, missing broken or missing.
components, and binding during operation. Ensure
proper adjustment and operation of seatbelt.
d. Check operation of am bulatory patient seat (M996
and M996A1 only). Check for damage or missing components.
e. Inspect handhold straps and footman loops for secur
ity, damage, or missing compo nents (M996 and M996A1 only).
Item No. Interval Location Item to Check/ Crewmember Procedure Not Fully Mission Capable If:
Service DRIVER
49 Weekly Front Arctic (Vehicle w/Arctic Winterization Kit and/or Troop/Cargo
Heater Winterization Kit)
and/or a. Check heater and heater a. Heater inoper
Rear Tr o o p / controls for proper operation. able and mission
Cargo requires heater.
H e a t e r b . Check fuel lines and fittings b . Class III fuel
for leaks, cracks, or breaks. leakage is evident
and mission requires h e a t e r.
c. Check electrical cables c. Frayed or
and connections for security, or frayed or broken wires. broken wires.
d. Check heater exhaust pipe d. Heater exhaust
for damage, security of mount- damaged or com
ing, and missing components. ponents missing.
e. Check fuel filter for leaks e. Class III leak
or damage. evident.
DRIVER
50 Weekly Crew Door (M966, M966A1, M996, M996A1, M997, M997A1,
M997A2, M1025, M1025A1,
M1025A2, M1026, M1026A1, M1036, and M1121 only)
a . Check crew door assembly a . Visible cracks,
for visible cracks that would or door does not
make door unserviceable secure properly.
or unable to secure properly.
b. Check crew door assembly b. Loose, missing,
latch, hinges, and door handle or unserviceable
for damage, looseness, or missing parts. parts.
Table 2-2. Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services (Cont'd) Location
Crewmember Item Not Fully Mission Item to Interval Procedure No. Capable If: Check/
Service DRIVER
WARNING 51 Weekly Air Cleaner If NBC exposure is sus
pected, all air filter media should be handled by per
sonnel wearing protective equipment. Consult your
unit NBC Officer or NBC NCO for appropriate
handling or disposal instructions.
Check air cleaner weathercap, Evidence of damage to air cleaner assembly, air intake air cleaner weather
hose, and air horn for security cap, body, air intake of mounting and damage. hose, or mounting
that will allow unfil tered air to enter the
e n g i n e .
DRIVER 52 Weekly Alternator Visually check power steering Damaged or
Brackets and alternator brackets for cracked bracket, or cracks, damage, or loose loose bolts.
bolts.
DRIVER 53 Weekly Cooling a. Check fan and fan pulley a. Fan blade or
System for damage. pulley is bent, broken, cracked, or
loose. b. Check radiator for leaks, b. Class III
clogged or damaged fins, and leakage evident. loose or damaged hoses to and
from the engine.
Location Crewmember Item Not Fully Mission Item to
Interval Procedure No. Capable If: Check/
Service 53 Weekly Cooling c. Check support mounts, c. Support mounts
System side brackets, and side bracket broken, damaged, (Cont'd) weldments on radiator for or missing hardware.
missing hardware, damage, Side brackets or broken welds. damaged or weld
ments broken. SIDE BRACKET WELDMENTS
NOTE Belt flutter at idle is
normal in the HMMWV belt drive system. It does
not necessarily indicate that the belts are loose.
Belt flutter should disappear as the engine
is accelerated.
d. Check for loose, missing, d . Any drivebelt is broken, cracked, or frayed drive- missing, broken,
belts (all models except "A2" frayed or dry rotted. and M1123 vehicles). Notify Belt fiber has more
supervisor if loose drivebelts than one crack 1/8-in. are suspected. (3.18 mm) in depth or
50% or frays more than 2 in. (5.1 cm) long.
e. For A2 and M1123 models, e. Serpentine check for looseness, misalignment, drivebelt is loose,
breaks, splits, or frayed misaligned (off one or serpentine belt. more grooves on any
pulley), breaks or splits in outer surface,
frays on either edge if cord is broken.
f . Check fan shroud for f . Fan shroud d a m a g e . broken, cracked, or
l o o s e . g. Check engine oil cooler and g . Class III leak
hoses for damage and leaks. e v i d e n t .
Table 2-2. Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services (Cont'd)
Item No. Interval Location Item to Check/ Crewmember Procedure Not Fully Mission Capable If:
Service DRIVER
54 Weekly Batteries WARNING - Don't smoke, have open
flames, or make sparks around batteries, espe
cially if the caps are off.
Batteries can explode
and cause injury or death. - Remove all jewelry such
as rings, dog tags, bracelets,
etc. If jewelry contacts battery terminal, a direct
short will result, causing
instant heating of tools, severe injury to personnel,
or damage to equipment.
a. Remove companion seat a. One or more bat
and check batteries for dam- teries missing, un
aged casing, terminal posts, and security of mounting. serviceable, leaking, terminal or cables
Notify unit maintenance if are loose, corroded,
any defects are found. or holddowns are
not secure.
b. Electrolyte should be
filled to the level/split ring
in the battery filler opening
(vent). If fluid is low, fill with
distilled water to split ring
(refer to appendix D, item 27).
If fluid is gassing (boiling),
notify unit maintenance.
NOTE
Water in battery box can be caused by debris
plugging battery box
drain holes. If water is present, clean debris from
battery box drain holes.
c. Check battery box for cor
rosion or water on bottom of battery tray.
Table 2-2. Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services (Cont'd) Location
Crewmember Item Not Fully Mission Item to Interval Procedure No. Capable If: Check/
Service DRIVER
55 Weekly Weapon (M966, M966A1, M1036, M1045, Station M1045A1, M1045A2, M1046,
M1046A1, M1025, M1025A1, M1025A2, M1026, M1026A1,
M1043, M1043A1, M1043A2, M1044, M1044A1, and
M1121 only) a. Inspect weapon station
hatch and hinge for bends, cracks, warped, or damaged
areas. b. Inspect brake handle for
ease of operation. c. Inspect gunner's sling for
tears or frays. DRIVER
56 Weekly TOW (M966, M966A1, M1036, Missile M1045, M1045A1, M1045A2,
Rack M1046, M1046A1, and M1121 only)
a. Inspect TOW missile rack a. Rack will not latch assembly and support support or stow six
braces for presence and TOW missiles. ease of operation.
b. Inspect straps for tears and frays.
56.1 Weekly Floorboard Check for presence of TU adapter TU adapter. missing or damaged.
DRIVER 57 Weekly Gunner's Inspect gunner's platform Gunner's platform
Platform risers for binding, ease of cannot be adjusted. operation, or missing lock
pins.
Table 2-2. Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services (Cont'd)
Item No. Interval Location Item to Check/ Service Crewmember Procedure Not Fully Mission Capable If:
58 Weekly Tiedowns DRIVER a. Inspect stored equipment
footman loops for presence
and security of mounting.
Inspect straps for tears
or frays.
b. Inspect stowage brackets,
footman loops, and tiedowns for security of mounting,
damage, and missing
components.
c. Inspect all tiedown
strap assemblies for proper
operation, frays, damage, cleanliness, and security
of mounting.
DRIVER
59 Weekly Bulkhead Doors (M996, M996A1, M997,
M997A1, and M997A2 only)
Check operation of bulkhead
doors. Doors should securely
latch when closed or fully opened. Inspect all door com
ponents for damage, adjust
ment, or missing components.
Location Crewmember Item Not Fully Mission Item to
Interval Procedure No. Capable If: Check/
Service DRIVER
60 Weekly Environ- a. Check security of A/C ment heater control box mounting.
Control b. Check Heating, Ve n t i l a t i o n System and Air Conditioning (HVAC)
filter (para. 3-27) for dirt or debris. Clean filters of dirt and
debris that would restrict air flow. NOTE
Insufficient cooling could be a result of loss of R12.
This is a gas, therefore leaks cannot be detected.
If lines or fittings are suspect, the vehicle is to
be considered non-mission capable and sent to
Direct Support for further inspection(s).
c. Inspect exposed HVAC system ducts, hoses, fitting
lines, vents, and mounting hardware for damage,
leaks, missing components, and security of mounting.
d. Inspect exposed wiring d. Wiring harness harnesses for breaks, frayed broken, frayed, or
insulation, loose or damaged damaged. Mounting connectors, and loose, damaged, hardware missing.
or missing mounting hardware.

Table 2-2. Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services (Cont'd)

Table 2-2. Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services (Cont'd) Location
Crewmember Item Not Fully Mission Item to Interval Procedure No. Capable If: Check/
Service DRIVER
61 Weekly NBC (M996, M996A1, M997, System M997A1, and M997A2 only)
a. Inspect exposed NBC equipment for security of
mounting, damage, and missing components.
b. Inspect NBC stowage compartment door seals,
hinges, latches, and straps for proper operation, damage,
and missing components. c. Inspect M13 patient pro
tective mask, hoses, and end connectors for damage,
leaks, or missing components. Inspect adapter for stripped
threads or other damage.
Item No. Interval Location Item to Check/ Crewmember Procedure Not Fully Mission Capable If:
Service DRIVER
62 Weekly Canvas and Bows (M998, M998A1, M1038, and M1038A1 w/Soft Top Enclosure)
a. Inspect cargo cover for tears, punctures, and ripped
seams.
b . Inspect windows for cracks
and scratches.
c . Inspect bows and mounting brackets for damage and
security of mounting.
d. Inspect footman loops and straps for tears, frays,
and security of mounting.
DRIVER
63 Weekly Tow Pintle Check pintle hook for looseness, damaged locking mechanism,
and presence of cotter pin.
DRIVER
64 Weekly Tow Check presence and condition
Hooks of tow hooks (front and rear).
DRIVER
65 Weekly Trailer Check trailer electrical
Electrical Connector connector for damage.
DRIVER
66 Weekly Parking Check combination service/ Actuating lever or
Brake parking brake assemblies; inspect parking brake for ob- spring is missing or broken.
struction of the actuating lever
or broken or missing spring.
67 Deleted
Table 2-2. Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services (Cont'd)
Item Interval Location Item to Crewmember Not Fully Mission
No. Check/ Procedure Capable If:
Service
DRIVER
68 Monthly Corrosion Visually inspect vehicle for Any corroded
indication of corrosion or through condition
cracks and/or breaks. or cracks or breaks
that would affect ve
hicle operation.
DRIVER
69 Monthly Tailgate Check tailgate for corroded- Any corroded
through condition and/or dam- through condition or
age. If tailgate does not latch damage that would
securely or is damaged, notify unit maintenance. affect vehicle opera tion.
DRIVER
70 Monthly Red (M996, M996A1, M997,
Cross M997A1, and M997A2 only)
Plate a. Check cross marking
latches and hinges for proper
operation, security of
mounting, damage, or miss ing components.
b. Inspect stowage compo
nent door hinge, seal, and
latch for proper operation,
damage, or missing compo
nents.
DRIVER
71 Monthly Shelter (M1037, M1042, M1097,
Mount Kit M1097A1, M1097A2, and
M1123 only)
Inspect shelter mounting Any mounting bolt
bracket for security of mount- missing.
ing and loose or missing bolts.
Table 2-2. Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services (Cont'd) Location
Crewmember Item Not Fully Mission Item to Interval Procedure No. Capable If: Check/
Service DRIVER
72 Monthly Winch (Vehicles with winch) a. Check winch controls for
proper operation. b. Check winch cable for
kinks, frays, or breaks. c. Inspect tree saver strap
for cuts and abrasions. If red safety thread is visible in
main body of strap, the strap shall be discarded.
d. If it is known the strap has been overloaded, it shall
be discarded. e. Wrap winch cable
(para. 2-26.1).
DRIVER 73 Monthly Troop (M998, M998A1, M1038, and
Seats M1038A1 w/Troop Seats Kit) a. Inspect troop seats for
missing or damaged lock pins.
b. Inspect troop seats b. Mission requires and backrest for security troop seats and
of mounting. troop seats are inoperative or
damaged.
Table 2-2. Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services (Cont'd)
Item No. Interval Location Item to Check/ Service Crewmember Procedure Not Fully Mission Capable If:
74 Monthly TOW Power Cable DRIVER (M966, M1036, M1045, M1046 - serial numbers 1 through 19,410)
Inspect TOW power cable
at the point where it exits the battery box. Chafing of
the nylon braid that covers
the cable is acceptable.
If there is evidence that
the wire inside is exposed,
notify unit maintenance.
the cable is acceptable.
If there is evidence that
the wire inside is exposed,
notify unit maintenance.

160_image_0.png

Location Crewmember Item Not Fully Mission Item to
Interval Procedure No. Capable If: Check/
Service DRIVER
75 Monthly Zippers a. Check canvas top and door zippers for corrosion and/or
damage. b. Apply interlock lubricant
(zipperease) (refer to appendix D, item 29) to canvas
top and door zippers. 76 Monthly Skid Plates (Vehicles equipped with
skid plate) a. Inspect skid plate and
shield for bends, breaks, or cracks.
b. Inspect shields for loose fasteners, or damaged or
missing components. Tighten loose fasteners, or replace
damaged or missing components.

161_image_0.png

Table 2-2. Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services (Cont'd)

Section Iii. Operation Under Usual Conditions

2-8. General

This section provides instructions for vehicle operations under moderate temperature, humidity, and terrain conditions. For vehicle operation under unusual conditions, refer to section IV of this chapter.

Before you operate your vehicle, be sure to perform the preventive maintenance checks and services shown in table 2-2.

2-9. Break-In Service

a. Perform all before operation checks and services as indicated in table 2-2. b. Upon receipt of vehicle, or after engine replacement, the following break-in speeds and precautions should be observed during the first 500 miles (805 km) of operation:

2-10. Starting The Engine

To apply parking brake, grasp handle firmly and pull upward until handle is locked in a straight-up position.

a. Ensure parking brake is applied. b. Adjust driver's seat (para. 2-14).

Visibility may be restricted with right rearview mirror.

c. Adjust left and right rearview mirrors. Ensure both mirrors provide a clear view (para. 3-24 or 3-25).

d. Ensure all windows are clean. If not, clean windows before attempting to move vehicle (refer to table 2-1).

Ensure all slack from two-point seatbelt adjusting strap or threepoint seatbelt is removed. Two-point seatbelt retracts but does not lock in any position. Three-point seatbelt retracts and will lock only during sudden stops or impact. Injury to personnel will result if an accident occurs and seatbelt is not used or adjusted properly.

Fasten unused seatbelts to protect the belt ends from damage or dirt contamination.

e. Fasten and adjust seatbelt (para. 2-16). f. Place transmission shift lever (8) in "N" (neutral) and transfer case shift lever (7) in desired range. See table 1-9 for transfer case range selection.

f.1. Ensure all electrical switches (e.g. lights, wipers, and blower motor) in

163_image_0.png

vehicle are turned to "OFF".

g. Place rotary switch (1) to "RUN" and wait until WAIT-TO-START lamp assembly (2) goes out.

2-106 Change 3

· If ambient temperature is above 0°F (-18°C), do not operate starter continuously for more than 20 seconds; wait 10 to 15 seconds between periods of starter operation. Failure to do this will result in damage to the starter.

· If any instrument reading is not normal, stop engine. Failure to do this will result in damage to the engine.

Refer to troubleshooting, table 3-1.

· If engine does not start, leave rotary switch in "RUN" position and wait 10 to 15 seconds before trying to restart. Failure to do this will result in damage to glow plugs or starter.

· If you accidentally turn the rotary switch to "ENG STOP" position after an unsuccessful attempt to start, wait 90 seconds before trying to restart. Failure to do this will result in damage to glow plugs.

h. Place rotary switch (1) to 'START." Release lever after engine starts. Lever will return automatically to "RUN".

Before the engine reaches operating temperature, the WAIT-TO- START lamp may flicker and a clicking noise may be heard. This is due to glow plug relay cycling and is a normal condition.

i. Allow engine to warm up for approximately one minute and ensure instruments indicate the following: (1) Oil pressure gauge (4) should register above approximately 6 psi (41 kPa) with engine at idle. (2) Voltmeter (6) should register in green area. (3) Fuel gauge (9) should indicate fuel level in fuel tank. (4) Air restriction gauge (3) should not register within the red zone.

j. Stop engine if any of the following conditions occur: (1) Excessive engine vibration. (2) Oil pressure does not register or suddenly drops to or less than approximately 6 psi (41 kPa) with engine at idle.

(3) Air restriction gauge (3) is within the red zone.

k. If engine overheating occurs: (1) Park vehicle, allow engine to idle. (2) Observe coolant temperature gauge (5) for steady cooling.

Stop engine if coolant temperature gauge suddenly increases beyond approximately 230°F (110°C), or damage to engine will result.

(3) If engine coolant temperature continues to increase, or does not decrease, as indicated by engine temperature gauge (5), stop engine. Perform troubleshooting procedures in table 3-1.

2-107

2-11. Placing Vehicle In Motion

The following procedures apply to a vehicle being driven in good weather on high traction surfaces where little or no wheel slippage is evident. For operating the vehicle under unusual conditions; i.e., unusual terrain, cold weather, ice, snow, dusty or sandy areas, mud or rain, refer to section IV.

a. Be sure all auxiliary equipment and tools are stored for travel.

b. With transmission shift lever (2) in "N" (neutral), select "H" (high range) transfer case driving gear range using transfer case shift lever (3). This range is for normal driving in good weather, or on high traction surfaces.

c. Start engine (para. 2-10). d. Set vehicle light switch (7) (para. 2-13).

Ensure parking brake is released completely before operating the vehicle. Failure to do so may cause damage to equipment.

e. Depress service brake pedal (6). Depress parking brake release button and release parking brake lever (4). The brake warning lamp assembly (1) should go out.

f. Place transmission shift lever (2) in "D" (drive) or " D " (overdrive) for

166_image_0.png

M1123 and "A2" series vehicles), for normal driving.

g. Release service brake pedal (6), and depress accelerator pedal (5). Accelerate at a safe, steady speed.

h. Upshift or downshift transmission shift lever (2) when road and/or traffic conditions change.

Extreme caution shall be taken when transporting personnel. Rollover protection and seatbelts are available for the crew area only and are not provided in the troop/cargo area. Failure to use basic safe driving skills may result in injury or death to personnel and damage to equipment.

To help judge clearance more accurately, guide rods can be used at the discretion of the unit commander.

i. Exercise extreme caution when transporting personnel. Rollover protection is available for the crew area only and is not provided in the troop/cargo area. Although certain design characteristics of the vehicle, such as vehicle width, ground clearance, independent suspension, etc., provide improved capabilities, accidents can still happen.

Vehicle speed must be reduced consistent with weather and road/ terrain conditions. Obstacles such as stumps and boulders must be avoided. Failure to use basic safe driving techniques/skills may result in injury or death to personnel and damage to equipment.

j. Operators are reminded to observe basic safe driving techniques/skills when operating the vehicle, especially when transporting personnel.

2-12. Stopping The Vehicle And Engine

a. Release accelerator pedal (5). b. Depress service brake pedal (6) to bring vehicle to a gradual stop.

The automatic transmission of the M1123 and"A2" series vehicles has a "PARK" position. Proceed to steps f and g for the M1123 and "A2" series vehicles.

c. Move transmission shift lever (3) to "N" (neutral). d. If vehicle must be backed into parking position, have another person act as a ground guide to direct reverse operation.

To apply parking brake, grasp handle firmly, and pull upward until handle is locked in a straight-up position.

e. Once vehicle is completely stopped, apply parking brake lever (4).

f. Once vehicle is completely stopped, apply parking brake lever (4). g. Move transmission shift lever (3) to "P" (park). h. Turn light switch (7) to "OFF." i. Place rotary switch (1) to "ENG STOP."

If there is engine run-on, pinch the fuel return line with your fingers or a pair of pliers to stop the engine. Notify unit maintenance.

j. Lock steering wheel with cable (2) and chock wheels if tactical situation permits.

168_image_0.png

A1, A2, AND M1123 MODELS

2-13. Operation Of Vehicle Light Switch

a. To illuminate instrument panel: (1) Lift unlock lever (2) to "UNLOCK" and hold in position. (2) Turn selector switch lever (1) to any "ON" position except "B.O. MARKER." (3) Turn auxiliary lever (3) to "DIM" or "PANEL BRT" (bright).

b. For normal daylight driving, turn selector lever (1) to "STOPLIGHT." c. For night driving, turn selector lever (1) to "SERVICE DRIVE." The headlight dimmer foot switch is depressed to provide high beam service light operation. The indicator light (4) on the instrument panel should illuminate when high beams are operating.

d. In blackout operations: (1) When driving vehicle, turn selector lever (1) to "B.O. DRIVE." (2) When vehicle is parked, turn selector lever (1) to "B.O. MARKER." e. To illuminate parked vehicle at night (if tactical situation permits): (1) Keep selector lever (1) in "SERVICE DRIVE." (2) Turn auxiliary lever (3) to "PARK." f. Move turn signal lever up for right turns, down for left turns. g. For hazard warning lights (blinking lights):

169_image_0.png

operation of the brake lights. For vehicles built in 1990 and after, a brake light override feature is installed.

(1) Turn selector lever (1) to "SERVICE DRIVE" or "STOPLIGHT." (2) Pull warning hazard tab out and move turn signal lever up to lock lever in place.

(3) To deactivate, move turn signal lever back to neutral.

h. For horn operation, turn selector lever (1) to either "STOPLIGHT" or "SERVICE DRIVE."

170_image_0.png

Perform steps a and b for vehicles with old configuration driver's seat. Perform steps c and d for vehicles with new configuration driver's seat.

171_image_0.png

a. To adjust seat (1), exit vehicle and lift seat (1) up and slide seat (1) forward or rearward so that seat mount pins (3) are positioned in desired slots (2).

b. Adjust seat (1) for most comfortable and effective position.

c. To adjust horizontal position of seat:

171_image_1.png

(1) Pull seat adjustment lever (4) upward and slide seat (5) to desired position. (2) Release seat adjustment lever (4) to lock seat (5) into position.

d. To adjust vertical position of seat: (1) Pull seat adjustment lever (4) upward and allow body weight to lower seat (5). (2) To raise seat (5), pull seat adjustment lever (4) upward and remove body weight from seat (5). (3) Release seat adjustment lever (4) to lock seat (5) in desired position.

2-114

2-15. Companion Seat Assembly And Battery Box Cover Replacement

a. Removal of companion seat assembly and battery box cover.

172_image_0.png

(1) Pull seat adjustment lever (10) upward and slide companion seat assembly (6) forward. (2) Release two latches (9) securing companion seat assembly (6) and battery box lever (7) to battery box (8) (3) Lift and pull companion seat assembly (6) and battery box cover (7) forward and remove from battery box (8).

b. Installation of companion seat assembly and battery box cover.

(1) Install companion seat assembly (6) and battery box cover (7) on battery box (8) and secure with two latches (9).

(2) Pull seat adjustment lever (10) upward and slide companion seat assembly (6) to desired position.

2-115

a. Two-Point Seatbelt.

Ensure all slack from two-point seatbelt adjusting strap is removed. Two-point seatbelt retracts but does not lock in any position. Injury to personnel will result if an accident occurs and two-point seatbelt is not in use or adjusted properly.

(1) Seatbelt Fastening. Pull seatbelt (1) across body and fasten strap in belt buckle (3). (2) Seatbelt Adjustment. Pull adjustable strap (4) to remove slack from seatbelt (1). Seatbelt (1) must fit snugly across operator's hips.

(3) Seatbelt Unfastening. Push release button (2) on belt buckle (3) to release seatbelt (1).

b. Three-Point Seatbelt.

Ensure all slack from three-point seatbelt is removed. Three-point seatbelt retracts and will lock only during sudden stops or impact. Injury to personnel will result if an accident occurs and three-point seatbelt is not in use or adjusted properly.

(1) Seatbelt Fastening. Pull shoulder harness and seatbelt (6) across body and fasten latch plate (5)

173_image_0.png

to belt buckle (3).

(2) Seatbelt Adjustment. Pull shoulder harness strap (6) through latch plate (5) and remove slack from seatbelt (6). Seatbelt (6) must fit snugly across operator's hips, shoulder, and chest.

(3) Seatbelt Unfastening. Push release button (2) on belt buckle (3) to release seatbelt (6).

2-116

2-17. Defroster Operation (All Except A2 Vehicles)

A. To Defrost Windshield:

(1) Start engine (para. 2-10). (2) Push fresh air intake lever (4) forward to close grille. (3) Slide baffles (2) to the right to close air vents. (4) Loosen thumbscrew (3) and position deflector to close air flow to the floor of vehicle. Tighten thumbscrew (3).

(5) Turn heater fan switch (6) "ON" to desired setting, "HIGH" OR "LOW." (6) Position heater control knob (5) to desired setting.

· To obtain maximum air flow to driver's side windshield only, pull defroster control knob halfway out.

· To obtain even air flow to both sides of the windshield, pull defroster control knob all the way out.

· To allow warm air into crew area while defrosting windshield, slide baffles to open air vents.

174_image_0.png

(7) Position defroster control knob (1) to desired setting.

2-18. Defroster Operation (A2 Vehicles)

To defrost windshield:

175_image_0.png

(1) Start engine (para. 2-10). (2) Push fresh air intake lever (3) forward to close grille. (3) Turn heater fan switch (4) "ON" to desired setting, "HIGH" or "LOW." (4) Position heater control knob (2) to desired setting. (5) Push defroster control knob (1) in.

2-118

2-19. Heater Operation (All Except A2 Vehicles)

To operate heater: (1) Start engine (para. 2-10). (2) Push fresh air intake lever (4) forward to close grille.

Perform step 3 if air flow to floor of vehicle is closed.

(3) Loosen thumbscrew (3) and position deflector to allow air flow to floor of vehicle. Tighten thumbscrew (3).

(4) Slide baffles (2) to the left to open air vents. (5) Turn heater fan switch (6) "ON" to desired setting, "HIGH" OR "LOW."

For maximum heat, pull heater control knob all the way out.

176_image_0.png

(6) Position heater control knob (5) to desired setting. (7) Push defroster control knob (1) in.

2-119

2-20. Heater Operation (A2 Vehicles)

To operate heater.

(1) Start engine (para. 2-10). (2) Push fresh air intake lever (3) forward to close grille. (3) Turn heater fan switch (4) "ON" to desired setting, "HIGH" or "LOW."

Note

177_Image_0.Png

For maximum heat, pull heater control knob all the way out.

(4) Position heater control knob (2) to desired setting. (5) Push defroster control knob (1) out.

2-120

2-21. Tailgate Operation

a. Lowering Tailgate.

Do not use tow pintle as a step when entering or exiting vehicle cargo area. Failure to do so may result in injury to personnel or damage to equipment.

The tailgate should not be lowered further than the length of tailgate chains. Tailgate chains should always be used to support tailgate when open. Do not allow tailgate to slam against lifting shackles. Damage to equipment may occur.

(1) Remove two tailgate chain hooks (6) securing tailgate (7) to rear of

178_image_0.png

vehicle body.

(2) Lower tailgate (7) and secure with two tailgate chain hooks (6).

b. Raising Tailgate.

(1) Raise tailgate (7). (2) Secure tailgate (7) to rear of vehicle body with two tailgate chain hooks (6).

A. Tool Stowage Rack Removal.

(1) Release two tension latches (3) from latch strikes (2) and lower tool rack (4) (2) Lift tool rack (4) out of support bracket (1) to remove tool rack (4).

b. Tool Removal.

Note location of straps for installation.

(1) Loosen and disconnect two strap assemblies (8) securing tools. (2) Remove mattock head (6) from tool rack (4). (3) Remove shovel (7) from retainer (12) by turning 90° from stowage position and sliding through tool rod support (9).

(4) Remove mattock handle (5) from tool rack (4). (5) Unlatch ax head retainer (11) and slide head out of ax head support (1(and remove ax (13).

For improved pioneer tool accessibility, tools can be stored inside the vehicle cargo area at the discretion of the unit commander. Tools must be secured in place.

C. Tool Installation.

(1) Install ax (13) by sliding ax head into ax head support (10); secure with retainer (11).

179_image_0.png

(2) Install mattock handle (5) in tool rack (4).

(3) Position shovel (7) through tool rod support (9) and secure handle of shovel into retainer (12). (4) Install mattock head (6) in tool rack (4). (5) Connect and tighten two strap assemblies (8) to secure tools to tool rack (4).

180_image_0.png

180_image_1.png

181_image_0.png

D. Tool Stowage Rack Installation.

(1) Place tool rack (5) in support bracket (2).

(2) Raise tool rack (5) and secure tension latches (4) to latch strikes (3).

181_image_1.png

2 - 2 2 . 1 . Max Tool Kit Stowage Operat I O N

Stowage location on M1025A2, M1043A2, and M1045A2 vehicles is behind left rear seat. Stowage location on M1035A2, M1097A2, and M 1123 vehicles is on tunnel. The following procedure is for M997A2 v e h i c l e s .

A. Tool Removal.

( 1 ) Disconnect two strap assemblies (4) in right footwell (3) and remove ax (1) and max tool kit case (2).

( 2 ) Remove the following attachments from max tool kit case (2):

182_image_0.png

incorporated into seven basic hand tools.

B. Reversible Rake/Hoe Attachment.

(1) Connect rake/hoe attachment (2) (with either rake or hoe in the working position) into socket (4) on end of ax (1).

Thumbscrew must be seated tightly in rake/hoe attachment and socket of ax. Check thumbscrew often to be sure it does not work l o o s e .

(2) Install thumbscrew (3) on rake/hoe attachment (2) and in socket (4) of ax (1).

Tighten thumbscrew (3).

(3) To remove rake/hoe attachment (2), remove thumbscrew (3) from rake/hoe attachment (2) and ax (1).

c. Shovel Attachment.

Shovel attachment is shown. Broad pick, pick, and mattock attachments are attached basically the same.

(1) Connect shovel attachment (5) into socket (4) on end of ax (1). (2) Insert safety locking pin (6) into hole in end of taper on shovel attachment (5). (3) To remove shovel attachment (5), remove safety locking pin (8) from shovel attachment (5) and ax (1).

d. Tool Installation.

(1) Replace attachments in the max tool kit case (7). (2) Install max tool kit case (7) and ax (1) with two strap assemblies (9) in right footwell (8) of vehicle.

183_image_0.png

ATTACHMENT

183_image_2.png

SHOVEL ATTACHMENT

183_image_1.png

2-124.2 Change 1

2-23. Slave Starting Operation

hookup.

a. Position slaving vehicle and disabled vehicle close enough for cable b. Stop slaving vehicle engine.

Vehicles with kits 5705623 and 5705624 and serial numbers 100,000 and above are equipped with screw-on covers.

c. Remove cover from slave receptacle of disabled vehicle and slaving vehicle.

Ensure all battery cables in disabled vehicle are properly connected before connecting slave cable. Damage to batteries, cables, or serious injury to personnel may result from improperly connected batteries.

Use a twisting motion when installing slave cable to the receptacle. Forcefully pushing the cable onto the receptacle may cause damage to the receptacle mount.

Ensure all electrical switches in both vehicles are turned off.

d. Connect slave cable to the slave receptacle of both vehicles. e. Start slaving vehicle engine. f. Start disabled vehicle engine.

Use a twisting motion when disconnecting slave cable from the receptacle. Forcefully pulling the cable from the receptacle may cause damage to the receptacle mount.

g. After engine starts, disconnect slave cable from both vehicles.

h. Install receptacle covers on both vehicles. i. Clean and stow slave cable.

2-24. Towing Operation

Table 2-3. Towing Operations
Vehicle Towing Mode Prop Shafts
Rear wheels up Front off
Front wheels up Rear off (Parking brake rotor removed)
Four wheels on ground Front and rear off (Parking brake rotor
removed)

A. Towing Vehicle From Front (Four Wheels On Ground). Caution

Always use a tow bar when towing vehicle. Failure to do so may cause damage to equipment.

(1) Attach towbar (2) to the towing shackle brackets (4) of the vehicle to be towed and to the pintle hook (1) of the towing vehicle.

(2) Attach safety chain (5) to vehicle frames directly behind bumper (3) or bumperette (6). Let safety chain (5) dip to about 1 ft (30.5 cm) from the ground.

(3) If towing operation is over a distance of 30 mi (48 km), or towing speed is expected to be over 30 mph (48 kph), remove propeller shafts specified in table 2-3.

(4) Place transmission and transfer case shift levers in "N" (neutral). (5) Depress parking brake release button and release parking brake lever. (6) Proceed with towing operation. The vehicle is capable of towing a vehicle of similar weight, fully loaded, for a distance of 50 mi (80 km).

186_image_0.png

2-127

B. Towing Vehicle From Front (Front Wheels Up). Note

Ensure that towbar is connected to towing brackets as shown in illustration.

(1) Attach towbar (5) to brackets (1) and to wrecker towing pintle.

Ensure that wrecker hoisting boom and hook are centered over the lifting shackles.

Failure to do this may result in difficult turning during towing operations.

(2) Install chain assembly (3) through lifting shackles (2) and attach chain assembly (3) to the wrecker's

187_image_0.png

hoisting hook (4).

(3) Secure safety chain (6) to towed vehicle's frame and to wrecker directly behind the bumpers and let safety chain (6) dip to about 1 ft (30.5 cm) from the ground.

(4) Hoist vehicle to be towed. (5) If towing operation is more than a distance of 30 mi (48 km), or towing speed is expected to be over 30 mph (48 kph), remove rear propeller shaft and rotor.

(6) Place transmission and transfer case shift levers in "N" (neutral). (7) Depress parking brake release button and release parking brake lever. (8) Proceed with towing operation.

It will be necessary to remove the wrecker lifting eyes (shackle) prior to attaching the towbar arms.

(1) Attach the eye of the towbar (5) to the pintle (7) of the vehicle requiring towing and the towbar arms to the wrecker rear lifting eye attaching bracket.

Ensure that wrecker hoisting boom and hook are centered over the lifting shackles.

Failure to do this may result in difficult turning during towing operations.

(2) Install chain assembly (3) through the rear lifting shackles (8) and attach the chain assembly (3) to the wrecker's hoisting hook (4).

(3) Secure safety chain (6) to towed vehicle's frame and to wrecker directly behind bumper or bumperette and let safety chain (6) dip to about 1 ft (30.5 cm) from the ground.

Prior to towing vehicle with rear wheels up, secure steering wheel to prevent front wheels

188_image_0.png from turning. Failure to do this may cause damage to vehicle and injury or death to personnel. (4) Secure steering wheel.

(5) If towing operation is more than a distance of 30 mi (48 km), or towing speed is expected to be over 30 mph (48 kph), remove front propeller shaft.

(6) Place transmission and transfer case shift levers in "N" (neutral). (7) Depress parking brake release button and release parking brake lever. (8) Lift rear wheels from ground. (9) Proceed with towing operations.

d. Towing S250 Shelter Vehicle from Rear (Rear Wheels Up).

It will be necessary to remove the wrecker lifting eyes (shackle) prior to attaching the towbar arms.

(1) Attach the eye of the towbar (3) to the pintle (4) of the vehicle requiring towing and the towbar arms to the wrecker rear lifting eye attaching bracket.

Ensure that wrecker hoisting boom and hook are centered over the lifting shackles.

Failure to do this may result in difficult turning during towing operations.

If necessary, relocate the rear lifting shackles from the ends of the bumper to the location indicated.

(2) Install the two hooks of chain assembly (1) through the rear lifting shackles (6) and attach the chain assembly (1) to the wrecker's hoisting hook (2).

(3) Secure safety chain (5) to towed vehicle's frame and to wrecker directly behind bumpers and let safety chain (5) dip to about 1 ft (30.5 cm) from the ground.

Prior to towing vehicle with rear wheels up, secure steering wheel to prevent front wheels from turning. Failure to do this may cause damage to vehicle and injury or death to personnel.

(4) Secure steering wheel. (5) If towing operation is over a distance of 30 mi (48 km), remove front propeller shaft. (6) Place transmission and transfer case shift levers in "N" (neutral). (7) Depress parking brake release button and release parking brake lever (8) Lift rear wheels from ground.

Do not exceed 15 mph (24 kph) towing speed. Avoid sharp turns and U-turns when towing. Failure to comply may cause damage to equipment.

(9) Proceed with towing operations.

190_image_0.png

2-131

E. Towing M996, M996A1, M997, M997A1, And M997A2 Ambulance Vehicles From Rear (Rear Wheels

Up).

(1) Install eye (12) of towbar (9) in pintle hook (11) of towing vehicle and secure pintle hook (11) with cotter pin (10).

(2) Remove two safety pins (16) and connector pins (3) securing two clamps (2) to towbar extension legs (7) and remove clamps (2).

(3) Install two clamps (2) on rear bumper (1) of disabled vehicle with adjusting nuts (17) facing downward and clamp chains (18) over top of bumper (1).

(4) Remove two safety pins (14) and extension pins (13) securing extension legs (7) to towbar (9), and adjust extension legs (7) length to attach to two clamps (3). Secure extension legs (7) to two clamps (2) with two connector pins (3) and safety pins (16).

(5) Secure extension legs (7) to towbar (9) with two extension pins (13) and safety pins (14).

(6) Tighten two adjusting nuts (17) on clamps (2) to secure clamp chains (18) to bumper (1).

Wrecker hoisting boom should be positioned so that chain from wrecker boom hook to towing pintle makes minimal contact with rear of ambulance body. It may be necessary to extend towbar legs to provide sufficient hoisting chain clearance to prevent damage to rear of ambulance body.

(7) Attach hoisting chain (5) to wrecker boom hook (6) and towing pintle (4) of towed vehicle, ensuring towing pintle latch (15) is facing downward.

(8) Attach and secure safety chain (8) to frame of disabled vehicle and to wrecker, directly behind bumper (1). Allow chain (8) to dip to approximately 1 ft (30.5 cm) above ground.

Prior to towing vehicle with rear wheels up, secure steering wheel to prevent front wheels from turning. Failure to do this may cause damage to vehicle, injury, or death.

(9) Secure steering wheel. (10) If towing distance is more than 30 mi (48 km), remove front propeller shaft. (11) Place transmission and transfer case shift levers in "N" (neutral) position. (12) Lift rear end of disabled vehicle off ground.

Do not exceed 15 mph (24 kph) towing speed. Avoid sharp turns and U-turns when towing. Failure to comply may cause damage to equipment.

(13) Proceed with towing operations.

2-132

192_image_0.png

2-25. Trailer Towing

Towing trailers too large or too small for the vehicle capacity is dangerous. These trailers do not track vehicle properly, cargo shifting occurs, and the likelihood of trailer capsizing during movement is increased. This could result in damage to equipment, and injury or death to personnel.

Be sure to close tailgate before towing trailer. Failure to do so may cause damage to the master cylinder.

All vehicles are capable of towing M116 Series and M101 Series trailers and the M102 Howitzer. The M998 Series and A1 Series have a maximum towed load capacity of 3,400 lb. The Heavy Variant (M1097, M1097A1, M1097A2 and M1123) and A2 Series have a maximum towed load capacity of 4,200 lb. Only vehicles that have been retrofitted with MWO 9-2320-280-20-6 Airlift Bumper Reinforcement, or MWO 9-2320-280-20-7 Crossmember Reinforcement, are authorized to tow M1101 and M1102 trailers. Due to the numerous model differences, you must refer to Table 2-3.1 to determine towing authorization for the M1101 and M1102.

Change 2 2-132.1 The ambulances are authorized to tow trailers only during administrative or tactical moves, when not transporting patients. Trailer payloads should be evenly distributed to prevent excessive tongue loads.

MWO Requirements
HMMWV Model Number Description M1101 M1102 <3400 lb <4200 lb (1544 kg) (1905 kg) Remarks
M998/M998A1 Cargo/Troop A A
M1038/M1038A1 Cargo/Troop A A
M1097/M1097A1/M1097A2 Heavy Variant B B B B
M1123 Heavy Variant C C C C
M966/M966A1 Tow Carrier A A
M1121 Tow Carrier A A
M1036 Tow Carrier A A
M1045/M1045A1 Tow Carrier A A
M1045A2 Tow Carrier C C C C
M1046/M1046A1 Tow Carrier A A
M1025/M1025A1 Armament Carrier A A
M1025A2 Armament Carrier B B B B
M1026/M1026A1 Armament Carrier A A
M1043/1043A1 Armament Carrier A A
M1043A2 Armament Carrier C C C C
M1044/M1044A1 Armament Carrier A A
M1037 Shelter Carrier B1 B1 See Note
M1042 Shelter Carrier B1 B1
M996/M996A1 Ambulance B1 B1
M997/M997A1 Ambulance B1 B1
M997A2 Ambulance B B B B
M1035/M1035A1 Ambulance A A
M1035A2 Ambulance B B B B

Table 2-3.1. Vehicle Trailer Towing Requirements

Key: A = MWO 9-2320-280-20-7 B = MWO 9-2320-280-20-6 B1 = Need MWO 9-2320-280-20-6 but must change stencil to read 3400 lb (1544 kg) instead of 4200 lb (1907 kg).

C = Comes equipped. No MWO required. <3400 lb (1544 kg) = Any system mounted on HMT Chassis with GVW of 3400 lb (1544 kg) or less.

<4200 lb (1907 kg) = Any system mounted on HMT Chassis with GVW of 4200 lb (1907 kg) or less.

Note: Pintle extensions are required on vehicles with Shelter Standardized Integrated Command Post System (SICPS) type II. If vehicle is equipped with SICPS (M788) mounted, MWO 9-2320-280-20-6 is not required.

2-26. Electric Winch Operation

a. General. The vehicle electrical system is used to power the winch. It is recommended to have engine running while operating the winch so the alternator recharges the battery. Increased engine rpms can be maintained by use of the hand throttle. When engaging or disengaging the clutch, it may be necessary to rotate the drum by hand to align gears.

B. Preparation For Use. Note

The eye of the winch cable needs a thimble to keep wires from shearing or breaking. Refer to unit maintenance for installation.

(1) Park vehicle directly facing object to be winched. Place transmission shift lever in "N" (neutral), or "P" (Park) for M1123 and A2 vehicles.

(2) Apply parking brake. (3) Start engine (para. 2-10). (4) Chock wheels.

c. Unwinding Winch Cable.

Do not power out winch cable for more than 10 ft (3 m). Use free spool for paying out long lengths of winch cable. Failure to free spool long lengths of winch cable will cause damage to winch.

(1) Turn clutch lever (1) counterclockwise to "FREE SPOOL."

Allow 1 ft (30.5 cm) of slack in winch cable prior to start of winching operations. This allows time for winch motor start-up for maximum pulling power.

(2) Pull out cable (5) by hand to desired length. Connect to load leaving 1 ft (30.5 cm) of slack in cable (5).

D. Pulling Load. Note

Refer to table 1-16 (6,000 lb), or table 1-17 (Optional 9,000 lb), Winch Data, for pulling load capacity.

(1) Remove remote control switch (3) from stowage box (4). (2) Turn clutch lever (1) clockwise to "ENGAGED."

Direct all personnel to stand clear of winch cable during winch operation. A snapped winch cable will cause injury or death.

195_image_0.png

switch to prevent winch overload. If winch stops repeatedly during operation and restarts in approximately five seconds, the electronic current limiter is being activated, indicating an overload condition.

Do not fully apply hand throttle during engine "NO LOAD" condition. Damage to engine may result.

(3) Pull out hand throttle until desired engine speed is obtained. (4) Operate remote control switch (3) to "IN" or "OUT" until load has been retrieved.

e. Securing Winch After Operation.

Winch cable must be wound onto the drum under a load of at least 500 lbs (227 kg) or outer wraps will draw into the inner wraps and damage winch cable.

(1) Wind winch cable (5) until hook (2) is 4 ft (1.2 m) from cable guide (6). (2) Turn clutch lever (1) counterclockwise to "FREE SPOOL" and rotate drum by hand to retrieve the remaining cable.

(3) Place remote control switch (3) in stowage box (4). (4) Turn clutch lever (1) clockwise to "ENGAGED." (5) Release hand throttle.

Change 1 2-134.1

2-26.1. Hydraulic Winch Operation

a. General. The vehicle power steering system is used to power winch.

Operating winch requires vehicle to be running. Applying vehicle brakes or turning steering wheel can be done while operating winch, but this may cause winch to stop. To achieve 100% pulling power, do not brake or steer while operating winch. It is possible to pay out vehicle's winch cable without vehicle running. This is accomplished with the freespool method. Keep no less than five cable wraps on drum during all winch operations.

B. Preparation For Use.

(1) Park vehicle directly facing object to be winched and place transmission in "N" (neutral) or "P" (park) for M1123 and A2 vehicles.

(2) Place transfer selector lever in low lock. (3) Apply parking brake. (4) Chock wheels. (5) Start engine (para. 2-10).

c. Unwinding Winch Cable.

(1) Move selector levers (2) and (3) to "FREE". This setting on winch is "FREESPOOL".

Allow 1 ft. (30.5 cm) of slack in winch cable prior to start of winching operations. This allows time for winch motor start up for maximum pulling power.

(2) Pull out winch cable (1) to desired length. Connect to load, leaving 1 ft.

(30.5 cm) of slack in cable (1).

(3) If retrieving load by moving vehicle and not winding winch cable, move winch selector levers to "WINCH LOCKED UP" position.

2-134.2 Change 3

197_image_0.png

D. Powering Winch In And Out. Caution

(1) Align drum gears.

(a) Remove remote control (6) from storage compartment (7) under passenger seat.

(b) Remove cap (10) from controller plug (8) and connect hand controller connector (9) to controller plug (8).

"LOCK LOW GEAR" is the preferred winch speed for all recovery and wrapping operations.

(c) Move winch selector lever (1) to "LOW". Move winch selector lever (5) to "FREE".

Direct all personnel to stand clear of winch cable during winch operation. A snapped winch cable may cause injury or death.

Do not move winch levers with load on winch or when powering winch in or out.

(d) Power winch in and out with no load on cable for 1/2 second at a time until full engagement is accomplished.

(2) Attach winch cable (3) to load. Press "OUT" remote control button (11) or "IN" remote control button (12) until load has been retrieved.

This winch uses right-lay bottom feed method of winch cable on winch drum. Ensure cable wrap begins from right side of winch drum.

(3) Power in winch cable (3), ensuring cable wraps (2) are tight. (4) Continue powering in winch cable (3) under load until approximately four feet (1.2 m) from hook. Disconnect load and power in, keeping cable taut, until hook clevis touches fairlead roller (13). Clevis should hang freely with less than one foot (.31 m) of cable exposed.

E. Securing Winch After Operation.

(1) Move levers (1) and (5) to "FREE" positions and rotate drum by hand

199_image_0.png

to retrieve remaining cable.

(2) Remove hand controller connector (9) from controller plug (8) and place remote control (6) in stowage compartment (7).

(3) Move lever (1) to "LOW" position and lever (5) to "HIGH" position to lockup winch (4) (4) Install cap (10) on controller plug (8).

199_image_1.png

Change 3 2-135

2-27. Fire Extinguisher Operation

a. Before Operation.

(1) Ensure operator PMCS have been accomplished and needle of indicator gauge (1) is in the green zone. Refer to table 2-2.

(2) Refer to para. 2-2 for fire extinguisher stowage location.

B. During Operation.

(1) To operate fire extinguisher (4), remove from stowage bracket (5).

Remove locking pin (2) and direct nozzle (6) to source of flames.

(2) Squeeze handles (3) together and direct extinguishing agent to base of flames. To extinguish burning liquid in a container, direct extinguishing agent against inside of container, just above burning liquid.

C. After Operation.

(1) Stow fire extinguisher (4) in stowage bracket (5). (2) Notify unit maintenance to replace or recharge fire extinguisher (4) after use.

200_image_0.png

Section Iv. Operation Under Unusual Conditions

2-28. Special Instructions

a. General. Special instructions for operating and maintaining vehicles under unusual conditions are included in this section. Unusual conditions are extreme temperatures, humidity, and/or terrain. Special care in cleaning and lubrication must be taken in order to keep vehicles operational when operating under unusual conditions.

This vehicle has been designed to operate safely and efficiently within the limits specified in this TM. Operation beyond these limits is prohibited IAW AR 750-1 without written approval from the Commander, U.S. Army Tank-automotive and Armaments Command, ATTN: AMSTA-CM-S, Warren, MI 48397-5000.

NOTE Except where noted, all normal operating procedures will apply in addition to special instructions for unusual operating conditions.

b. Cleaning. Refer to para. 2-4 for cleaning instructions and precautions. c . L u b r i c a t i o n . Refer to appendix G for proper lubricating instructions. d. Driving Instructions. (1) FM 21-305, Manual for the Wheeled Vehicle Driver, contains special driving instructions for operating wheeled vehicles.

(2) FM 55-30, Army Motor Transport Unit Operations, contains instructions on driver selection, training, and supervision.

(3) FM 9-207, Operation and Maintenance of Ordnance Materiel in Cold Weather, contains instructions on vehicle operation in extreme cold of 0°F to -65°F (-18°C to -54°C).

(4) Other documents with information on vehicle operation under unusual conditions are: (a) FM 31-70 Basic Cold Weather Manual ( d ) FM 90-5 Jungle Operations ( b ) FM 31-71 Northern Operations ( e ) FM 90-6 Mountain Operations ( c ) FM 90-3 Desert Operations e . Special Purpose Kits. Paragraphs describing special purpose kits for operation under unusual conditions are: ( 1 ) Deep water fording operation, para. 2-37. ( 2 ) Arctic operation, para. 2-39 or 2-40.

f . Transmission Range Selection. For proper transmission range selection, refer to table 1-7 or table 1-8. If transmission range selection is peculiar to an unusual operating condition, it will be specified in the applicable paragraph.

g . Transfer Case Range Selection.

When necessary to temporarily operate transfer case in "H/L" (high lock range) or "L" (low range) when additional traction is needed to prevent wheel slippage, avoid sharp continuous turns. Failure to avoid sharp continuous turns while operating transfer case in locked ranges may cause damage to drivetrain. Immediately after operation in "H/L" (high lock range) or "L" (low range), ensure transfer case is shifted to "H" (high range) to avoid damage to drivetrain. If any noises from drivetrain components are heard, ensure that transfer case range is properly selected.

For proper transfer case range selection, refer to table 1-9. If transfer case range selection is peculiar to an unusual operating condition, it will be specified in the applicable paragraph.

2-29. Operating On Unusual Terrain

a. General Rules. Driving off-road over rough or unusual terrain basically requires using good driving sense. Experience is the best teacher, but there are a few good rules to keep in mind when you are in that kind of driving situation.

Use extreme caution when transporting personnel. Rollover protection is available for the crew area only and is not provided in the troop/cargo area. Although certain design characteristics of the vehicle, such as vehicle width, ground clearance, independent suspension, etc., provide improved capabilities, accidents can still happen.

Operators are reminded to observe basic safe driving techniques/skills when operating the vehicle, especially when transporting personnel. Vehicle speed must be reduced consistent with weather and road/terrain conditions. Obstacles such as stumps and boulders must be avoided. Failure to use basic safe driving techniques/skills may result in injury or death to personnel and damage to equipment.

(1) Use "H/L" (high lock range) or "L" (low range) only when absolutely required by the conditions identified in table 1-9. After operations on unusual terrain, be sure to shift the transfer case from "H/L" (high lock range) or "L" (low range) to "H" (high range) to avoid damaging drivetrain components.

(2) Select proper transmission and transfer case driving ranges. Refer to table 1-7 or table 1-8 for transmission range selections. For transfer case range selections, refer to table 1-9.

(3) Keep engine at a moderate speed. The engine works at its best pace in the mid-range revolutions per minute (rpms). You can slow down or speed up quickly without changing gears if you get into a tight spot. Use the transmission shift lever and transfer case shift lever to control the engine speed.

(4) Attempt to keep wheels from spinning. If the wheels start to spin, ease off the accelerator pedal until the wheels regain traction.

(5) The instructions for placing vehicle in motion (para. 2-11) also apply to operating on unusual terrain.

2-138 B. Unusual Terrain Driving Techniques Caution

(1) Before climbing a steep hill, shift the transfer case into "L" (low range) and the automatic transmission into "1" (first). If wheels start to slip, "walk" the vehicle the last few remaining feet of a hill by swinging the front wheels sharply left and right if situation permits. This action will provide fresh "bite" into the surface and will usually result in enough traction to complete the climb.

When "L" (low range) is used for "engine braking" while descending steep grades, avoid sharp continuous turns. Failure to avoid sharp continuous turns while operating transfer case in range may cause damage to drivetrain.

(2) You can proceed safely down a steep grade by shifting the transfer case into "L" (low range) and the transmission into "2" (second) or "1" (first). Let the vehicle go slowly down the hill with all four wheels turning against engine compression.

Do not travel diagonally across a hill unless it is absolutely necessary, or injury to personnel or damage to equipment may result.

(3) When moving across a slope, choose the least angle possible, keep moving, and avoid turning quickly.

(4) If it is difficult to shift out of a locked range, drivetrain torque buildup may have occured. If necessary to relieve drivetrain torque buildup when leaving a low traction surface for a high traction surface, the vehicle should be backed up for a distance of approximately 5 ft (1.5 m) before proceeding.

2-30. Cold Weather Starting Below +32°F (0°C)

Starting aids will not be used on the engine. Use of starting aids will cause damage to vehicle, injury, or death.

(1) Start engine (para. 2-10).

If engine cranks slowly and voltmeter indicates low battery charge level, attempt to slave start vehicle (para. 2-23). If vehicle still will not start, perform troubleshooting procedures in table 3-1.

(2) After engine starts, pull out hand throttle until desired engine speed is obtained. Twist handle to lock hand throttle.

(3) Allow engine to warm up at an increased speed for approximately three minutes.

(4) After warm-up period, unlock hand throttle and push hand throttle in and allow engine speed to decrease.

2-31. Operating In Extreme Cold, On Ice, Or Snow

A. Before Operation.

(1) Operate arctic winterization equipment (para. 2-39 or 2-40). (2) Scrape off any ice accumulated on vehicle. (3) Remove ice and snow from area around air cleaner intake cap. (4) Refer to para. 2-30 for cold weather starting instructions. (5) Refer to para. 2-29 for techniques that can be used when operating on unusual terrain.

(6) Refer to para. 3-22 for tire chain installation and operation. (7) Operate troop/cargo winterization heater, if applicable (para. 2-41).

b. During Operation.

Sudden braking will cause wheels to lock and vehicle to slide out of control, causing damage to vehicle and injury or death to personnel.

(1) Place transmission shift lever in "D" (drive) (or "oD " overdrive for M1123 and A2 vehicles), and transfer case shift lever in "H/L" (high lock range). Place vehicle in motion slowly to prevent wheels from spinning.

If additional power is needed to extract vehicle when mired in snow, place transmission in "1" (first) and transfer case in "L" (low range). After vehicle is extracted from mired condition, immediately return transfer case to "H/L" (high lock range) position.

(2) If rear skidding occurs: (a) Let up on accelerator pedal. ( b ) Turn steering wheel in direction of skid until control has been regained. (c) Apply brake pedal in a gradual pumping manner.

c. After Operation. ( 1 ) Remove all ice and snow from underside of vehicle and fuel tank filler cap. (2) Drain fuel filter (para. 3-10).

2-32. Operating In Dusty, Sandy Areas

a. General. Vehicles operating in dusty or sandy areas require frequent servicing of the air filter and cooling system.

NOTE For dusty conditions, a precleaner, NSN 2940-01-302-8028, can be inserted in the air intake shield assembly, at the discretion of the unit commander.

B. Before Operation.

(1) Reduce tire inflation to 12 psi (83 kPa) front and 16 psi (110 kPa) rear to increase traction when operating in sand.

(2) When operating in loose sand or soft ground, place transfer case shift lever in "H/L" (high lock range) position and transmission shift lever in "D" (drive) (or " " (overdrive) for M1123 and A2 vehicles).

(3) Refer to paragraph 2-29 for techniques that can be used when operating on unusual terrain.

c. During Operation. D

If additional power is needed to extract vehicle when mired in sand, place transmission in "1" (first) and transfer case in "L" (low range). After vehicle is extracted from mired condition, immediately return transfer case to "H/L" (high lock range) position.

(1) Frequently check air restriction gauge. If indicator shows red, park vehicle, stop engine, and refer to para. 3-15 for emergency air cleaner servicing.

(2) If engine overheating occurs: (a) Park vehicle, allow engine to idle. (b) Observe coolant temperature gauge for steady cooling.

Stop engine if coolant temperature gauge suddenly increases beyond approximately 230°F (110°C). Failure to comply will result in damage to engine.

(c) If coolant temperature continues to increase or does not lower, stop engine. Perform applicable troubleshooting procedures in table 3-1.

(3) Accelerate slowly so wheels will not spin and dig into sand.

Use a wrecker or second vehicle equipped with winch to recover vehicles mired in deep sand. Do not attempt to "rock" vehicles out of deep sand with quick transmission shift changes. Damage to transmission will occur.

D. After Operation.

(1) At end of daily operation, remove all sand from accelerator linkage and brake components.

(2) Park vehicle in shade whenever possible to protect tires, soft tops, paint, wood, and seals from sun, dust, and sand.

(3) If shade is not available, cover vehicle with tarpaulin. When entire vehicle cannot be covered, protect windows and hood with tarpaulin to prevent entry of sand or dust.

(4) Vehicles completing operation in dusty, sandy areas must be lubricated and serviced by unit maintenance as soon as possible.

2-33. Operating In Mud

a. Before Operation. (1) Before operating in mud, place transfer case shift lever in "H/L" (high lock range) and transmission shift lever in "D" (drive) (or " " (overdrive) for M1123 and A2 vehicles).

(2) Refer to paragraph 2-29 for techniques that can be used when operating on unusual terrain.

b. During Operation. D

If additional power is needed to extract vehicle when mired in mud, place transmission in "1" (first) and transfer case in "L" (low range). After vehicle is extracted from mired condition, immediately return transfer case to "H/L" (high lock range) position.

Skidding and sudden loss of steering control are operating problems in mud.

When rear end skidding occurs, immediately turn wheel in direction of skid.

c. After Operation. (1) Wash the following as soon as possible with low pressure water:

Do not allow water to enter air intake cap or air cleaner assembly. Damage to engine will occur.

(a) Radiator and oil cooler (b) Propeller shaft U-joint and halfshafts (c) Steering linkage and ball joints

Do not rely on service brakes until they dry out. Keep applying brakes until uneven braking ceases. Failure to do this may cause damage to vehicle and injury or death to personnel.

(d) Brake rotors and pads (service) (e) Brake rotors and pads (park) (f) Parking brake linkage (g) Service lights (h) Transmission control linkage (i) Accelerator control linkage (j) Sway bar bushings (k) Towing pintle (l) Fuel filler cap (m)Vehicle exterior (n) Geared hubs (o) Advance solenoid rocker arm and fuel injection pump (2) Remove mud from air cleaner dump valve (para. 3-16). (3) Remove mud from drain hole (1) on converter housing cover (2). (4) Remove mud from battery box drain holes.

To prevent parking brake linkage from binding, lithium grease should be used after operating in mud. Clean mud, grit, and debris from linkage. Apply lithium grease (Appendix D, Item 10.1) and move linkage back and forth to work into joints.

(5) Vehicles completing operation in deep mud must be lubricated and

207_image_0.png

serviced by unit maintenance as soon as possible.

2-34. Operating In Extreme Heat

a. General. Extreme heat exists when ambient temperatures reach 95°F (35°C) or more. The effect of extreme heat on vehicle engine is a decrease in engine efficiency.

b. Before Operation.

(1) Perform before operation checks and services in table 2-2. (2) Check for foreign objects in front of radiator and clean as required. (3) Check batteries more frequently. If electrolyte is low, add distilled water, refer to Appendix D, Item 27.

C. During Operation. Caution

Avoid continuous vehicle operation at high speeds. Avoid long hard pulls on steep grades with transfer case shift lever in "L" (low range) position. Damage to transfer case will result.

(1) Frequently check coolant temperature gauge (2) and oil pressure

208_image_0.png

gauge (1). Engine is overheating if one or more of the following conditions exist: (a) Engine coolant temperature is more than approximately 230°F (110°C) as indicated by temperature gauge (2).

(b) Engine oil pressure drops below approximately 15 psi (103 kPa) with engine under a load.

(c) Engine oil pressure drops below approximately 6 psi (41 kPa) with engine at idle.

(2) If engine overheating occurs: (a) Park vehicle, allowing engine to idle. (b) Observe coolant temperature gauge (2) for steady cooling.

(c) If engine coolant temperature continues to increase or does not lower, stop engine. Perform troubleshooting procedures in table 3-1.

2-35. Operating In Rainy Or Humid Conditions

a. General. Material inactive for long periods during rainy or humid conditions can rust rapidly. Fungus may develop in the fuel tanks as well as on soft tops, seats, and other components. Frequent inspections, cleaning, and lubrication are necessary to maintain the operational readiness of vehicles.

b. Before Operation. Fuel filter must be drained frequently because of high condensation in fuel system.

To drain fuel filter, refer to paragraph 3-10.

c. During Operation.

(1)If necessary, place transfer case shift lever in "H/L" (high lock range) to obtain a start without spinning wheels.

(2)Do not spin wheels when placing vehicle in motion in heavy rain conditions. (3)Refer to para. 2-29 for techniques that can be used when operating on unusual terrain.

2-36. Shallow Water Fording Operation

a. General. M998 series vehicles have a 30 in. (76 cm) shallow water fording capability without the use of a deep water fording kit.

CAUTION Never attempt shallow water fording unless water depth is known to be 30 in. (76 cm) or less, and bottom is known to be hard. Do not exceed 5 mph (8 kph) during fording operation. Damage to vehicle will result.

b. Before Operation.

(1)Make sure oil dipstick, transmission dipstick, oil filler cap, and fuel tank cap are secure. (2)Secure all loose objects on vehicle. (3)Make sure battery caps are all present and tight.

Warning

209_Image_0.Png

Do not allow tools to come in contact with vehicle when disconnecting or connecting slave receptacle cable. Tool contact with vehicle will result in a direct short, causing instant heating of tool, tool damage, and injury to personnel.

NOTE Perform steps 4 through 6 only if fording in salt water.

(4) Disconnect battery ground cable (1).

Battery positive cable must remain on power stud.

(5)Disconnect slave receptacle positive lead 49A (2) at power stud (3).

(6)Connect battery ground cable (1). (7)Place transfer case shift lever in "H" (high range).

C. During Operation. Caution

Entering water too fast will cause water to splash up over hood and into air intake. The engine may stop abruptly and will not crank. Do not continue starting efforts; damage to engine will result.

(1) Enter water slowly and maintain even vehicle speed while fording. (2) Exit water in area with gentle slope.

D. After Operation. Warning

Do not rely on service brakes after fording until the brakes dry out. Keep applying brakes until uneven braking ceases. Failure to do this may cause damage to vehicle or injury or death to personnel.

If accumulated water drains slowly through floor drain holes, refer to unit maintenance for drilling and improving drain holes (1) If fording operation was through salt water, wash and wipe off all salt deposits as soon as possible.

To prevent parking brake linkage from binding, lithium grease from linkage. Apply lithium grease (Appendix D, Item 10.1) and move linkage back and forth to work into joints. should be used after operating in mud. Clean mud, grit, and debris (2) Vehicles completing shallow water fording operation must be lubricated and serviced by unit maintenance as soon as possible.

Perform steps 3 through 7 only if fording was in salt water.

(3) Slide rubber boot (1) back and inspect slave receptacle (2) for evidence of corrosion, RTV wash out, or salt water penetration of RTV sealant. If any evidence of these conditions is found, report vehicle to unit maintenance for corrective action. Do not connect slave receptacle positive lead (4).

(4) If no evidence of corrosion, RTV wash out, or salt water penetration of the RTV sealant is found, slide rubber boot (1) on slave receptacle (2).

Warning

211_Image_0.Png

Do not allow tools to come in contact with vehicle when disconnecting or

211_image_1.png connecting slave receptacle cable. Tool contact with vehicle will result in a direct short, causing instant heating of tool, tool damage, and injury to personnel.

(5) Disconnect battery ground cable (5). (6) Connect slave receptacle positive lead 49A (4) at power stud (3). (7) Connect battery ground cable (5).

2-147 2-37. Deep Water Fording Operation

a. General. The deep water fording kit allows M998 series vehicles to ford water up to 60 in. (152 cm) deep.

Never attempt deep water fording unless water depth is known to be 60 in. (152 cm) or less, and bottom is known to be hard. Do not exceed 5 mph (8 kph) during fording operation. Damage to vehicle will result.

B. Before Operation. Note Retain All Parts Removed For Reuse.

(1) Raise and secure hood (para. 3-8). (2) Loosen clamp (3) and remove weathercap (2) and clamp (3) from shield (12). (3) Remove three capscrews (16), washers (15), and shield (12) from cowling (10). Stow shield (12). (4) Install intake assembly vent tube (8) on air intake assembly (1) with two clips (14) and screws (13). (5) Install air intake assembly (1) and clamp (9) into cowling (10) and tighten clamp (9). (6) Connect fuel tank vent line (11) to intake assembly vent tube (8). (7) Install air intake assembly (1) on windshield mounting bracket (6) with washer (5), capscrew (4), washer (5), and nut (7).

(8) Install clamp (3) and weathercap (2) on air intake assembly (1) and tighten clamp (3). (9) Ensure that rubber cap (18) on the bottom of air cleaner body (17) is secure.

213_image_0.png

Exhaust system components are hot after prolonged vehicle use. Ensure exhaust system components are cool before removing/ installing exhaust assembly. Failure to do this will result in injury to personnel.

NOTE Any items removed for fording must be stowed for reuse.

(10) Remove three locknuts (17), washers (9), capscrews (10), and washers (9) securing tailpipe (11) to

214_image_0.png

muffler (16).

(11) Remove two nuts (15), lockwashers (14), and U-bolt (12) securing tail-pipe (11) to clamp (13).

(12) Remove tailpipe (11) and gasket (8) from muffler (16).

(13) Install two rubber isolators (5) into wheelhouse (6). To ease installation, wet rubber isolators (5) with water.

(14) If isolators (5) cannot be installed easily, check alignment of holes in wheelhouse (6) and reinforcement bracket (3). To align holes, loosen capscrews (4) securing reinforcement bracket (3) to wheelhouse (6). Align holes in wheel-house (6) and reinforcement bracket (3) and tighten capscrews (4). Install isolators (5).

(15) Install exhaust assembly (7) and gasket (8) on muffler (16) with three washers (9), capscrews (10), washers (9), and locknuts (17).

(16) Install exhaust assembly (7) on wheelhouse (6) with two washers (2) and locknuts (1). (17) Ensure oil dipstick, transmission dipstick, oil filler cap, and fuel tank cap are secure. (18) Secure all loose objects on vehicle. (19) Ensure battery caps are all present and tight.

Do not allow tools to come in contact with vehicle when disconnecting or connecting slave receptacle cable. Tool contact with vehicle will result in a direct short, causing instant heating of tool, tool damage, and injury to personnel.

NOTE Perform steps 20 through 22 only if fording in salt water.

(20) Disconnect battery ground cable (20).

Battery positive cable must remain on power stud.

215_image_0.png

(21) Disconnect slave receptacle positive lead 49A (19) at power stud (18).

(22) Connect battery ground cable (20).

(23) Place transfer case shift lever in appropriate range (table 1-9).

(24) Turn off all non-essential electrical loads (lights, fan, heater/defroster).

(25) Place fording selector switch (21) in "DEEP FORD" position prior to entering water. (26) Pull out hand throttle (22) until desired engine speed is obtained. Twist hand throttle (22) to lock in position. (27) Open driver and passenger windows.

C. During Operation. Warning

Entering water too fast will cause water to splash up over hood and into air intake. The engine may stop abruptly and will not crank. Do not continue starting efforts; damage to engine will result.

Perform step 1 for M996, M996A1, M997, M997A1, and M997A2 vehicles.

(1) Enter water until water level has reached the bottom of the driver and passenger windows, stop for a two minute waiting period to allow the ambulance body to fill with water, then proceed with operations.

(2) Enter water slowly and maintain even vehicle speed, 5 mph (8 kph) maximum.

(3) Exit water in area with gentle slope. (4) Place fording selector switch (1) in "VENT" position upon leaving water.

After fording do not use the hand throttle as an automatic speed or cruise control. The hand throttle does not automatically disengage when brake is applied, resulting in increased stopping distances and possible hazardous and unsafe operation. Injury to personnel or damage to equipment may result.

(5) Unlock and push in hand throttle (2).

216_image_0.png

Do not rely on service brakes after fording until the brakes dry out. Keep applying brakes until uneven braking ceases. Failure to do this may cause damage to vehicle, and injury or death to personnel.

(6) Place transfer case shift lever in desired range.

d. After Operation.

Exhaust system components are hot after prolonged vehicle use. Ensure exhaust system components are cool before removing/ installing exhaust assembly. Failure to do this will result in injury to personnel.

(1) Stop engine.

217_image_0.png

drilling and improving drain holes.

(2) Remove three locknuts (16), washers (8), capscrews (9), washers (8), gasket (7), and exhaust assembly (6) from muffler (15).

(3) Remove two locknuts (3), washers (4), and exhaust assembly (6) from wheelhouse (5). (4) Install gasket (7) and tailpipe (10) on muffler (15) with three washers (8), capscrews (9), washers (8), and locknuts (16).

(5) Install clamp (12) on tailpipe (10) with U-bolt (11), two lockwashers (13), and nuts (14).

(6) Loosen clamp (2) securing weathercap (1) to air intake assembly (3)

218_image_0.png

and remove weathercap (1).

(7) Remove nut (7), washer (5), capscrew (4), washer (5), and air intake assembly (3) from windshield mounting bracket (6).

(8) Disconnect fuel tank vent line (11) from intake assembly vent tube (8).

(9) Loosen clamp (9) securing air intake assembly (3) to cowling (10) and remove air intake assembly (3) and clamp (9).

(10) Install shield (12) in cowling (10) with three washers (13) and capscrews (14).

(11) Install weathercap (1) and clamp (2) on shield (12) and tighten clamp (2).

(12) Lower and secure hood (para. 3-8). (13) Clean and stow intake and exhaust assembly components. (14) If fording operation was through salt water, wash and wipe off all salt deposits as soon as possible.

To prevent parking brake linkage from binding, lithium grease should be used after operating in mud. Clean mud, grit, and debris from linkage. Apply lithium grease (Appendix D, Item 10.1) and move linkage back and forth to work into joints.

(15) Vehicles completing deep water fording operation must be lubricated and serviced by unit maintenance as soon as possible.

Perform steps 16 through 20 only if fording was in salt water.

(16) Slide rubber boot (15) back and inspect slave receptacle (16) for evidence of corrosion, RTV wash out, or salt water penetration of RTV sealant. If any evidence of these conditions is found, report vehicle to unit maintenance for corrective action. Do not connect slave receptacle positive lead (17).

(17) If no evidence of corrosion, RTV wash out, or salt water penetration of the RTV sealant is found, slide rubber boot (15) on slave receptacle (16).

Do not allow tools to come in contact with vehicle when disconnecting or connecting slave receptacle cable. Tool contact with vehicle will result in a direct short, causing instant heating of tool, tool damage, and injury to personnel.

(18) Disconnect battery ground cable (18).

219_image_0.png (19) Connect slave receptacle positive lead 49A (17) at power stud (19). (20) Connect battery ground cable (18).

2-155

2-38. Runflat Operations

M998 series vehicles are equipped with runflat devices, allowing the vehicle to be driven with one or more tires flat. For runflat operations, refer to table 2-4.

NOTE
Runflat travel distance will improve with radial tire and rubber runflat. If additional travel is
required, tire tread may be cut away from tire.
Combination of Flat Tires Recommended Vehicle Speed Distance
Two tires flat - rear 20 mph maximum (32 kph) 30 mi (48 km)
One tire flat - any location 30 mph (48 kph) 30 mi (48 km)
Two tires flat - same side 30 mph (48 kph) 30 mi (48 km)
Two tires flat - front only 30 mph (48 kph) 30 mi (48 km)

Table 2-4. Runflat Operation

2-39. Arctic Operation (All Except M1123 And A2 Vehicles)

a. General. Arctic winterization kits are for use during extremely cold temperatures from 0°F (-18°C) to -50°F (-46°C).

B. Starting Arctic Heater.

(1) Set temperature switch (4) on heater control box (1) to "LO" position. (2) Move start switch (3) on heater control box (1) to "START" position and hold for approximately 2 minutes or until heater starts and yellow indicator lamp (2) comes on.

NOTE If the start switch is moved from the "START" to "ON" position too quickly, the heater flame will be extinguished and the heater will need restarting.

(3) When heater starts, move start switch (3) on heater control box (1) to "ON" position. If heater does not start, move start switch (3) to "OFF" position for 10 seconds and then back to "START" for 60 seconds. Repeat procedure if heater doesn't start. c. Starting Engine With Arctic Heater Assistance.

(1) Push defroster control knob (9) all the way in to ensure hot air is not directed on windshield.

(2) Pull exhaust diverter cable knob (6) out to allow heater exhaust to heat the engine oil pan.

(3) Open battery box door (8), by sliding away from plenum (7), to heat batteries.

(4) Move regulator control lever (5) to "ARCTIC HEATER" position.

CAUTION Do not operate arctic heater in ambient temperatures above 0°F

221_image_0.png (-18°C) or with temperature switch in "HI" position, when temperature is above -25°F (-32°C). Damage to equipment will result.

(5) Start arctic heater and set temperature switch (4) on heater control box (1) to "LO" position for temperatures from 0°F (-18°C) to -25°F (-32°C), or to "HI" position for temperatures from -25°F (-32°C) to -50°F (-46°C).

(6) Operate heater for 30 minutes maximum at -50°F (-46°C); less time may be required for higher ambient temperatures.

CAUTION Close battery box door after 30 minutes of arctic heater operation or when engine is running. Failure to do so may result in damage to batteries.

(7) Close battery box door (8) by sliding toward plenum (7).

(8) Push exhaust diverter cable knob (5) in to shut off heat to engine oil pan. (9) Start engine (para. 2-30). (10) If engine fails to start, notify unit maintenance.

d. Stopping Arctic Heater.

Set start switch (2) on heater control box (1) to "OFF" position.

The yellow indicator lamp will remain lit and the fan will continue to run until the heater has purged itself of fuel.

E. Defrosting Windshield In Ambient Temperatures Above -25°F (-32°C). Caution

(1) Start engine with arctic heater assistance.

(2) Shut off arctic heater. (3) Pull defrost control knob (8) all the way out to direct air on windshield. (4) Pull temperature control knob (7) all the way out for maximum heat. (5) Set regulator control lever (4) to "STANDARD HEAT" position. (6) Set standard heater fan switch (6) to "HI" position until windshield is defrosted.

F. Defrosting Windshield In Ambient Temperatures From -25°F (-32°C) To 50°F (-46°C).

(1) Start engine with arctic heater assistance. (2) Set temperature switch (3) on heater control box (1) to "LO" position. (3) Set regulator control lever (4) to "DUAL" position. (4) Pull defrost control knob (8) all the way out to direct air on windshield. (5) Pull temperature control knob (7) all the way out for maximum heat. (6) Set standard heater fan switch (6) to "LO" position until windshield is defrosted.

G. Heating Cab With Arctic Heater.

(1) Start engine (para. 2-30).

Do not operate arctic heater in ambient temperatures above 0°F (-18°C), or with temperature switch in "HI" position, when temperature is above - 25°F (-32°C). Damage to equipment will result.

(2) Start arctic heater and set temperature switch (3) on heater control box (1) to "LO" position for temperatures from 0°F (-18°C) to -25°F (-32°C), or "HI" position for temperatures from -25°F (-32°C) to -50°F (-46°C).

(3) Set regulator control lever (4) to "DUAL" or "ARCTIC HEATER" position to achieve desired mix of air.

(4) Push defrost control knob (8) all the way in to direct airflow to heat ducts.

223_image_0.png (5) Pull temperature control knob (7) all the way out for maximum heat. (6) Set standard heater fan switch (6) to desired position to mix air.

a. General. Arctic winterization kits are for use during extremely cold temperatures from 0°F (-18°C) to -50°F (-46°C).

B. Starting Arctic Heater.

(1) Set temperature switch (4) on heater control box (1) to "LO" position. (2) Move start switch (3) on heater control box (1) to "START" position and hold for approximately 2 minutes or until heater starts and yellow indicator lamp (2) comes on.

NOTE If the start switch is moved from the "START" to "ON" position too quickly, the heater flame will be extinguished and the heater will need restarting.

(3) When heater starts, move start switch (3) on heater control box (1) to "ON" position. If heater does not start, move start switch (3) to "OFF" position for 10 seconds and then back to "START" for 60 seconds. Repeat procedure if heater doesn't start.

C. Starting Engine With Arctic Heater Assistance.

(1) Pull defroster control knob (9) all the way out to ensure hot air is not directed on windshield.

(2) Pull exhaust diverter cable knob (6) out to allow heater exhaust to heat the engine oil pan.

(3) Open battery box door (8), by sliding away from plenum (7), to heat batteries.

(4) Move regulator control lever (5) up to "STANDARD HEAT" position.

Do not operate arctic heater in ambient temperatures above 0°F (-18°C), or with temperature switch in "HI" position, when temperature is above -25°F (-32°C). Damage to equipment will result.

(5) Start arctic heater and set temperature switch (4) on heater control box (1) to "LO" position for temperatures from 0°F (-18°C) to -25°F (-32°C), or "HI" position for temperatures from -25°F (-32°C) to -50°F (-46°C).

(6) Operate heater for 30 minutes maximum at -50°F (-46°C); less time may be required for higher ambient temperatures.

Close battery box door after 30 minutes of arctic heater operation or when engine is running. Failure to do so may result in damage to batteries.

225_image_0.png

(7) Close battery box door (8) by sliding toward plenum (7).

(8) Push exhaust diverter cable knob (5) in to shut off heat to engine oil pan. (9) Start engine (para. 2-30). (10) If engine fails to start, notify unit maintenance.

d. Stopping Arctic Heater. Set start switch (2) on heater control box (1) to "OFF" position.

NOTE The yellow indicator lamp will remain lit and the fan will continue to run until the heater has purged itself of fuel.

e. Defrosting Windshield in Ambient Temperatures Above -25°F (-32°C).

(1) Start engine with arctic heater assistance. (2) Shut off arctic heater. (3) Push defroster control knob (8) all the way in to direct air on windshield. (4) Pull temperature control knob (7) all the way out for maximum heat. (5) Set regulator control lever (4) up to "STANDARD HEAT" position. (6) Set standard heater fan switch (6) to "HI" position until windshield is defrosted.

f. Defrosting Windshield in Ambient Temperatures from -25°F (-32°C) to -50°F (-46°C).

(1) Start engine with arctic heater assistance. (2) Set temperature switch (3) on heater control box (1) to "LO" position. (3) Set regulator control lever (4) down to "ARCTIC HEAT" position. (4) Push defroster control knob (8) all the way in to direct air on windshield. (5) Pull temperature control knob (7) all the way out for maximum heat. (6) Set standard heater fan switch (6) to "LO" position until windshield is defrosted.

2-162 G. Heating Cab With Arctic Heater.

(1) Start engine (para. 2-30).

Do not operate arctic heater in ambient temperatures above 0°F (-18°C), or with

227_image_0.png temperature switch in "HI" position, when temperature is above -25°F (-32°C), or without standard heater fan on. Damage to equipment will result.

(2) Start arctic heater and set temperature switch (3) on heater control box (1) to "LO" position for temperatures from 0°F (-18°C) to -25°F (-32°C), or "HI" position for temperatures from -25°F (-32°C) to -50°F (-46°C).

(3) Set regulator control lever (4) to "ARCTIC HEAT" position.

(4) Pull defrost control knob (8) all the way out to direct airflow to heat ducts.

(5) Pull temperature control knob (7) all the way out for maximum heat.

(6) Set standard heater fan switch (6) to desired position to mix air.

2-41. TROOP/CARGO WINTERIZATION HEATER OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS a. General.

Troop/cargo winterization heater is for use during extremely cold temperatures from 0°F (-18°C) to -50°F (-46°C).

Do not operate troop/cargo heater in ambient temperatures above 0°F (-18°C), or with fan switch in "HI" position, when temperature is above -25°F (-32°C). Damage to equipment will result.

NOTE Heater may be operated with engine running or engine off.

B. Starting Heater.

(1) Set heater fan switch (4) to "LO" position. (2) Move heater control switch (2) to "START position and hold for approximately two minutes or until heater starts and heater indicator light (1) comes on.

(3) When heater starts, move heater control switch (2) to "RUN" position.

The heater indicator light (1) will remain illuminated.

(4) Set heater fan switch (4) to desired position ("HI" or "LO").

NOTE To defrost the interior of the troop/cargo enclosure, the diverter assembly door should be shut or in the closed position.

(5) Adjust diverter assembly (3) to regulate amount of outside and inside air to be circulated through the heater assembly and into the troop/cargo area.

C. If Heater Fails To Start: Note

If the start switch is moved from the "START" to "RUN" position too quickly, the heater flame will be extinguished and the heater will need restarting.

(1) Move heater control switch (2) to "OFF" position for 10 seconds, and then back to "START" for 60 seconds. Repeat procedure if heater doesn't start.

(2) Press heater indicator light (1) to test electrical circuit. (3) If heater indicator light (1) works and heater still fails to start in approximately three minutes, service is required.

D. Shutting Heater Off.

Move heater control switch (2) to "OFF." NOTE The heater indicator light will remain on and the fan will continue to run until the heater has purged itself of fuel.

229_image_0.png

2-165

Section V. Cargo/Troop Carrier And S250 Shelter Carrier Operation

2-42. General

a. This section provides operating instructions for components found on M998, M998A1, M1038, and M1038A1 cargo/troop carriers and M1037 and M1042 S250 shelter carriers.

b. Refer to para. 2-2a for stowage location of fire extinguisher on cargo/troop carriers and S250 shelter carriers. Refer to para. 2-27 for operation of fire extinguisher.

2-43. Windshield Assembly Operation

Do not operate the vehicle without the windshield assembly positioned upright and the "B'' pillar securely attached. Operation of the vehicle without these structures in place may result in injury to personnel and damage to equipment.

Before lowering windshield on vehicles equipped with retention bracket, the windshield retention bracket must be removed. Refer to unit maintenance.

A. Lowering Windshield Assembly.

(1) Remove two hitch pins (3) from inside hinge pins (4) and remove hinge pins (4).

(2) Lower windshield assembly (5) to hood and secure to four footman loops (2) with two straps (1).

b. Raising Windshield Assembly.

(1) Remove straps (1) from footman loops (2) securing windshield assembly (5) to hood.

(2) Raise windshield assembly (5).

230_image_0.png (3) Secure windshield assembly (5) with two inside hinge pins (4) and hitch pins (3).

2-166 Change 1

2-44. Troop Seat Kit Operation

a. General. The troop seat kit is used to convert M998, M998A1, M1097, M1097A1, M1097A2, and M1123 cargo vehicles into troop carriers.

b. Lowering Troop Seat. (1) Remove two lockpins (7) from troop seat (6). (2) Lower troop seat (6). (3) Install two lockpins (7) to secure troop seat (6).

c. Raising Troop Seat. (1) Remove two lockpins (7) from troop seat (6).

231_image_0.png (2) Raise troop seat (6) and secure with two lockpins (7).

2-45. Cargo Tiedown Operation

The static rated working load of the tiedown ring assembly is 500 lb (227 kg) applied along the centerline of the assembly. Side-loading the tiedown ring assembly will cause damage to the tiedown and/or cause the tiedown bolt to become loose. Either of these conditions will result in an unrestrained load causing damage to vehicle and/or equipment.

The load must be applied as shown below. If tiedown rings (9) loosen, position

231_image_1.png tiedown ring (9) in direction of load and tighten bolt (8). Notify unit maintenance to tighten bolt (8) to 65 lb-ft (88 N•m) when practical.

2-46. Removal And Installation Of Two-Man Crew Area Soft Top Enclosure

· Ensure P/N 12340736-7 is used for replacement of soft top on vehicles equipped with three-point seatbelt.

· For ease of installation, soft top components should be installed when temperatures are above 72°F (22°C).

· To keep hinge screws tight, lockwasher NSN 5310-00-527-3634 and locknut NSN 5310-00-2416658 can be used for installation of soft top doors.

· To prevent seams from leaking, coat with adhesive as needed (refer to appendix D, item 1).

a. General. The two-man soft top enclosure consists of two soft doors, rear curtain, cab roof cover, two rails and bow assembly.

B. Removal Of Soft Top Doors.

(1) Open door (1) and detach door holding check strap (3) from mounting plate (2).

232_image_0.png (2) Raise door (1) to remove hinge pins (5) from hinge brackets (4).

(3) Remove door (1).

C. Removal Of Cab Roof Cover, Rails, And Bow Assembly.

(1) Unfasten eyelets (7) from turnbuttons (15) on horizontal rails (14), and unfasten hook and loop attachments (9) securing cab roof cover (10) to bow assembly (8).

(2) Remove cab roof cover (10) from horizontal rails (14).

(3) Unfasten eyelets (11) from turnbuttons (12) on "B" pillar (13) and "A" pillar (18).

2-168

233_image_0.png

(4) Roll cab roof cover (10) over windshield and slide cab roof cover (10) from channel (6).

(5) Remove four screws (17) and bow assembly (8) from horizontal rails (14).

(6) Remove four screws (16) securing two horizontal rails (14) to "A" pillar (18) and "B" pillar (13).

Remove horizontal rails (14).

233_image_1.png

2-169

d. Removal of Rear Curtain.

(1) Detach curtain straps (5) from footman loops (7) behind seats by depressing locking taps (6).

Perform step 2 if vehicle is equipped with two-man arctic cab.

(2) Peel curtain (4) back from fastener tape (8). (3) Unfasten eyelets (3) from turnbuttons (2) on "B" pillar (1).

(4) Remove rear curtain (4).

e. Installation of Rear Curtain.

(1) Install rear curtain (4) to "B" pillar (1) by fastening eyelets (3) to turn buttons (2).

Perform step 2 if vehicle is equipped with two-man arctic cab.

234_image_0.png

(2) Attach curtain (4) to fastener tape (8). (3) Attach curtain straps (5) to footman loops (7) located behind seats. Tighten straps (5) equally, but do not overtighten.

f. Installation of Cab Roof Cover, Rails, and Bow Assembly.

(1) Install two horizontal rails (12) on "A" pillar (13) and "B" pillar (1), and secure with four screws (9).

The short end of horizontal rails (12) go toward front of vehicle.

(2) Loosen end bracket screws (14) and install bow assembly (11) on horizontal rails (12) and secure with four screws (10). Retighten bracket screws (14).

(3) Slide cab roof cover (18) into channel (15) on "A" pillar (13) and roll cab roof cover (18) over cab. (4) Install cab roof cover (18) over rear curtain (4) at "B" pillar (1) and fasten eyelets (3) to turnbuttons (2) on "B" pillar (1) and "A" pillar (13).

(5) Position cab roof cover (18) around horizontal rails (12) and fasten eyelets (16) to turnbuttons (19).

Secure cab roof cover (18) to bow assembly (11) with hook and loop attachments (17).

235_image_0.png

235_image_1.png

2-171

G. Installation Of Soft Top Doors.

(1) Apply a small amount of seasonal grade OE oil to hinge pins (6), and install door (1) by inserting hinge pins (6) into hinge brackets (5).

(2) Install door holding check strap (3) on mounting plate (2).

If door is jammed, do not force open. Excessive force may damage door.

(3) Close door (1). It may be necessary to adjust door hinges (5) or door latch striker (4) to achieve a tight seal. If adjustment is necessary, notify unit maintenance.

NOTE When lowering the soft top door window, always fold the window to the inside of the vehicle and secure between the door and the door

236_image_0.png

2 - 4 7 . R E M O VAL AND INSTA L L ATION OF TROOP AREA SOFT TOP E N C L O S U R E S

Remove any accumulation of rain, snow, and ice from the cargo cover as soon as possible. Failure to do so could result in damage to the cargo cover assembly. If the vehicle is to be parked for a long period of time, the cargo cover can be removed. The decision whether or not to remove the cover should be based on the length of time the vehicle is to be parked and the expected weather conditions.

(2) Press locking tab (20) and unhook straps (14) from footman loops (19). (3) Detach hook and loop attachment securing front flap (7) of troop area soft top (12) from two-man crew area soft top (17). Remove grommets (18) from footman loops (19).

(4) Remove troop area cover (12).

b . Removal of Bows. Remove bows (10), (11), and (13) from bow retainer (15).

c. Installation of Bows. The front bow assembly (10) and rear bow assembly (13) contain turnbuttons (8); the front bow assembly (10) has shorter legs. Install bows (10), (11), and (13) into bow retainers (15).

D. Installation Of Troop Area Enclosure. Note

· Troop seats and two-man crew area soft top must be installed prior to installation of bows and troop area enclosure.

· To prevent canvas noise and damage, tiedowns can be added to the canvas at the commander's discretion, refer to unit maintenance.

(1) Install troop area cover (12) over "B" pillar (16), front bow (10), intermediate bows (11), and rear bow

237_image_0.png

(13).

(2) Fasten eyelets (9) to turnbuttons (8) on "B" pillar (16), front bow (10), and rear bow (13).

(3) Fit troop area cover (12) evenly to ensure tight fit and secure by installing grommets (18) over footman loops (19). Attach straps (14) to footman loops (19) and pull straps (14) tight.

(4) Secure front flap (7) of troop area cover (12) to two-man crew area soft top (17).

2-173

2-48. Removal And Installation Of Four-Man Crew Area Soft Top And Arctic Soft Top Enclosures

· For ease of installation, soft top components should be installed when temperatures are above 72°F (22°C). · To prevent seams from leaking, coat with adhesive as needed (refer to appendix D, item 1).

a. General. The four-man soft top and arctic soft top enclosures consist of four soft doors, rear curtain, cab roof cover, and bow assemblies. For removal and installation of doors, refer to para. 2-46. Para. 2-48 covers removal and installation of four-man cab roof cover, rails, bow assemblies, and rear curtain.

B. Removal Of Cab Roof Cover, Rails, And Bow Assemblies.

(1) Unfasten eyelets (2) from turnbuttons (3) on horizontal rails (12) and "A" pillar (13). Unfasten hook and loop attachments (5) securing cab roof cover (6) to bow assemblies (4) and ""B" pillar (11).

(2) Remove cab roof cover (6) from horizontal rails (12). (3) Unfasten eyelets (8) from turnbuttons (7) on "C" pillar (9). (4) Roll cab roof cover (6) over windshield and slide cab roof cover (6) from channel (1). (5) Remove eight screws (14) and two bow assemblies (4) from horizontal rails (12). (6) Remove six screws (15) and two horizontal rails (12) from "A" pillar (13), "B" pillar (11), and "C" pillar (9).

238_image_0.png

2-174

C. Installation Of Rails, Bow Assemblies, And Cab Roof Cover.

Align horizontal rail holes with holes in "A," "B," and "C" pillars.

(1) Install two horizontal rails (12) on "A" pillar (13), "B" pillar (11), and "C" pillar (9) and secure with six

239_image_0.png

screws (15).

(2) Loosen end bracket screws (16), and install two bow assemblies (4) on horizontal rails (12) with eight screws (14). Tighten bracket screws (16).

(3) Slide cab roof cover (6) into channel (1) on "A" pillar (13), roll cab roof cover (6) over cab, and fasten eyelets (2) to turnbuttons (3) on "A" pillar (13).

(4) Install cab roof cover (6) over rear curtain (10) at "C" pillar (9) and fasten eyelets (8) to turnbuttons (7) on "C" pillar (9).

(5) Position cab roof cover (6) around horizontal rails (12) and fasten eyelets (2) to turnbuttons (3).

Attach cab roof cover (6) to bow assemblies (4) with hook and loop attachments (5).

2-175 D. Removal Of Rear Curtain.

(1) Detach four curtain straps (11) from footman loops (13) on wheelhousings (15) and cargo floor (14) by depressing locking tabs (12).

Perform step 2 if vehicle is equipped with four-man arctic cab.

(2) Peel curtain (2) back from fastener tape (3).

(3) Unfasten eyelets (10) from turnbuttons (16) on "C" pillar (1).

Perform step 4 for vehicles equipped with three-point seatbelts.

(4) Unfasten eyelets (7) from turnbuttons (8) on rear seatbelt bracket (9). (5) Remove curtain (4).

e. Installation of Rear Curtain.

(1) Install curtain (4) on ""C" pillar (1) by fastening eyelets (10) to turnbuttons (16).

NOTE · Perform steps 2 and 3 when installing new curtain on vehicles with three-point seatbelts.

· Ensure P/N 12342475 is used for replacement of rear curtain on vehicles equipped with threepoint seatbelt.

(2) Cut away inside curtain panel (17) and remove curtain panel (17) from curtain (4). (3) Cut away outside curtain panel (6) and remove curtain panel (6) from curtain (4).

(4) Extend rear seatbelt bracket boot (5) and install over rear seatbelt bracket (9).

(5) Fasten eyelets (7) to turnbuttons (8) on rear seatbelt bracket (9).

Perform step 6 if vehicle is equipped with four-man arctic cab.

(6) Attach curtain (2) to fastener tape (3). (7) Attach four curtain straps (11) to footman loops (13) on wheelhousings (15) and cargo floor (14).

Tighten straps (11) equally, but do not overtighten.

2-176

241_image_0.png

2-49. Removal And Installation Of Four-Man Cargo Area Soft Top Enclosure

· For ease of installation, soft top components should be installed when temperatures are above 72°F (22°C).

· To prevent seams from leaking, coat with adhesive as needed (refer to appendix D, item 1).

Remove any accumulation of rain, snow, and ice from the cargo cover as soon as possible. Failure to do so could result in damage to the cargo cover assembly. If the vehicle is to be parked for a long period of time, the cargo cover can be removed. The decision whether or not to remove the cover should be based on the length of time the vehicle is to be parked and the expected weather conditions.

A. Removal Of Cargo Enclosure.

242_Image_0.Png

(1) Unfasten hook and loop attachment (3) securing cargo cover (6) to cab roof (2) at "C" pillar (8). (2) Unfasten eyelets (5) from turnbuttons (4) on "C" pillar (8), front bow (1), and rear bow (7). (3) Detach straps (9) from footman loops (11) by depressing locking tabs (12) and loosening straps (9). Remove grommets (10) from footman loops (11).

(4) Remove cargo cover (6).

B. Removal Of Bows. Note

If bows are broken or bent, reinforce 3/64 in. (1.2 mm) thick bow walls with steel rod NSN 9510-00-596-2063. Reinforce 3/32 in. (2.4 mm) bows with steel rod NSN 9510-00-596-2066.

(1) Depress locking tabs (14) and unhook straps (13) from footman loops (15 (2) Remove capscrews (19) securing longitudinal bow (20) to front bow (1) and rear bow (7). Remove longitudinal bow (20).

(3) Remove four snaprings (17) and pivot pins (16) securing front bow (1) an rear bow (7) to pivot brackets (18). Remove bows (1) and (7).

243_image_0.png

C. Installation Of Bows. Note

Four-man crew area soft top must be installed before installation of bows and cargo enclosure.

(1) Install bows (1) and (7) on pivot brackets (18) and secure with four pivot pins (16) and snaprings (17).

(2) Install longitudinal bow (20) on front bow (1) and rear bow (7) and secure with two capscrews (19).

(3) Install straps (13) on footman loops (15) and pull straps (13) tight.

d. Installation of Cargo Enclosure.

(1) Install cargo cover (6) over "C" pillar (8), front bow (1), and rear bow (7). (2) Fasten eyelets (5) to turnbuttons (4) on "C" pillar (8), front bow (1), and rear bow (7).

(3) Secure cargo (6) to cab roof (2) at "C" pillar (8) with hook and loop attachment (3).

(4) Install grommets (10) on footman loops (11) and attach straps (9) to footman loops (11). Tighten straps (9) equally, but do not overtighten.

2-179

2-50. Removal And Installation Of S250 Shelter Carrier Rear Suspension Tiedown Kit

The M1037 and M1042 shelter carriers are specifically designed to be operated with the S250 shelter installed. It can be driven safely for short distances (to and from maintenance or from the rail head when being delivered) without the shelter installed. However this should not be done for long distances. Driving for long distances without the shelter installed will cause damage to equipment.

A. Removal Of S250 Rear Suspension Tiedown Kit.

(1) Using wrench provided, turn out turnbuckle assembly (1) and unhook from suspension tiedown bracket (2) and suspension tiedown bar (7).

(2) Remove suspension tiedown bracket (2) from upper spring mount bracket (4).

(3) Remove suspension tiedown bar (7) from lower control arm (5).

b. Installation of S250 Rear Suspension Tiedown Kit.

Ensure suspension tiedown bracket is fully seated to upper spring mount bracket and nut. Suspension tiedown bracket could spring free under tension, causing damage to vehicle.

(1) Install suspension tiedown bracket (2) to upper spring mount bracket (4) with cupped end seated against upper spring mount bracket nut (3).

(2) Install suspension tiedown bar (7) into lower control arm (5) and shock mount bracket (6).

Ensure turnbuckle assembly eye and hook have an equal amount of threads inside the turnbuckle.

(3) Grease threads on turnbuckle assembly (1) and hook turnbuckle assembly (1) to suspension tiedown bar (7) and suspension tiedown bracket (2).

(4) With wrench provided, tighten until turnbuckle assembly (1) is completely turned in.

2-180 Change 3

245_image_0.png

2-181

Extension

2-51. Removal And Installation Of Cargo Barrier A. Removal Of Cargo Barrier Extension.

Remove quick release pin (5) from post assembly (2) and remove cargo barrier extension (1) from cargo bulkhead (3).

b. Installation of Cargo Barrier Extension.

When installing cargo barrier extension, ensure side rack pins on post assemblies slide into holes of cargo bulkhead.

Install cargo barrier extension (1) into four mounting brackets (4) on

246_image_0.png cargo bulkhead (3) and secure with quick release pin (5).

0

247_image_0.png

2-51.1. Removal And Installation Of Cargo Barrier And Net

Removal and installation instructions for the cargo barrier and stowage compartment net are applicable only for M1025, M1025A1, M1026, and M1026A1 vehicles equipped with the cargo barrier and net kit.

A. Removal Of Cargo Barrier And Net.

( 1 ) Remove net (2) by unhooking two J-hooks (5) from D-rings (4) on cargo

248_image_0.png

floor (3), two J-hooks (1) from D-rings (7) on left and right wheelhouses (6), and three J-hooks (10) from D-rings (11) at D-beam (12) on cargo floor (3).

(2) Slide cargo barrier (8) out of left and right channels (9).

2-182.2 Change 1

B. Installation Of Cargo Barrier And Net.

(1) Position cargo barrier (8) into left and right channels (9) and slide cargo barrier (8) down to cargo floor (3).

If slack exists in stowage compartment net, attach two J-hooks to each D-ring at D-beam on cargo floor to ensure J-hooks are not damaged when closing tailgate.

Prior to installing net, ensure four J-hooks are toward front of vehicle and six J-hooks are toward rear of vehicle.

( 2 ) Position net (2) on cargo floor (3) and install two J-hooks (5) to D-rings (4)

249_image_0.png

on cargo floor (3), two J-hooks (1) to D-rings (7) on left and right wheelhouse (6), and three J-hooks (10) to D-rings (11) on D-beam (12) on cargo floor (3).

(3) Pull adjustable strap (13) to remove slack from net (2).

Change 1 2-183

Section Vi. Tow/Armament Carrier Operation

2-52. General

a. This section provides operating instructions for components found on M966, M966A1, M1036, M1045, M1045A1, M1045A2, M1046, M1046A1, and M1121 TOW carriers and on M1025, M1025A1, M1025A2, M1026, M1026A1, M1043, M1043A1, M1043A2, M1044, and M1044A1 armament carriers.

b. Refer to para. 2-2a for stowage location of fire extinguisher on TOW and armament carriers. Refer to para. 2-27 for operation of fire extinguisher.

2-53. Cargo Shell Door Operation

Never open one end of the cargo shell door without first ensuring that the opposite end is securely closed. Not doing so may cause both ends to open at the same time, causing damage to equipment, mission abort, or injury to personnel.

a. General. The cargo shell door is a double-actuating door that pivots at either end. When door forward latch is released from inside vehicle, door opens rearward and functions as a TOW loader's door to facilitate mounting of TOW launcher, missile loading, and missile reloading. When door rear latch is released, door opens forward and permits access to cargo area from rear of vehicle for stowing the TOW launcher and equipment or ground mounting TOW launcher.

For ease of operation, a grab-hold loop can be attached to the cargo door strap at the discretion of unit commander. Notify unit maintenance for installation of grab-hold loop.

B. Raising And Lowering Rear End Of Cargo Shell Door.

(1) Turn locking device (6) to the lock position to ensure that forward end of cargo shell door (2) is locked. Pull door handle (1) upward and release. Push door (2) open, until door (2) will open automatically to FULL OPEN position.

(2) Pull on strap (3) to lower door (2) then slam shut. Ensure door (2) is locked by observing alignment of door surface with cargo shell surface side and bottom edges (4).

c. Raising and Lowering Forward End of Cargo Shell Door.

(1) Turn locking device (6) to unlock position and pull door forward latch (5) downward and release. Push door (2) open with grab handle (7) until door (2) will open automatically to full open position.

(2) Pull down on grab handle (7) to lower door (2), then pull shut. Ensure door (2) is locked by observing position of striker pins (8) and latch (9) engagement while pushing and pulling on grab handle (7).

(3) Turn locking device (6) to lock forward end of cargo shell door (2).

251_image_0.png

251_image_1.png

2-185

Should both ends of the cargo shell door open at the same time, a safety catch built into the rear latch mechanism will normally engage the rear strikers and prevent the door from slinging forward. Should this occur, procedures to reinstall the door are provided in steps 1 through 8. If door has separated from all four strikers, notify unit maintenance.

(1) Inspect the rear latch mechanism and ensure the rear strikers (2) have engaged the safety catch (3).

252_image_0.png

(2) Turn locking device (9), pull the cargo shell door forward latch (6) from inside the vehicle, and completely raise door (5).

(3) Release rear door latch locks (1), if locked. (4) Grasp raised door (5) from rear of vehicle with both hands and pull right side of door (5) straight down. A distinctive latching sound should be heard.

(5) Inspect right rear latch mechanism again to ensure striker (2) engagement with latch (4).

253_image_0.png (6) Perform steps 3, 4, and 5 for left side of door.

(7) Enter vehicle, pull forward end of door (5) shut, and turn locking device (9). Inspect forward door

253_image_1.png

latches (7) to ensure proper striker (8) engagement.

(8) Exit vehicle and raise door (5) from the rear. Operation of door (5) should be smooth. If operation is not smooth, or door components appear damaged, notify unit maintenance.

2-187

2-54. Tow Weapon Station Operation A. Before Operation.

(1) Release three weapon station cover securing latches (2) and push weapon station cover (7) open using weapon station cover handle (8).

(2) Secure weapon station cover (7) in the open position with two retaining latches (5) and catches (6). (3) Raise weapon station brake handle (4) to unlock weapon station (9).

(4) Use weapon station brake handle (4) and turret positioning handle (1) to rotate weapon station (9) to the desired azimuth.

(5) Lock weapon station (9) with brake handle (4).

Do not sit, stand, or place heavy objects on weapon station, tray, or cover. Components may bend, and damage to equipment will occur.

(6) Use gunner's sling (3) as seat rest or restraint if gunner is positioned in the weapon station during travel or weapon operation.

(7) Detach retaining pin (11) on weapon station pedestal mount cover (12) from hole in turret positioning handle (1) and open pedestal mount cover (12).

(8) Secure pedestal mount cover (12) to pedestal mount cover retainer (10).

B. After Operation.

(1) Detach pedestal mount cover (12) from pedestal mount cover retainer (10).

254_image_0.png (2) Close pedestal mount cover (12) and secure retaining pin (11) to turret positioning handle (1). (3) Remove two retaining latches (5) from catches (6). (4) Close weapon station cover (7) and secure with three weapon station securing latches (2).

2-55. Armament Weapon Station Operation A. Before Operation.

(1) Release three weapon station cover securing latches (2) and push weapon station cover (7) open using weapon station cover handle (8).

(2) Secure weapon station cover (7) in the open position with two retaining latches (5) and catches (6). (3) Raise weapon station brake handle (4) to unlock weapon station (9). (4) Use weapon station brake handle (4) and turret positioning handle (1) to rotate weapon station (9) to the desired azimuth.

(5) Lock weapon station (9) with brake handle (4).

Do not sit, stand, or place heavy objects on weapon station, tray, or cover. Components may bend and damage to equipment will occur.

(6) Use gunner's sling (3) as seat rest or restraint if gunner is positioned in the weapon station during travel or weapon operation.

B. After Operation.

(1) Remove two retaining latches (5) from catches (6). (2) Close weapon station cover (7) and secure with three weapon station securing latches (2).

255_image_0.png

2-189 2-56. Gunner'S Platform Operation A. Before Operation.

(1) Depress two lock buttons (6) on locking pins (5) and remove locking pins (5) from locking lugs (9) and holes (10) securing platform (1) in stowed position (14).

(2) Grasp hand hold (2) on platform (1) to lift platform (1) to either half-height position (13) or full-height position (12).

(a) If half-height position (13) is required, lift platform (1) all the way up, and turn two latches (7) so that ledges of latches (7) are facing up and parallel to bottom edge of platform (1). Lower platform (1) and allow to rest on ledges of latch (7) at half-height position (13). Insert locking pins (5) through forward locking holes (4) in platform (1) and holes (11) in platform risers (8).

(b) If full-height position (12) is required, lift platform (1) to the full-height position (12), and ensure that rear locking holes (3) in left and right sides of platform (1) are aligned with locking holes (11) in platform risers (8). Insert locking pins (5) through rear locking holes (3) in platform (1) and holes (11) in platform risers (8).

B. After Operation.

(1) Remove locking pins (5) securing platform (1) in either half-height position (13) or full-height position

256_image_0.png

(12) by pressing lock buttons (6) and removing locking pins (5). Lift up on platform (1) and turn two latches (7) so that ledges of latch (7) are facing downward, parallel to floor.

(2) Lower platform to stowed position (14), and align locking holes (10) with locking lugs (9). Insert locking pins (5) through locking holes (10) and lugs (9).

Section Vii. Ambulance Operation

2-57. General

a. This section provides operating instructions for components found on M996, M996A1, M997, M997A1, M997A2, M1035, M1035A1, and M1035A2 ambulances.

b. Refer to para. 2-2a for stowage location of fire extinguisher on ambulance vehicles. Refer to para. 227 for operation of fire extinguisher.

To prevent possible injury, insulation may be added to the exposed refrigerant lines of the air conditioner behind the companion seat, at the discretion of unit commander. Notify unit maintenance for installation of insulation.

2-58. Soft Top Ambulance (M1035, M1035A1, And M1035A2) Liter Rack Operation Warning

When transporting more than one litter patient, first litter patient must be loaded on upper litter rack. Injury may result if litter patient is loaded in lower litter rack first.

A. Unloading Litters From Litter Rack.

(1) Release five straps (16) securing enclosure rear curtain (15) to tailgate (17).

(2) Roll up enclosure rear curtain (15) and secure with two straps (18).

(3) Lower tailgate (17) (para. 2-21).

257_image_0.png

(4) Release four straps (3) securing litter (4) to lower litter rack (5).

(5) Pull out and remove litter (4) from lower litter rack (5).

(6) Release four straps (3) securing litter (10) to upper litter rack (8). (7) Upper litter tray (7) must be pushed forward and raised slightly to allow stops (6) to clear notches (9) in upper litter rack (8).

(8) Pull upper litter tray (7) out from upper litter rack (8). Lower and rest upper litter tray (7) in lower litter rack (5).

(9) Remove litter (10) from upper litter tray (7).

B. Loading Litters On Litter Racks Note

Ensure litter support legs are positioned behind stops on upper litter tray.

(1) Place litter (10) on upper litter tray (7). (2) Slide litter (10) up until rear support legs (11) are positioned behind stops (12) on upper litter tray (7). (3) Pull litter tray (7) up and push forward to lock litter tray (7) to upper litter rack (8). (4) Secure litter (10) to upper litter rack (8) with four straps (3). (5) Place litter (4) on lower litter rack (5) and slide forward. (6) Secure litter (4) to lower litter rack (5) with four straps (3). (7) Raise tailgate (14) (para. 2-21).

258_image_0.png (8) Release two straps (2) and unroll enclosure rear curtain (1). (9) Secure enclosure rear curtain (1) to tailgate (14) with five straps (13).

259_image_0.png

NOTE

For ease of installation, soft top components should be installed when temperatures are above 72°F (22°C).

a. General. The 2-litter ambulance soft top enclosure consists of four soft doors, roof cover, and bow assemblies. For removal of doors, refer to para. 2-46. Para. 2-59 covers removal and installation of roof cover, rails, bow assemblies, and rear bow.

b. Removal of Roof Cover, Rails, and Bow Assemblies. (1) Unfasten eyelets (3) from turnbuttons (2) on two horizontal rails (6) and "A" pillar (1). (2) Remove roof cover (7) from horizontal rails (6). (3) Unfasten eyelets (3) from turnbuttons (2) on "C" pillar (5) and rear bow (8). (4) Depress locking tabs (11) and unhook straps (14) from footman loops (13) on wheelhouse (10) and tailgate (9). Remove grommets (12) from foot-man loops (13).

(5) Roll roof cover (7) over rear bow (8) and lower rear bow (8). (6) Roll roof cover (7) over "C" pillar (5) and "A" pillar (1). (7) Slide roof cover (71 from channel (4).

260_image_0.png

2-194

(8) Remove eight screws (17) securing two bow assemblies (15) to horizontal rails (6). Remove bow assemblies (15).

(9) Remove six screws (17) securing two horizontal rails (6) to "A" pillar (1), "B" pillar (16) and "C" pillar (5). Remove horizontal rails (6).

c. Removal of Rear Bow. rear bow (8).

(1) Depress locking tabs (11) and unhook straps (14) from footman loops (13). (2) Remove two snaprings (20) and pivot pins (18) securing rear bow (8) to pivot brackets (19). Remove d. Installation of Rear Bow. (1) Install rear bow (8) to two pivot brackets (19) with two pivot pins (18) and snaprings (20). (2) Install straps (14) to footman loop (13).

e. Installation of Rails, Bow Assemblies, and Roof Cover. (1) Install two horizontal rails (6) to "A" pillar (1), "B" pillar (16), and "C" pillar (5) with six screws (17).

261_image_0.png (2) Loosen end bracket screws (21) and install two bow assemblies (15) on horizontal rails (6) with eight screws (17). Tighten bracket screws (21).

2-195

(3) Slide roof cover (4) into channel (3) and roll roof cover (4) over bow assemblies (7) and rear bow (9).

(4) Raise rear bow (9) and roll roof cover (4) over rear bow (9).

(5) Fasten eyelets (5) to turnbuttons (2) on rear bow (9). (6) Install roof cover (4) around horizontal rails (6) and "C" pillar (8) and fasten eyelets (5) to turnbuttons (2).

(7) Fasten eyelets (5) to turnbuttons (2) on "A" pillar (1).

262_image_0.png (8) Install grommets (10) over footman loops (11), attach straps (12) to footman loops (11), and pull straps (12) tight.

2-196 2-60. Ambulance Rear Step Assembly Operation A. Lowering Rear Steps.

(1) Open and secure rear doors. (2) Ensure that the rear step safety strap (13) is connected to the rear step assembly (20). (3) Pull rear step latch cable (16) to release rear step latches (15).

Personnel inside vehicle should not lean on rear step assembly while unlatching and disconnecting rear safety strap. Injury to personnel may result from rapidly falling steps.

(4) While grasping bottom step (17) with one hand, disconnect safety strap (13) from hole (18) on rear step assembly (20).

(5) Lower rear step assembly (20) by releasing bottom step (17). (6) Turn knob (19) clockwise to secure bottom step (17).

B. Raising Rear Steps.

(1) Turn knob (19) counterclockwise and raise bottom step (17). (2) Lift rear step assembly (20) until rear step latches (15) engage with rear step strikers (14). (3) Connect step safety strap (13) to hole (18) on rear step assembly (20).

263_image_0.png (4) Close and secure rear doors.

2-61. Ambulance Interior Electrical Controls

a. General. The vehicle electrical system is used to power the NBC air filtration system, interior lights, heater, air-conditioner, and ventilation system. It is recommended to have engine running while operating the heater, vent, and NBC air filtration system so the alternator maintains battery charge. The engine must be running to operate the air-conditioner compressor.

B. White Light Operation.

(1) Place interior light switch (1) on electrical control panel (3) in "NORMAL" position. The blackout lights will illuminate.

(2) Close bulkhead doors, rear doors, and steps. Ceiling white lights will illuminate and blackout lights will extinguish.

(3) To activate spotlights, engage switch on back of spotlight assembly.

264_image_0.png

(4) If bulkhead doors, rear doors, or rear steps are opened, all white light illumination will be extinguished and blackout lights will be illuminated.

(5) Turn vehicle main light switch to "SERVICE DRIVE" to operate interior white lights when bulkhead doors, rear doors, or rear steps are open and blackout operation is not required.

c. Blackout Light Operation. Place interior light switch (1) in "B/O" position. Blackout lights will illuminate.

Blackout position on the electrical control panel overrides the automatic blackout switches in the event of automatic blackout switch failure in blackout conditions.

d. Interior Light Operation. Place interior light switch (1) in "OFF" position to extinguish all interior lights.

e. Fuse Replacement. To replace a defective fuse (2) in the electrical control panel (3), pull fuse (2)

265_image_0.png

straight out of panel (3). Inspect fuse (2) for an open fuse element (5). Replace with known good fuse (4). All fuses in the control box are 20 amp.

265_image_1.png

265_image_2.png

F. M996 And M996A1 Heater Operation. Warning

Do not operate heater when ventilation system is on. Damage to heater, or injury to personnel will result.

(1) To operate heater, ensure fuel cutoff valve (14) is open and place vent off-on-max lever (5) to "OFF." Hold heater run-start switch (2) to "START" until heater light (1) illuminates to show that heater burner is operating.

(2) When heater light (1) illuminates, position heater run-start switch (2) to "RUN." (3) Outlet air temperature can be adjusted by positioning fuel selection switch (3) to either "HIGH" or "LOW." (4) To turn heater off, position heater run-start switch (2) to "OFF." It will take several minutes for heater to purge itself of fuel.

G. M996 And M996A1 Vent Operation.

(1) To operate ventilation system, position on-off-max lever (5) to "ON." The proportion of fresh air entering patient compartment can be adjusted by the following: (a) Position fan control switch (4) to "HIGH", "MED", or "LOW." (b) Adjust off-on-max lever (5) to the right to increase proportion of fresh air entering the system.

266_image_0.png (c) Open rear door vent to enable it to function as an exhaust vent.

(2) To turn ventilation system off, place on-off-max lever (5) to "OFF."

H. M997, M997A1, And M997A2 Heater Operation.

(1) To operate the heater, ensure fuel cutoff valve (14) is open and place A/C vent-heat lever (6) in "HEAT" position.

(2) Adjust the inside-outside air lever (7) to "HEAT MAX" or "HEAT NORMAL." (3) Position fuel selection switch (9) to "LOW." (4) Hold heater run-start switch (10) to "START" position until heater light (11) illuminates to show that heater burner is operating. When heater light (11) illuminates, position the heater run-start switch (10) to "RUN." (5) Outlet air temperature can be adjusted by positioning the fuel selection switch (9) to either "HI" or "LOW," the fan switch (13) to "LO," "MED," or "HI," and the inside-outside air lever (7) to either "HEAT MAX" or "HEAT NORMAL." (6) To turn the heater off, position the heater run-start switch (10) to "OFF." It will take several minutes for the heater to purge itself of fuel. After heater light (11) goes off, move inside-outside air lever (7) to "UNIT- OFF."

I. M997, M997A1, And M997A2 Air-Conditioner Operation.

(1) Start engine (para. 2-10). (2) To operate the air-conditioner, position the A/C vent-heat lever (6) to "A/C." (3) Adjust the inside-outside air lever (7) to "A/C MAX" or "A/C NORMAL." (4) Set A/C off-on switch (12) to "ON." (5) Adjust A/C cold control (8) clockwise to "COLD." (6) Outlet air temperature can be adjusted with A/C cold control (8) by rotating the control (8) between "OFF" and "COLD," the fan switch (13) to "LO", "MED," or "HI," and the inside-outside air lever (7) to "A/C MAX" or "A/C NORMAL." (7) To turn air-conditioner off, position the A/C switch (12) to "OFF" and move inside-outside air lever (7) to UNIT-OFF".

J. M997, M997A1, And M997A2 Vent Operation.

(1) To operate ventilation system without heating or cooling incoming air, place A/C vent-heat lever (6) and inside-outside air lever (7) in "VENT" position.

(2) Activate fan switch (13) to "LO," "MED," or "HI."

267_image_0.png (3) To turn ventilation system off, place inside-outside air lever (7) in "UNIT-OFF" position.

A. Assembling Litter Rail Extension.

(1) Turn latch (1) counterclockwise and open stowage compartment door (2). (2) Loosen and disconnect securing strap (7) and remove folded litter rail extension (6) from stowage compartment (5).

Perform step 3 for M997, M997A1, and M997A2 vehicles. M996 and M996A1 litters are stowed behind right ambulatory patient seat.

(3) Lift tray (3) slightly and push in tray supports (4) to lower tray (3) for access to stowed litters. (4) Pull left and right rails (8) apart and let legs (13) drop down. Ensure feet (14) are flat on ground. (5) Lock support braces (15), and adjust straps (16) as necessary.

B. Unloading Litters From Lower Litter Rack. Warning

268_image_0.png

Unload litters carefully to prevent patient injury.

(1) Release front and rear litter handle straps (10) securing litter (9) to lower litter rack (11). (2) Secure both rails (8) of litter rail extension (6) into slots (12) on lower litter rack (11). (3) Slide litter (9) from lower litter rack (11) onto litter rail extension (6). Lift up and remove litter (9) from litter rail extension (6).

C. Loading Litters On Lower Litter Rack. Warning

When loading more than two litter patients, upper litter rack patients must be loaded first. Injury may result if litter patients are loaded in lower litter rack first.

(1) Place litter (9) on litter rail extension (6).

Ensure straps and equipment do not inhibit litter loading operations. Load litters carefully to prevent patient injury.

(2) Slide litter (9) onto lower litter rack (11).

269_image_0.png

(3) Secure litter (9) to lower litter rack (11) with front and rear litter handle straps (10).

2-203 D. Unloading Litters From Upper Litter Racks. Warning

When unloading more than two litter patients, lower litter rack patients must be unloaded first. Injury may result if upper litter rack patients are unloaded first.

(1) Release front litter handle straps (5) from litter handles (6). (2) Unhook tension strap (9) from footman loop (7) on lower litter rack (8).

(3) Pull out upper litter rack handle (11) and support weight of upper litter rack (4).

Rear end of upper litter must be supported before releasing suspension strap

270_image_0.png hook. Injury to personnel may result if rear end of upper litter is not supported.

(4) Unhook rear suspension strap hook (3) from loop (10) on upper litter rack (4). Clip suspension strap hook (3) to eye (2).

(5) Release litter support latch stop (13), push latch (12) in, and lower upper litter rack (4) onto lower litter rack (8).

2-204

(6) Slide litter rack handle (11) into upper litter rack (4). (7) Secure rails of litter rail extension (14) into slots in upper litter rack (4). (8) Release rear litter handle straps (5) from litter handles (6). (9) Slide litter (1) down rails (14) until litter (1) is clear of upper litter rack (4). (10) Lift and remove litter (1) from litter rail extension (14).

(11) Remove litter rail extension (14) from upper litter rack (4).

E. Loading Litters On Upper Litter Racks. Warning

When loading more than two litter patients, upper litter rack patients must be loaded first. Injury may result if litter patients are loaded in lower litter rack first.

(1) Secure both rails of litter rail extension (14) into slots in upper litter rack (4). (2) Place litter (1) on litter rail extension (14). (3) Slide litter (1) up rails (14) until litter (1) is clear of litter rail extension (14). (4) Secure rear litter handles (6) to upper litter rack (4) with rear litter handle straps (5).

(5) Remove litter rail extension (14) from upper litter rack (4).

(6) Unhook suspension strap hook (3) from eye (2).

271_image_0.png (7) Pull out upper litter rack handle (11). (8) Raise upper litter rack (4), push into litter support latch (12), and secure with latch stop (13). (9) Attach suspension strap hook (3) to loop (10) on upper litter rack (4). (10) Secure front litter handles (6) to litter rack (4) with front litter handle straps (5). (11) Hook tension strap (9) to footman loop (7) on lower litter rack (8). (12) Slide litter rack handle (11) into upper litter rack (4).

2-205

F. Folding Upper Litter Rack To The Backrest Position.

(1) Unhook litter rack tension strap (10) from lower litter rack footman loop (8).

(2) Unhook two upper litter rack suspension straps (4) from loops (2) on upper litter rack (1) and hook strap ends (5) to eyes (3).

272_image_0.png

(3) Release upper litter rack latch (6) and disengage rack striker (7) from latch (6).

(4) Lower upper litter rack (1) onto the lower litter rack (9) forming a backrest.

(5) To convert backrest to upper litter rack (1), raise upper litter rack (1) and engage rack striker (7) into upper litter rack latch (6). Ensure striker (7) is locked in latch (6).

(6) Unhook two upper litter rack suspension strap hooks (5) from eyes (3) and hook to loops (2) on upper litter rack (1).

(7) Hook upper litter rack tension strap (10) to footman loop (8) on lower litter rack (9).

273_image_0.png (8) Adjust straps (10) and (4) for proper tension.

G. Fold And Stow Litter Rail Extension.

(1) Unlock support braces (6).

(2) Fold left and right rails (2) together.

(3) Fold left and right litter rail legs (4) and feet (5) against rail (2). (4) Lift tray (7), push tray supports (8) in, and lower tray (7).

Perform step 5 for M997, M997A1, and M997A2 vehicles only. M996 and M996A1 litters are stowed behind right ambulatory patient seat.

(5) Slide litters into stowage compartment (9) on top of lift tray (7). Pull out supports (8) to place lift tray (7) in raised position. (6) Place folded litter rail extension (1) into stowage compartment (9) and secure with strap (10).

274_image_0.png (7) Close door (3) and turn latch (11) clockwise to secure door (3).

275_image_0.png

275_image_1.png

H. Opening Patient Seat To Accommodate Ambulatory Patients.

(1) Ensure litters (1) are in stowed position.

(2) Pull out and up on seat latch handle (5) and remove latch (7) from catch (6).

(3) Lift seatback (4) to open position and fold seatback support (2) into

276_image_0.png

recesses between seat cushions (9).

(4) Ensure that seat braces (8) are fully extended and locked in position.

I. Closing Patient Seat To Accommodate Litter Patients.

(1) Press lock buttons (12) on seat braces (8) and fold braces (8) toward seatback (4).

(2) Fold seatback support (2) outward and fold seatback (4) into closed position. Ensure that guide pins (11) on seatback support (2) engage holes (10) in seat base (3).

(3) Install seatback (4) to seat base (3) with seat latch (7) and catch (6). If

277_image_0.png

necessary to ensure security of seatback (4), adjust seat latch (7) to proper length by turning clockwise or counterclockwise.

2-211

· NBC filters do not protect against carbon monoxide poisoning. · NBC filters do not decontaminate or neutralize contamination, they only collect and contain it.

· NBC contaminated filters must be handled using adequate precaution (FM 3-5) and must be disposed of by trained personnel.

· After Nuclear, Biological, or Chemical (NBC) exposure of this vehicle, all air filters shall be handled with extreme caution. Unprotected personnel may experience injury or death if residual toxic agents or radioactive material are present. Servicing personnel will wear protective overgarments, mask, hood, and chemical protective gloves and boots. All contaminated air filters will be placed into double-lined plastic bags and moved immediately to a temporary segregation area away from the work site. If contaminated by radioactive dust, the Company NBC team will measure the radiation before removal. The NBC team will determine the extent of safety procedures required. The temporary segregation area will be marked with the appropriate NBC signs. Final disposal of contaminated air filters will be in accordance with local SOP.

· Failure to observe above warnings may result in injury or death.

A. General

(1) For operation in an NBC environment, M996, M996A1, M997, M997A1, and M997A2 ambulances are equipped with a collective NBC protection system known as a Gas-Particulate Filter Unit (GPFU). The GPFU forces filtered, temperature-controlled air to the facepiece of the M25 series protective mask or the M13 series patient protective mask, increasing NBC protection, easing breathing effort, and reducing stress and heat fatigue during extended periods of NBC operation.

(2) The GPFU system mounted in M996 and M996A1, M997, M997A1, and M997A2 ambulances include the following components: · M1A1-19 precleaner (blower)/particulate filter unit · M18 gas filters (two per vehicle) · NBC control panel and wiring harness · Five or seven individual NBC heaters · PVC or flex tubing to connect filter precleaner/particulate filter and heaters.

B. Component Location And Identification.

(1) The precleaner/particulate filter unit (6) and the two gas filters (5) are located in the NBC stowage compartment above the driver's position. In the M997, M997A1, and M997A2 ambulances, entry to this compartment is gained by unlatching the two paddle locks (1) and securing the NBC access door (2) to the ceiling (3) with the door catch (4).

279_image_0.png

279_image_1.png

2-213

(2) In the M996 and M996A1 ambulances, the precleaner/particulate filter

280_image_0.png

unit (4) and two gas filters (5) are mounted in a similar configuration to the M997, M997A1, and M997A2. Entry into the NBC compartment is gained through the NBC access door (1) located directly over the driver's head by removing the safety strap (3) and loosening two captive wing head screws (2) and carefully lowering the NBC access door (1). M18 gas filters in both vehicles are replaced in a similar manner. Contaminated M18 gas filters and the precleaner/particulate filter units should only be replaced by specially-trained NBC personnel.

M996 AND M996A1

2-214 (3) The NBC heaters (6) supply heated air to protective mask facepieces

281_image_0.png

connected to the GPFU system. Five heaters are installed in the M996 and M996A1 ambulances; three in the patient compartment and two in the cab. Seven heaters are installed in the M997, M997A1, and M997A2 ambulances; five in the patient compartment and two in the cab. When the heater (6) is not in use, the protective cap (9) should be installed in the heater (6) outlet. The cap (9) is a oneway check valve allowing air to flow in only one direction, outward from the heater (6). This reduces the potential risk of NBC contamination to the vehicle's NBC system. The heater (6) is activated by turning the temperature control knob (8) clockwise and adjusting to the desired heat level. The indicator light (7) will illuminate when the heater (6) is in operation (4) The NBC control box (11) is mounted in the cab above and behind the passenger position. It houses the control switch (13) for the system and a fuse panel (12). A diagram (15) on the control box (11) shows heater location and identifies the fuse responsible for each heater circuit (16). Spare fuses are also present.

(5) To replace a NBC fuse (10), simply pull it straight out of the fuse

281_image_1.png

panel (12). Check fuse (10) for an open fuse element or a melted fuse link (14). If the fuse (10) is damaged, replace with a new fuse (10). All fuses in the NBC control box are 20 amp.

C. Nbc System Operation.

(1) Activate the collective NBC protection system by positioning the NBC control switch (2) on the NBC control box (1) to the "ON" position. The M1A1-19 precleaner/particulate unit blower should engage.

(2) M25 series protective mask (10): remove protective cap (3) from heater outlet (4) and connect either the six or nine foot air hose (8) to canister coupling (9). Connect hose coupling (7) to the heater outlet (4).

(3) M13 series patient protective mask (11): mask the patient with the M13 series mask (11). Connect either the six or nine foot air hose (8) to adapter (13) and connect adapter (13) to protective mask facepiece (12). Remove protective cap (14) from the heater outlet (15) and connect hose coupling (7) to heater outlet (15).

(4) Turn heater control (6) to "WARMER" and adjust to desired heat level.

Indicator light (5) should illuminate when heater is on.

(5) To shut down the NBC system, use the following procedure: (a) Unmask crew and patients when all clear is sounded.

282_image_0.png (b) Remove mask air lines from heater outlets. (c) Install protective caps on heater outlets. (d) Position switch on NBC control box to "OFF" position. (e) Clean/decontaminate and stow NBC gear.

2-216

283_image_0.png

2-217

Chapter 3 Maintenance Instructions Section I. Lubrication

3-1. Lubrication Instructions

Lubrication Instructions, Appendix G, designate cleaning and lubricating procedures for M998 series vehicles.

3-2. General Lubrication Instructions

a. Service Intervals. Service intervals on the lubrication instructions are for normal operation in moderate temperatures, humidity, and atmospheric conditions.

b. Application Points . Wipe clean lubricating points and surrounding surfaces before and after applying lubricant.

c. Reports and Records. Report unsatisfactory performance of lubricant or preserving materials on Quality Deficiency Report, SF 368, as stated in paragraph 1-4.

3-3. General Lubricating Instructions Under Unusual Conditions

a. Service Intervals. Increase frequency of lubricating service when operating under abnormal conditions such as high or low temperatures, prolonged high-speed driving, or extended cross-country operations. Such operations can destroy lubricant's protective qualities. More frequent lubricating service intervals are necessary to maintain vehicle readiness when operating under abnormal conditions. During inactive periods, with adequate preservation, service intervals can be extended.

b. Changes in Lubricant Grades. Lubricant grades change with weather conditions. Refer to Appendix G for lubricant grade changes.

c. Maintaining Lubricant Levels . Lubricant levels must be checked as specified in Appendix G. Steps must be taken to replenish and maintain lubricant levels.

3-4. Lubrication For Continued Operation Below 0°F (-18°C)

Refer to FM 9-207, Operation and Maintenance of Ordnance Materiel in Cold Weather (0°F to -65°F) (-18°C to -54°C), or Appendix G.

3-1

Section Ii. Troubleshooting

3-5. General

Troubleshooting, table 3-1, contains instructions that will help the operator identify and correct simple vehicle malfunctions. The table also helps the operator identify major mechanical difficulties that must be referred to unit maintenance. The listing of possible malfunctions come under major vehicle headings. They are: · Engine · Heating system · Transmission · Transfer case · Brakes · Wheels and tires · Steering · Winch · Special purpose bodies

3-6. Troubleshooting Procedures

a. Table 3-1 lists the common malfunctions which you may find during the operation or maintenance of M998 series of vehicles or its components. You should perform the tests/inspections and corrective actions in the order listed.

b. This manual cannot list all malfunctions that may occur, nor all tests or inspections and corrective actions. If a malfunction is not listed or is not corrected by listed actions, notify your supervisor.

Entering water too fast will cause water to splash up over hood and into air intake. The engine may stop abruptly and will not crank. Do not continue starting efforts; damage to engine will result.

· Hydrostatic lock is caused by the entry of substantial amounts of water into the engine through the air intake system and subsequent contamination of the fuel system. Hydrostatic lock most frequently occurs during or just after fording. Water is forced into the air intake system, is drawn into the engine, and effectively "locks-up" the engine.

· Notify unit maintenance for further engine tests if you suspect hydrostatic lock.

3-2 Table 3-1. Troubleshooting

MALFUNCTION TEST OR INSPECTION CORRECTIVE ACTION

Engine

1. Engine Fails To Crank

Step 1. Check to see if transmission shift lever is in "N" (neutral) or "P" (park) for M1123 and A2 vehicles.

If not, place lever in "N" (neutral) or "P" (park).

Step 2. Check battery fluid level and check battery connections for looseness, damage, or corrosion.

If any of these conditions exist, notify unit maintenance.

Step 3. Attempt to slave-start vehicle (para. 2-23). Step 4. Other causes.

Notify unit maintenance.

2. Engine Cranks Slowly

Step 1. Check battery fluid level and check battery cable connections for looseness, damage, or corrosion.

If any of these conditions exist, notify unit maintenance.

Step 2. Attempt to slave-start vehicle (para. 2-23). Step 3. Other causes.

Notify unit maintenance.

3. Engine Cranks But Does Not Start

Step 1. Check to see if fuel gauge indicates "E" (empty).

Fill fuel tank, and start engine.

Step 2. Purge fuel system of air (para. 3-10). Step 3. Check to see if WAIT-TO-START lamp assembly fails to light or does not go out.

Notify unit maintenance if wait-to-start lamp assembly fails to light or does not go out.

Step 4. Other causes.

Notify unit maintenance.

4. Vehicle Not Charging According To Voltmeter

Step 1. Check battery cable connections for looseness, damage, or corrosion.

Notify unit maintenance of any damage to battery cables.

Step 2. Check for broken or missing alternator belts.

Notify unit maintenance if alternator belts are broken or missing.

Step 3. Other causes.

Notify unit maintenance.

MALFUNCTION TEST OR INSPECTION CORRECTIVE ACTION 5. EXCESSIVE EXHAUST SMOKE AFTER ENGINE REACHES NORMAL OPERATING TEMPERATURE 190°-230°F (88°-110°C) Step 1. Check oil level for overfilling (Appendix G).

Notify unit maintenance if fluid level is high.

Step 2. Check for restricted air cleaner.

If emergency situation exists, clean air cleaner element (para. 3-15). If emergency situation does not exist, notify unit maintenance.

Step 3. Other causes.

Notify unit maintenance.

  1. ENGINE STARTS BUT MISFIRES, RUNS ROUGH, OR LACKS POWER Step 1. Check for water in fuel filter by draining.

Drain fuel filter (para. 3-10).

Step 2. Check for restricted air cleaner.

If emergency situation exists, clean air cleaner element (para. 3-15). If emergency situation does not exist, notify unit maintenance.

Step 3. Other causes.

Notify unit maintenance.

  1. ENGINE OVERHEATS ACCORDING TO ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE GAUGE Step 1. Check to see if fan is running.

If fan is not running, perform emergency fan clutch override procedure (para. 3-23).

Step 2. Allow engine to cool and check for low coolant level.

Add coolant as necessary (para. 3-9).

Step 3. Check for debris blocking radiator fins.

Remove debris.

Step 4. Check for broken or missing fan belts.

Notify unit maintenance if belts are broken or missing.

Step 5. Other causes.

Notify unit maintenance.

  1. LOW ENGINE OIL PRESSURE ACCORDING TO OIL PRESSURE GAUGE Step 1. Check for low oil level (para. 3-17).

Add oil (Appendix G).

Step 2. Other causes.

Notify unit maintenance.

3-4 Table 3-1. Troubleshooting (Cont'D)

MALFUNCTION TEST OR INSPECTION CORRECTIVE ACTION

Heating System

  1. HOT WATER PERSONNEL HEATER FAILS TO PRODUCE HEAT AFTER ENGINE REACHES OPERATING TEMPERATURE Step 1. Check operating controls for correct settings. Step 2. Other causes.

Notify unit maintenance.

Transmission

10. No Response To Shift Lever Movement

Step 1. Check to see if transfer case lever is in "N" (neutral) or "P" (Park) for M1123 and A2 vehicles.

Place transmission shift lever in "N" (neutral) or "P" (Park) and select transfer gear range.

Step 2. Other causes.

Notify unit maintenance.

  1. ROUGH SHIFTING All causes.

Notify unit maintenance.

  1. FLUID THROWN FROM TRANSMISSION FILL TUBE Step 1. Check to see if transmission dipstick is loose.

Secure dipstick.

Step 2. Check fluid level for overfilling (para. 3-19).

Notify unit maintenance if fluid level is high.

Step 3. Other causes.

Notify unit maintenance.

  1. SLIPPAGE IN ALL RANGES Step 1. Check for low fluid level (para. 3-19).

Add fluid (Appendix G).

Step 2. Other causes.

Notify unit maintenance.

Transfer Case

14. Transfer Case Shift Lever Will Not Shift

Step 1. Check for proper shifting sequence. Ensure proper shifting sequence is used (para. 2-11).

Step 2. Other causes.

Notify unit maintenance.

MALFUNCTION
TEST OR INSPECTION
CORRECTIVE ACTION

Brakes

  1. POOR SERVICE BRAKING ACTION All causes.

Notify unit maintenance.

  1. SERVICE BRAKES DRAGGING All causes.

Notify unit maintenance.

17. Brake Warning Lamp Assembly On

Step 1. Check to see if parking brake is partially applied.

Disengage parking brake.

Step 2. Check for low brake fluid level (TM 9-2320-280-20).

Add brake fluid (Appendix G).

Step 3. Other causes.

Notify unit maintenance.

  1. PARKING BRAKE FAILS TO HOLD VEHICLE Clean and adjust parking brake (para. 3-13) If parking brake still fails to hold vehicle, notify unit maintenance.

Wheels And Tires 19. Wheels Wobble Or Shimmy

Step 1. Check to see if wheel lug nuts are loose.

Tighten loose lug nuts (para. 3-26) and notify unit maintenance to properly torque lug nuts.

Step 2. Inspect for mud or dirt build up inside the rim.

Remove any mud or dirt build up.

Step 3. Other causes.

Notify unit maintenance.

  1. EXCESSIVE OR UNEVEN TIRE WEAR Step 1. Check tire air pressure.

Inflate or deflate tires to correct air pressure.

Step 2. Other causes.

Notify unit maintenance.

  1. VEHICLE WANDERS TO ONE SIDE ON LEVEL PAVEMENT Step 1. Check tire air pressure.

Inflate or deflate tires to correct air pressure.

Step 2. Other causes.

Notify unit maintenance.

MALFUNCTION TEST OR INSPECTION CORRECTIVE ACTION

Steering 22. Hard Steering

Step 1. Check tire air pressure.

Inflate or deflate tires to correct air pressure.

Step 2. Check power steering reservoir for low fluid level (para. 3-20).

Add steering fluid (Appendix G).

Step 3. Check for broken or missing power steering belts.

Notify unit maintenance if belts are broken or missing.

Step 4. Check power steering cooler for bent fins or any other air flow obstructions.

Remove obstructions if fins are not damaged. Notify unit maintenance if power steering cooler is damaged.

Step 5. Other causes.

Notify unit maintenance.

Winch 23. Winch Stops During Normal Operation

Step 1. Wait 2 minutes and attempt winch operation again.

Refer to para. 2-26 for winch operation.

Step 2. Check to see if clutch lever is engaged (para. 2-26).

If not, engage clutch lever.

Step 3. Check to see if voltmeter is in red or yellow (engine not running).

Start engine and charge batteries.

Step 4. Other causes.

Notify unit maintenance.

Special Purpose Bodies Tow/Armament Carrier

  1. WEAPON STATION WILL NOT ROTATE OR LOCK Step 1. Check to see if brake handle is in proper position (para. 2-54).

Place brake handle in proper position.

Step 2. Check for obstructions that may be restricting weapon station movement.

Remove obstructions.

Step 3. Other causes.

Notify unit maintenance.

  1. CARGO SHELL DOOR WILL NOT SEAL PROPERLY All causes.

Notify unit maintenance.

MALFUNCTION TEST OR INSPECTION CORRECTIVE ACTION

Ambulance 26. All Ceiling White Ughts, Blackout Ughts, And Spotlights Fail To Illuminate

Step 1. Check that interior light switch on control box is in proper position.

Place interior light switch in proper position (para. 2-61).

Step 2. If white light illumination is required under blackout conditions, make sure front door, rear doors, and rear steps are closed.

Step 3. For white illumination with front door, rear doors, and rear steps opened, set the vehicle light switch to "service drive" (para. 2-13).

Step 4. Check that left and right lighting fuses are serviceable.

Replace fuses if blown (para. 2-61).

Step 5. Other causes.

Notify unit maintenance.

27. Left Or Right Ceiling White Lights And Blackout Light Fail To

ILLUMINATE Step 1. Check that left lighting or right lighting fuse is serviceable.

Replace fuse if blown (para. 2-61).

Step 2. Other causes.

Notify unit maintenance.

28. Ceiung White Ught Or Blackout Ught Fails To Illuminate

Step 1. Inspect bulb for serviceability.

Replace bulb with known serviceable bulb (para. 3-28).

Step 2. Other causes.

Notify unit maintenance.

29. Spotught Fails To Illuminate

Step 1. Perform malfunction 26, steps 1 through 3. Step 2. Check if ceiling lights illuminate. If dome lamps illuminate, check to ensure spotlight switch is in proper position.

Place spotlight switch in proper position (para. 2-61).

Step 3. Inspect bulb for serviceability.

Replace bulb with known serviceable bulb (para. 3-28).

Step 4. Other causes.

Notify unit maintenance.

3-8

MALFUNCTION TEST OR INSPECTION CORRECTIVE ACTION 30. POOR HEATING, VENTILATING, OR AIR-CONDITIONING PERFORMANCE Step 1. Ensure that operating controls are properly set.

Set operating controls (para. 2-61).

Step 2. Inspect HVAC filters for excessive dust, dirt, or debris.

Service HVAC filters (para. 3-28).

Step 3. Inspect HVAC fuses for a blown or missing fuse.

Notify unit maintenance. Replace fuse (para. 2-61).

Step 4. Other causes.

Notify unit maintenance.

3-9

Section Iii. Maintenance Procedures

3-7. General

The operator/crew is responsible for daily, weekly, and monthly preventive maintenance checks and services listed in table 2-2. Certain other maintenance services, also the responsibility of the operator/crew, are explained in this section.

3-8. Raising And Securing Hood

a. Raising Hood.

(1) Apply parking brake. (2) Release left and right hood latches (1).

W A R N I N G

To ensure opening of the hood assembly is accomplished safely and e f f e c t i v e l y, always maintain the proper lifting posture with legs bent and back straight. Failure to do so may cause damage to equipment or injury to personnel.

(3) Facing the driver's side of the hood, position one hand at the rear area of the hood and the other at the rear area of the wheel well.

Due to the inherent weight of the assembly, the hood may flex when

293_image_0.png opening, possibly causing interference between the right side of the hood assembly and the body. This interference can be eliminated by pushing the hood assembly laterally, away from the individual, prior to lifting.

3 - 1 0 Change 1 Warning

When raising and securing hood, ensure the hood prop rod is secured to hood support bracket. Damage to equipment or injury to personnel will occur if hood is not properly secured in raised position.

(4) Push the hood toward the passenger side and lift at the same time, moving your hands toward the front of the hood as it opens. The prop rod (2) should automatically engage the support bracket (3) when hood is raised.

b. Lowering hood.

When releasing hood prop rod, do not pull rod at hook end. Injury to fingers will result.

Lower hood slowly. Damage to hood and/or headlights can occur if hood is dropped.

(1) While supporting and slightly raising the hood, grasp prop rod (2) above retaining ring (5), pull out, and release hood prop rod (2).

(2) Once the prop rod hook (4) is clear of the support bracket (3), slowly

294_image_0.png

lower hood and secure left and right hood latches (1).

Extreme care should be taken when removing surge tank filler cap if temperature gauge reads above 165°F (74°C). Do not add coolant to cooling system when engine is hot unless engine is running. Add coolant slowly. Steam or hot coolant under pressure will cause injury.

a. Raise and secure hood (para. 3-8).

295_image_0.png b. Visually check coolant level. Surge tank level should be at "COLD FILL LINE" before operation and slightly above "COLD FILL LINE" after operation. If coolant is low, perform steps c through h.

c. Place a thick cloth over surge tank filler cap (1). Carefully turn cap (1) counterclockwise to its first stop to allow cooling system pressure to escape.

d. After cooling system pressure is vented, push down and turn cap (1) counterclockwise to remove. Add coolant until surge tank level is at "COLD FILL LINE." e. Start engine (para. 2-10) and run for one minute.

f. Stop engine (para. 2-12) and recheck coolant level. If coolant level is low, add coolant until surge tank level is at "COLD FILL LINE." g. Repeat steps e and f until surge tank level remains at "COLD FILL LINE." h. Install cap (1). Lower and secure hood (para. 3-8).

3-12

Do not perform fuel system checks, inspection, or maintenance while smoking or near fire, flames, or sparks. Fuel may ignite, causing damage to vehicle and injury or death to personnel.

a. Draining Fuel Filter.

(1) Raise and secure hood (para. 3-8). (2) Start engine (para. 2-10). (3) Open fuel draincock (4) and allow approximately 1 pint (0.47 L) of fuel to drain into a suitable container.

(4) Close draincock (4) when draining is complete. (5) Shut off engine (para. 2-12). (6) Lower and secure hood (para. 3-8).

b. Purging Fuel System of Air.

This procedure is used to purge fuel system of air if vehicle has run out of fuel.

(1) Raise and secure hood (para. 3-8).

296_image_0.png

(2) Disconnect fuel line (2) from fuel filter outlet (3). (3) Place a rag over fuel filter outlet (3). (4) Crank engine until rag is wet with fuel. (5) Connect fuel line (2) to fuel filter outlet (3). (6) Start engine (para. 2-10) and ensure fuel system has been purged of air.

3-13 a. Unhook latches (6) securing companion seat (1) to battery box and remove companion seat (1).

Do not perform battery system checks or inspections while smoking or near fire, flames, or sparks, especially if the caps are off. Batteries may explode causing damage to vehicle and injury or death to personnel.

B. Check Electrolyte Level.

(1) Unscrew and remove all battery filler caps (2) and check electrolyte level. If electrolyte level is below the ledge in the battery filler opening, add distilled water (appendix D, item 27).

(2) A battery that is continually in need of electrolyte may indicate an improperly adjusted charging system. Notify unit maintenance if the problem continues.

(3) Inspect the vented battery filler caps (2) to ensure that vents are clear, unobstructed, and permit escape of battery gases. Clean vents if obstructed; replace caps (2) if damaged.

(4) Install filler caps (2).

c. Inspect all battery compartment components, including terminal clamps (5), battery cables (3), battery holddowns (8), and shunt (4) for corrosion, damage, or looseness. Inspect terminal boots (7), if installed. Notify unit maintenance if any of these problems exist.

d. Ensure that battery terminal clamps (5) have a light coat of lubricating oil for corrosion protection. Refer to appendix D, item 19.

e. Install companion seat (1) and secure to battery box with latches (6). f. Refer to TM 9-6140-200-14 for additional information.

297_image_0.png

Reports from the field indicate that first-aid kit, stored under the companion seat and in the battery box compartment, can be contaminated by battery acid residues. At the discretion of the unit commander, the first-aid kit can be removed, cleaned, and relocated under the driver's seat.

A. First-Aid Kit Removal.

(1) Remove companion seat (para. 2-15). (2) Remove first-aid kit (9) from bracket and strap assembly (10) located inside battery box compartment (14).

(3) Remove two screws (13), nuts (11), four washers (12), and bracket and strap assembly (10) from battery box compartment (14).

(4) Install companion seat (para. 2-15).

B. First-Aid Kit Cleaning.

(1) Using a solution of sodium bicarbonate and water, wash the outside of first-aid kit (9), rinse, and dry completely.

(2) Inspect inside of first-aid kit (9) for evidence of contamination. If

298_image_0.png

contaminated, replace first-aid kit (9).

C. First-Aid Kit Installation. Note

An optional cotton duck pamphlet bag (Appendix C, Item 2) can be used to protect first-aid kit.

(1) Remove front access plate (3) from driver's seat (2).

299_image_0.png (2) Position first-aid kit (1) under driver's seat (2). (3) Install front access plate (3) on driver's seat (2).

a. Chock wheels and release parking brake handle (5). b. Turn adjusting knob (4) clockwise as tightly as possible by hand. c. Apply parking brake handle (5). d. If parking brake cannot be applied, turn adjusting knob (4) counterclockwise until parking brake can be applied.

e. Test parking brake: (1) Remove chocks. (2) Depress service brake pedal and start engine (para. 2-10). (3) Place transfer case shift lever (6) in "H" (high) and transmission shift lever (7) in "D" (drive).

(4) Slowly let up on service brake pedal. Parking brake should hold vehicle stationary.

f. Vehicles are equipped with one of two types of parking brake assemblies.

Check to see if vehicle is equipped with parking brake assembly (A) or parking brake assembly (B). Perform step (1) for parking brake assembly (A) or step (2) for brake assembly (B).

(1) After operating in mud or

300_image_0.png

sand, use a low pressure water source to ensure that the parking brake pads (10), rotor (12), pad-rotor contact areas (11), guide pins (9), and push pins (8) are thoroughly cleaned of mud, sand, or other debris. Lubricate items 8 and 9 in accordance with Appendix G as soon as possible.

(2) After operating in mud or sand,

300_image_1.png

use a low pressure water source to ensure that actuating lever (14) and spring (13) are thoroughly cleaned of mud, sand, or other debris. Lubricate item 14 in accordance with Appendix G as soon as possible.

3-14. Servicing Windshield Washer Reservoir

a. Check fluid level in washer reservoir (2). Check frequently under adverse weather conditions.

b. If fluid is required, refer to table 3-2.

Table 3-2. Cleaning Compound-to-Water Ratio

Temperature Range Cleaning Compound to Water
+15°F (-9°C) 1 to 2
+40° to -15°F (+4° to -26°C) 1 to 1
+40° to -65°F (+4° to -54°C) 2 to 1

c. If washer system does not work, check washer nozzles (1) to see if they are blocked with dirt and/or debris. Remove dirt and/or debris with fine wire.

d. Check hoses (3) for leaks or poor conditions.

301_image_0.png

3-15. Air Cleaner Servicing (Emergency Procedure)

a. General. Air cleaner service is required when the yellow air restriction indicator (6) reaches the red zone (5) of the gauge (4).

CAUTION Do not operate engine without air cleaner element. Damage to engine will result.

b. Filter Element Removal.

(1) Raise and secure hood (para. 3-8).

NOTE Perform step 3 for vehicles with new over-center clamp configuration only.

(2) Loosen clamp bolt (13) and remove clamp (7) and cover (8) from air cleaner assembly (11).

(3) Release over center-clamp (7) and remove clamp (7) and cover (8) from air cleaner assembly (11).

W A R N I N G

(3) Remove nut and washer assembly (9) securing filter element (10) to

302_image_0.png

stud (12) and pull filter element (10) from air cleaner assembly (11).

(4) Place cover (8) and clamp (7) back on air cleaner assembly (11) to prevent dirt and dust from entering air induction system while cleaning filter element (10).

Change 1 3 - 1 9 C. Air Filter Element Cleaning. Caution

Do not strike ends of filter element on hard surface, or damage to filter element may result.

(1) Hold filter element (1) so open end faces ground.

303_image_0.png ( 2 ) Gently tap completely around filter element (1) with hand to free trapped dirt.

D. Filter Element Installation.

(1) Remove clamp (2) and cover (3) from air cleaner assembly (5). (2) Position filter element (1) into air cleaner assembly (5) and secure element (1) to stud (6) with nut and washer assembly (4).

When clamp is secured to end of air cleaner ensure the clamp bolt is between the three and six o'clock positions to prevent damaging hood when hood is closed.

Perform step 4 for vehicles with new over-center clamp configuration only.

(3) Install cover (3) on end of air cleaner assembly (5) and position clamp (2) as shown. Tighten clamp bolt (7).

(4) Install cover (3) on air cleaner assembly (5) and secure with over-center clamp (2).

(5) Lower and secure hood (para. 3-8).

3-16. Air Cleaner Dump Valve Servicing

304_Image_0.Png

Air cleaner dump valve should be serviced after any operation through sand, mud, or water.

a. Raise and secure hood (para. 3-8). b. Squeeze dump valve (8) to clear any sand, mud, or water from air cleaner assembly (5).

c. For vehicles equipped with a deep water fording kit, loosen clamp (9) and

304_image_1.png

remove cap (10). Clean and install cap (10) and secure with clamp (9).

d. Lower and secure hood (para. 3-8).

Change 1 3 - 2 1

a. Raise and secure hood (para. 3-8).

Do not permit dirt, dust, or grit to enter engine oil dipstick tube. Internal engine damage will result if engine oil becomes contaminated.

· Engine oil level is checked with engine off.

· If oil level checks above 'FULL," it may be due to oil cooler drain back. Operate the engine for one minute, shut down, wait one minute, and recheck oil level.

· Vehicles equipped with deep fording kit will have a sealed dipstick.

b. Pull out dipstick (1) and check for proper oil level. Level should be at crosshatch marks (2) between "FULL" and "ADD 1 QT."

Do not overfill engine crankcase. Damage to engine will result.

c. If engine oil is low, remove oil filler cap (3) and add engine oil (Appendix G).

Install a non-vented filler cap only. An incorrect filler cap will not

305_image_0.png seal properly, causing water to enter and damage engine.

d. Replace oil filler cap (3), tighten securely, and wipe away any spilled oil. e. Lower and secure hood (para. 3-8).

3-18. Plastic Window Cleaning

306_Image_0.Png

Never clean plastic windows with abrasives. Repeated use of abrasives or failure to follow the instructions below will eventually cause damage to windows.

This paragraph provides instructions for cleaning soft top plastic windows and ballistic windshield and windows. This procedure is to be used on the inner plastic laminate surfaces of ballistic glass. Clean the outer surface of ballistic glass as you would plain glass.

A. Plastic Window Cleaning.

(1) Wash windows using soap and water and a soft, clean cloth. (2) Rinse with clean water. (3) Apply cream cleaner (appendix D, item 26) to plastic windows. (4) Wipe cream cleaner off with dry cloth. Cream cleaner improves visual clarity after cleaning with soap and water.

a.1. Plastic Window Cleaning - Fungus and Mold. (1) Wash windows using soap and water and a soft clean cloth. (2) Rinse with clean water. (3) Using a soft, clean cloth and isopropyl alcohol (Appendix D, Item 1.01), clean off fungus and mold.

(4) Wipe area with soft, clean cloth.

b. Ballistic Glass Cleaning.

Remove rings or other hard objects from hands before cleaning or polishing plastic surfaces. Do not use hard, dirty, or gritty cloths on plastic surfaces. Do not apply water, solvent, or polish unless the plastic is cool and is protected from the heating effects of sunlight. Failure to follow these instructions will cause damage to ballistic glass.

(1) Add detergent (appendix D, item 5) to a gallon of water. (2) Saturate a soft cloth with cleaning solution and lightly rub plastic surface. (3) Flush off cleaning solution with water and dry with a soft cloth. (4) Apply polish (appendix D, item 24) to plastic surface. Let dry, then wipe clean. Light scratches can be removed by vigorous rubbing, but care should be taken not to rub too long in one place.

3-19. Transmission Fluid Servicing

a. Raise and secure hood (para. 3-8).

b. Start engine (para. 2-10).

c. While depressing service brake pedal, move transmission shift lever through all operating ranges and "R" (reverse) before checking fluid level in "N" (neutral) with parking brake applied.

Do not permit dirt, dust, or grit to enter transmission oil dipstick tube. Internal transmission damage will result if transmission fluid becomes contaminated.

Vehicles equipped with deepwater fording kit will have a sealed dipstick.

d. Pull out dipstick (2) and check for proper transmission fluid level. At normal operating temperature, fluid level should be at crosshatch marks (3).

Caution

307_Image_1.Png

Do not overfill transmission. Damage to transmission will result.

e. If transmission fluid level is low, add fluid (appendix G) through fill pipe (1), insert dipstick (2), and wipe

307_image_0.png

away any spilled fluid.

f. Shut off engine (para. 2-12).

g. Lower and secure hood (para. 3-8).

3-24

3-20. Power Steering Fluid Servicing

a. Raise and secure hood (para. 3-8).

CAUTION Do not permit dirt, dust, or grit to enter power steering reservoir. Damage to power steering system will result if power steering fluid becomes contaminated.

b. Pull out cap/dipstick (5) and check steering fluid level. If engine is warm, level should be between "HOT" and "COLD" marks. If engine is cool, level should be between "ADD" and "COLD" marks. In either condition, fluid must be added if level reads below "ADD" mark.

Do not overfill power steering reservoir. Damage to power steering system will result.

spilled.

c. If fluid level is low, add fluid (appendix G) to power steering reservoir (4) and wipe away any fluid d. Install cap/dipstick (5).

308_image_0.png

e. Lower and secure hood (para. 3-8).

3-25

a. Shut off engine (para. 2-12).

Do not perform fuel system checks, inspection, or maintenance while smoking or near fire, flames, or sparks.

Fuel may ignite, causing damage to vehicle, and injury or death to personnel.

CAUTION Do not turn fuel cap handle more than necessary to remove or seal fuel cap. Fuel cap chain links may separate or become damaged.

b. Turn fuel cap handle (1) on fuel cap (2) counterclockwise and remove fuel cap (2).

To help prevent spills and overflows, pay close attention to the dispensing nozzle while refueling. Do not exceed a safe refueling rate. If fuel backup and spillage is being experienced, reduce flow rate. Also, when topping off the tank, a reduced flow rate should be used.

Caution

309_Image_0.Png

When refueling the vehicle, be careful that the nozzle does not slam into the filler pipe. Damage to the strainer may occur, allowing dirty fuel to clog up the filters.

c. Insert the fuel filler nozzle into the filler neck rubber cone, using caution not to puncture the fuel filler neck strainer. Dispense fuel into fuel tank.

3-26

d. If the fuel cap handle (1) is turned more than necessary to remove the fuel

310_image_0.png

cap (2), the fuel cap backing plate (3) may become jammed on the staked threads (4). Correct the problem by holding the backing plate (3) and turning the fuel cap handle (1) clockwise until the backing plate (3) turns freely.

e. When fueling operation is complete, install fuel cap (2) and turn fuel cap handle (1) clockwise to seal fuel cap (2).

3-22. Tire Chain Installation And Removal

Tire chains are only used when extra traction is required and must be used as an axle set. Any other combination may cause damage to the drivetrain.

A. Radial Tire Chain Installation.

(1) Spread out tire chain assembly (1) and line up with tire. (2) Cautiously move or drive vehicle over tire chain assembly (1) until wheel is positioned at either end of chain assembly (1), allowing tire chain assembly (1) to be draped up and over tire.

(3) Maneuver tire chain assembly (1) until cross-link sections are evenly spaced around tire. Secure one side of tire chain assembly (1) to tire by hooking inside fastener (2) to chain assembly (1). Tighten chain assembly (1) as much as possible.

(4) Repeat steps 1 through 3 above until all tire chain assemblies have been properly installed.

(5) Hook end fastener (3) to chain assembly (1) and secure with locking

311_image_0.png

retainer (4) to tighten chain assembly (1). Ensure as many chain links as possible lay between the sidewall head lugs (5) on both sides of tires.

(6) Move vehicle forward a few feet and retighten chain assembly (1) to remove any slack from where tire was resting on chain assembly (1). Secure loose chain linkage to chain assembly (1) with wire or other field expedient method.

3 - 2 8 Change 1

(7) After vehicle is driven one or two miles, stop and retighten tire chains.

Ensure as many chain links as possible lie between the sidewall head lugs (5) on both sides of the tires.

(8) After final tightening, secure loose chain linkage to chain assembly (1) with wire or other field expedient method.

(9) Occasionally check tire chains (1) during operations to ensure tire chains (1) have not slipped.

b. Radial Tire Chain Removal.

Remove tire chains from tires as soon as possible after leaving area requiring their use. Prolonged use of tire chains may damage drivetrain.

(1) Detach locking retainer (4) from end fastener (3) and unhook end fastener (3) from chain assembly (1).

(2) Unhook inside fastener (2) from chain assembly (1) and remove chain assembly (1) from tire.

(3) Drive vehicle off chain assembly (1). (4) Repeat operations listed in steps 1 through 3 above until all tire chain assemblies (1) have been removed from tires.

(5) Stow tire chain assemblies (1) under driver's seat.

312_image_0.png

C. Bias Ply Tire Chain Installation. Caution

Tire chains are only used when extra traction is required and must be used as an axle set. Any other combination may cause damage to the drivetrain.

(1) Install quick link (1) through cross-link connector (4) located on each side of tire chain assembly (5) between the third and fourth cross chains (3). Tighten nut (2).

(2) Spread out tire chain assembly (5) and line up with tire. (3) Cautiously move or drive vehicle over tire chain assembly (5) until wheel is positioned at either end of chain assembly (5), allowing tire chain assembly (5) to be draped up and over tire.

(4) Maneuver tire chain assembly (5) until cross-link sections are evenly spaced around tire. Secure one side of tire chain assembly (5) to tire by hooking inside fastener (6) to chain assembly (5). Tighten chain assembly (5) as much as possible.

(5) Repeat steps 2 through 4 above until all tire chain assemblies have been properly installed.

(6) Hook end fastener (7) to chain assembly (5) and secure with locking retainer (8) to tighten chain assembly (5). Ensure as many chain links as possible lay between the sidewall head lugs (9) on both sides of tires.

(7) Move vehicle forward a few feet and retighten chain assembly (5) to remove any slack from where tire was resting on chain assembly (5). Secure loose chain linkage to chain assembly (5) with wire or other field-expedient method.

(8) After vehicle is driven one or two miles, stop and retighten tire chains.

Ensure as many chain links as possible lay between the sidewall head lugs (9) on both sides of the tires.

(9) After final tightening, secure loose chain linkage to chain assembly (5)

313_image_0.png

with wire or other field-expedient method.

(10) Occasionally check tire chains (5) during operations to ensure tire chains (5) have not slipped.

3 - 2 8 . 2 Change 1

D. Bias Ply Tire Chain Removal. Caution

Remove tire chains from tires as soon as possible after leaving area requiring their use. Prolonged use of tire chains may damage drivetrain.

(1) Detach locking retainer (8) from end fastener (7) and unhook end fastener (7) from chain assembly (5).

(2) Unhook inside fastener (6) from chain assembly (5) and remove chain assembly (5) from tire.

(3) Drive vehicle off chain assembly (5). (4) Repeat steps 1 through 3 until all tire chain assemblies (5) have been removed from tires.

(5) Stow tire chain assemblies (5) under driver's seat.

314_image_0.png

314_image_1.png

Change 1 3 - 2 9

3-23. Emergency Fan Clutch Override

a. The radiator fan in M998 series vehicles normally activates when engine temperature exceeds 220°F (104°C) and deactivates when engine temperature drops to 190°F (88°C). If overheating occurs in an emergency situation, this procedure will ensure continuous fan operation.

b. Raise and secure hood (para. 3-8).

Stop engine (para. 2-12) prior to disconnecting time delay module.

c. Disconnect time delay module connector (1) from control valve connector (2).

315_image_0.png

d. Start engine (para. 2-10).

e. Check fan for continuous operation. If fan is not operating continuously, stop engine and notify unit maintenance.

f. Lower and secure hood (para. 3-10).

g. Allow engine to cool at idle until engine temperature lowers to normal operating temperature of 190°- 230°F (88°-110°C).

h. Proceed to unit maintenance with vehicle. Make certain unit maintenance is notified of emergency service performed on vehicle.

3-24. REARVIEW MIRROR ADJUSTMENT (FOR VEHICLE SERIAL NUMBER 99,999 AND BELOW) a. Raise and secure hood (para. 3-8).

b. Using screwdriver, loosen special nut (11) securing arm assembly (9) to rearview mirror bracket (4).

Right mirror must be adjusted for viewing through the windshield.

c. Adjust mirror head (7) and arm assembly (9) to proper position.

316_image_0.png

d. Tighten special nut (11) securing arm assembly (9) to rearview mirror bracket (4). Ensure rearview mirror bracket mounting capscrews (3) are secure.

e. If mirror head (7) will not hold adjustment, tighten screws (6).

f. If arm assembly (9) will not hold adjustment, tighten nut (10).

g. If mirror head shaft (5) will not hold adjustment, tighten nut (8). h. Lower and secure hood (para. 3-8).

3-25. Rearview Mirror Adjustment (For Vehicle Serial Number 100,000 And Above)

a. Left Mirror (Driver's Side). Loosen top nut (5) and position mirror

317_image_0.png

arm (7) forward of windshield frame (4) so that center line of mirror arm (7) is approximately 9-1/2 in. (24.1 cm) from vehicle (1). Tighten top nut (5). Adjust mirror head (6) for maximum visibility.

b. Right Mirror (Passenger's Side). Loosen top nut (5) and position mirror arm (3) forward of windshield frame (4) so that center line of mirror arm (3) is approximately 7-3/4 in. (19.7 cm) from vehicle (1). Tighten top nut (5). Adjust mirror head (2) for maximum visibility.

3 - 3 2 Change 1

3-26. Wheel Assembly Replacement

Check tire size designator on sidewall for tire construction identification: 36 x 12.50-16.5LT-Bias ply, 37 x 12.50R16.5LT- Radial.

A. Wheel Assembly Removal.

(1) Place jack (11) under lower control arm (12) next to wheel being

318_image_0.png

replaced. Center jack (11) squarely under point of contact.

(2) Loosen eight lug nuts (9), but do not remove. (3) Raise vehicle high enough to allow removal of wheel assembly (8). (4) Remove eight lug nuts (9) securing wheel assembly (8) to geared hub (10) and remove wheel assembly (8).

Change 3 3-33

B. Wheel Assembly Installation.

(1) Install wheel assembly (8) to geared hub (10) and secure with eight lug

319_image_0.png

nuts (9). Tighten lug nuts (9) to full engagement of wheel assembly (8) to geared hub (10).

(2) Slowly lower vehicle and remove jack (11). (3) Tighten eight lug nuts (9) in the sequence indicated. (4) Notify unit maintenance to tighten lug nuts (9) to proper torque as soon as possible.

3-27. Heating, Ventilation, And Air-Conditioning Air Intake Filter Service

A. M996 And M996A1 Filter Removal.

(1) Loosen seven captive wing head screws (2) securing panel (1) to body (3) and remove panel (1).

(2) Slide filter (4) out of mounting bracket (5) and remove filter (4).

b. M997, M997A1, and M997A2 Filter Removal. to panel (8). body (7) and remove panel (12). remove frame (17) and filter (16).

(1) Remove two capscrews (6), lockwashers (14), and washers (13) securing front cover panel (12) (2) Remove four screws (11), lockwashers (10), and washers (9) securing front cover panel (12) to (3) Remove two screws (18) securing frame (17) and filter (16) to air intake assembly (15) and

320_image_0.png

M996 AND M996A1 ONLY

M997,M997A1, AND M997A2 ONLY

320_image_1.png

c. Inspection. Inspect filters for tears, rips, contaminants, or other damage. Inspect filter frames for cracks, bends, or other damage. If filters or frames are damaged, notify unit maintenance.

d. M996 and M996A1 Filter Installation. (1) Slide filter (4) into mounting bracket (5). (2) Install cover panel (1) on body (3) with seven captive wing head screws (2).

e. M997, M997A1, and M997A2 Filter Installation. (1) Install filter (16) and frame (17) on air intake assembly (15) with two screws (18). (2) Install front cover panel (12) to body (7) and secure with four washers (9), lockwashers (10), and screws (11).

(3) Secure front cover panel (12) to panel (8) with two washers (13), lockwashers (14), and capscrews (6).

322_image_0.png

M997, M997A1, AND M997A2 ONLY

322_image_1.png

3-28. Ambulance Interior Light Bulb Replacement

a. General. Replacement bulbs are located in the storage compartment of the vehicle.

WARNING When changing light bulbs, ensure the system in which the bulb is being replaced is turned off. Failure to do so may cause injury.

Ceiling white light and blackout light assemblies are removed and installed basically the same. This procedure covers the ceiling white light assemblies.

b. Ceiling Light Bulb Removal. (1) Remove two screws (3) securing lens (4) to light assembly (2). Remove lens (4). (2) Press light bulb (5) into socket (1), twist counterclockwise, and remove light bulb (5).

c. Ceiling Light Bulb Installation. (1) Install light bulb (5) into socket (1), press in, and twist clockwise to secure. (2) Install lens (4) to light assembly (2) and secure with two screws (3).

d. Spotlight Bulb Removal.

M996, M996A1, M997, M997A1, and M997A2 vehicles spotlight bulb replacement is basically the same. This procedure covers M996 and M996A1 spotlight bulb replacement for M996 and M996A1 vehicles.

(1) Remove base (8) from wall socket (7). (2) Remove four screws (6) securing lens assembly (11) to base (8) and remove lens assembly (11). (3) Press light bulb (10) into socket (9), twist counterclockwise, and remove light bulb (10).

e. Spotlight Bulb Installation. (1) Install light bulb (10) into socket (9), press in, and twist clockwise to secure.

(2) Install base (8) on lens assembly (11) and secure with four screws (6).

(3) Install base (8) into wall socket (7).

f. Test Interior Lights Operation. Refer to para. 2-61.

324_image_0.png

324_image_1.png

3-29. Restraining Net Installation

Restraining Net Installation. (Models M966, M966A1, M1025, M1025A1, M1026, M1026A1, M1036, M1043, M1043A1, M1044, M1044A1, M1045, M1045A1, M1046, M1046A1, and M1121).

(1) Position restraining net (2) behind rear seats (1) and loop three

325_image_0.png

straps (3) through roof brackets (4). Do not tighten straps (3).

(2) Route three straps (5) on restraining net (2) through tiedowns (6) on cargo floor (7). Tighten straps (3) and (5).

3 - 4 0 Change 1

Appendix A References

A-1. Scope

This appendix lists all forms, field manuals, and technical manuals for use with this vehicle.

A-2. Department Of The Army Pamphlets

Consolidated Index of Army Publications and Blank Forms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DA Pam 25-30 The Army Maintenance Management System (TAMMS). . . . DA Pam 738-750

A-3. Forms

Recommended Changes to Publications and Blank Forms DA Form 2028
Recommended Changes to Equipment Technical
Publications DA Form 2028-2
Hand Receipt/Annex Number DA Form 2062
Exchange Tag DA Form 2402
Equipment Inspection and Maintenance Worksheet DA Form 2404
Equipment Inspection and Maintenance Worksheet
(Automated) DA Form 5988-E
Maintenance Request DA Form 2407
Maintenance Request (Automated) DA Form 5990-E
Preventive Maintenance Schedule and Record DD Form 314
Preventive Maintenance Schedule and Record (Automated) . DA Form 5986-E
Quality Deficiency Report SF 368
NBC Decontamination FM 3-5
Operation and Maintenance of Ordnance Materiel in
Cold Weather (0° to -65°F) FM 9-207
Vehicle Recovery Operations FM 20-22
First Aid for Soldiers FM 21-11
Manual for the Wheeled Vehicle Driver FM 21-305
Browning Machinegun Caliber .50 HB, M2 FM 23-65
Machinegun 7.62, M60 FM 23-67
Basic Cold Weather Manual FM 31-70
Northern Op eration FM 31-71
Army Motor Transport Units and Operations FM 55-30

A-4. Field Manuals

Desert Operations FM 90-3
Jungle Operations FM 90-5
Mountain Operations FM 90-6

A-5. Technical Manuals

Machine gun, Caliber .50 Browning, M2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TM 9-1005-213-10 Machine gun, 7.62 MM, M60 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TM 9-1005-224-10 TOWWeapon System, Guided Missile System, Operator and Organizational Maintenance Manual. . . . . TM 9-1425-472-12 TOW 2 Weapon System, Guided Missile System Operator and Organizational Maintenance Manual. . . . . TM 9-1425-450-12 Materials used for Cleaning, Preserving, Abrading, and Cementing Ordnance Materiel and Related Material (Including Chemicals) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TM 9-247 Operator's, Unit, Direct Support and General Support Maintenance Manual for Care, Maintenance, Repair, and Inspection of Pneumatic Tires and Inner Tubes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TM 9-2610-200-14 Operator's Organizational, Direct Support and General Support Maintenance Manual for Lead-Acid Storage Batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TM 9-6140-200-14

A-6. Technical Bulletins

Security of Tactical Wheeled Vehicles. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TB 9-2300-422-20 Equipment Improvement Report and Maintenance Digest . . . . TB 43-0001-62 Use of Antifreeze Solutions, Antifreeze Extender, and Cleaning Compounds Test Kit in Engine Cooling Systems. . . . . TB 750-651

A-7. Miscellaneous Publications

Hand Receipt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TM 9-2320-280-10-HR

The Army Integrated Publishing and Printing Program AR 25-30
Dictionary of United States Army Terms AR 310-25
Prevention of Motor Vehicle Accidents AR 385-55
Army Materiel Policy and Retail Maintenance Operation AR 750-1
Expendable/Durable Items

A-8. Army Regulations

(Except: Medical, Class V, Repair Parts, and Heraldic Items) . . . CTA 50-970

Appendix B Components Of End Item And Basic Issue Items Lists

Section I. INTRODUCTION

B-1. Scope

This appendix lists components of end item and basic issue items for M998 series vehicles to help you inventory items required for safe and efficient operation.

B-2. General

The Components of End Item and Basic Issue Items Lists are divided into the following sections: a. Section II. Components of End Item. This listing is for informational purposes only and is not authority to requisition replacements. These items are part of the end item, but are removed and separately packaged for transportation or shipment. As part of the end item, these items must be with the end item whenever it is issued or transferred between property accounts. Illustrations are furnished to assist in identifying the items.

b. Section III. Basic Issue Items (BII). These are the minimum essential items required to place M998 series vehicles in operation, to operate them, and to perform emergency repairs. Although shipped separately packaged, BII must be with the vehicle during operation and whenever it is transferred between property accounts. The illustrations will assist you with hard-to-identify items. This manual is the authority to request/requisition replacement BII, based on TOE/MTOE authorization of the end item.

B-3. Explanation Of Columns

The following provides an explanation of columns found in the tabular listings: a. Column (1) - Illustration Number (Illus Number). This column indicates the number of the illustration in which the item is shown.

b. Column (2) - National Stock Number. Indicates the National Stock Number assigned to the item and will be used for requisitioning purposes.

c. Column (3) - Description. Indicates the Federal item name and, if required, a minimum description to identify the item. The last line for each item indicates the CAGEC (in parentheses) followed by the part number. If item needed differs for different models of this vehicle, the model is shown under the "Usable On Code" heading in this column. These codes are identified as:

Code Used On Code Used On
(Blank) All H18/B18 M1026/M1026A1
HVY/AVY/BVY M1097/M1097A1/M1097A2 H20/A20/B20 M1035/M1035A1/M1035A2
H11/A11 M966/M966A1 H21 M1037
H12 M1036 H24/A24/B24 M1045/M1045A1/M1045A2
H13/A13 M998/M998A1 H25/A25/B25 M1043/M1043A1/M1043A2
H14/A14 M1038/M1038A1 H26/A26 M1044/M1044A1
H15/A15/B15 M997/M997A1/M997A2 H27/A27 M1046/M1046A1
H16/B16 M996/M996A1 H28 M1042
H17/B17/C17 M1025/M1025A1/M1025A2 MMM M1121
NNN M1123

d. Column (4) - Unit of Issue (U/I). Indicates a determinate amount or quantity of an item that will be issued. This unit is expressed by a two-character alphabetical abbreviation; i.e., (ea, pr).

e. Column (5) - Quantity Required (Qty rqr). Indicates the quantity of the item authorized to be used with/on the vehicle.

Section Ii. Components Of End Item

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
Illus National Stock Description Usable Qty
Number Number CAGEC and Part Number On Code U/I rqr
1 3120-01-188-5082 BEARING, SLEEVE: A25, A26, EA 1
Pintle Adapter B17, B18
(located in the armament H17, H18
mounting assembly) H25, H26
(19207) 12340310
5305-01-204-4190 a. Setscrew 3/8 - 24 EA 4
(7X677) 9428747
b. Pintle Adapter EA 1
(19207) 12340310-1
a
~
b

These items are installed in the vehicle at the time of manufacture or rebuild.

B-2 Change 3

Section III. BASIC ISSUE ITEMS

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
Illus National Stock Description Usable Qty
Number Number CAGEC and Part Number On Code U/I rqr
1 TM 9-2320-280-10 EA 1
(in cotton duck pamphlet bag)
TM 9-2320-280-10-HR EA 1
(in cotton duck pamphlet bag)
(not used by Marine Corps).
2 3040-00-392-2962 ADAPTER, HOUSING: filter unit EA
inlet [in NBC stowage compart H15, 4
ment] [in front of right litter A15,
rack] B15,
(81361) C5-66-232 H16, 2
B16
3 2540-00-670-2459 BAG, ASSEMBLY, EA 1
PAMPHLET: cotton duck, 3 in. x
9-1/4 in. x 11-1/4 in. [under dri
ver's seat]
(19207) 11676920
4 5140-00-772-4142 BAG, TOOL, ENVELOPE TYPE: EA 1
10 in. x 20 in., w/ flap
[on H21 and H28, item is stored
behind driver's seat; on all other
vehicles, the item is stored under
the driver's seat]
(81349) MIL-B-43648-4

330_image_0.png

Change 3 B-3

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
Illus National Stock Description Usable Qty
Number Number CAGEC and Part Number On Code U/I rqr
*5 7510-00-889-3494 BINDER, LOOSE-LEAF: EA 1
equipment log book, 6-7/20 in. x
9-1/2 in. [in pamphlet bag]
(19207) 11677003
*6 4210-01-149-1356 FIRE EXTINGUISHER: hand, All EA 1
type 1, class 2, 5 lb. capacity, except
w/bracket [mounting location per "A2" and
unit commander discretion] NNN
(for bracket only, notify unit vehicles
maintenance) (19207) 12255633-1
*7 4210-01-481-3875 FIRE EXTINGUISHER: hand, "A2" and EA 1
type 1, class 2, size 5 [mounting NNN
location per unit commander vehicles
discretion] (54905) 14091
*8 6545-00-922-1200 FIRST-AID KIT, GENERAL PURPOSE: EA 1
3 in. x 5-13/16 in. x 8-7/32 in.
[under driver's seat]
(19207) 11677011

Section III. BASIC ISSUE ITEMS (Cont'd)

331_image_0.png

B-4 Change 3

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
Illus National Stock Description Usable Qty
Number Number CAGEC and Part Number On Code U/I rqr
*9 7510-01-065-0166 FOLDER, EQUIPMENT RECORD: EA 1
2-1/2 in. x 8 in. x 10 in. [in pamphlet bag]
(72094) 43986-1
10 5120-01-032-6042 HANDLE, JACK: 58-1/4 in. long All EA 1
(nom), folding type, OD finish [on except
four-door vehicles, items are NNN,
stored under rear seat; on two HVY,
door vehicles, items are stored "A1" and
under driver's and/or comman "A2"
der's seat] vehicles
(19207) 12255298
9 10

Section III. BASIC ISSUE ITEMS (Cont'd)

332_image_0.png

Change 3 B-5

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
Description Illus National Stock Usable Qty
CAGEC and Part Number Number Number On Code U/I rqr
11 HOSE, AIR BREATHING: 6 ft EA
[in NBC stowage compartment] H15, 6
[in front of right litter rack] A15,
consists of: B15,
H16, 4
B16
a. Hose, 6 ft 4720-00-279-0093
(81361) C5-19-916-2
b. Clamp, hose (2 ea) 4720-00-269-3760
(96906) MS22064-5
c. Coupling half, quick 4730-01-138-7152
(84987) 6209-047
d. Connector, orifice 4240-00-977-8503
(81361) C5-19-1830
11
a
b

333_image_0.png

Section III. BASIC ISSUE ITEMS (Cont'd) B-6 Change 3

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
Illus National Stock Description Usable Qty
Number Number CAGEC and Part Number On Code U/I rqr
12 HOSE, AIR BREATHING: 9 ft EA
[in NBC stowage compartment] H15, 1
[in front of right litter rack] A15,
consists of: B15,
H16, 1
B16
4720-00-279-0094 a. Hose, 9 ft
(81361) C5-19-916-3
4720-00-269-3760 b. Clamp, hose (2 ea)
(96906) MS22064-5
4730-01-138-7152 c. Coupling half, quick
(84987) 6209-047
4240-00-977-8503 d. Connector, orifice
(81361) C5-19-1830
12
a
b
c

Section III. BASIC ISSUE ITEMS (Cont'd)

334_image_0.png

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
Illus National Stock Description Usable Qty
Number Number CAGEC and Part Number On Code U/I rqr
13 5120-00-106-7598 JACK, SCISSORS, HAND: All EA 1
mechanical, 2-ton cap., 2-1/4 in. except
closed to 18-1/2 in. (max) open, NNN,
OD finish [on four-door vehi HVY,
cles, items are stored under "A1" and
rear seat; on two-door vehicles, "A2"
items are stored under driver's vehicles
and/or commander's seat]
(19207) 11640481

335_image_0.png

14 5120-01-375-0070 JACK, SCISSORS, HAND: mechanical, 3.5-ton cap., 6.33 in. closed to 18.70 in. NNN, HVY, "A1" and
(max) open, OD finish [stored "A2"
on right splash shield in jack stowage box] vehicles
(34623) 5939822
5120-01-430-3123 a. Jack, scissors
(19207) 12447042
5120-01-429-6964 b. Wrench, ratchet
(19207) 12447039
5120-01-429-6065 c. Extension, jack handle
(19207) 12447040

Section III. BASIC ISSUE ITEMS (Cont'd)

B-8 Change 3

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
Illus National Stock Description Usable Qty
Number Number CAGEC and Part Number On Code U/I rqr
5120-01-429-8137 d. Handle, jack NNN,
(19207) 12447041 HVY,
5140-01-429-6945 e. Bag, stowage "A1" and "A2"
(19207) 12447043 vehicles

Section III. BASIC ISSUE ITEMS (Cont'd)

336_image_0.png

Change 3 B-9

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
Illus National Stock Description Usable Qty
Number Number CAGEC and Part Number On Code U/I rqr
16 4240-00-763-2464 MASK: head pieces gas, patient EA
protective [in NBC stowage com H15, 4
partment] [in front right litter A15,
16 rack] (81361) D5-70-23 B15, H16, 2
B16
17 5120-01-416-8568 MAX TOOL KIT: (previous tool NNN EA 1
kit was Pioneer) (For the USMC, and
all HMMWV A2s require the Max serial
Tool Kit.) combination tool, hand multipurpose [M1025A2, numbers 189192
M1043A2, and M1045A2 - behind and up,
left rear seat; M1035A2, for "A2"
M1097A2, and M1123 - on vehicles
tunnel; M997A2 - in right only
footwell]
(19207) 57K3528
5140-01-416-8569 a. Carrying case
(0T9K4) 595-030
5110-01-416-7827 b. Ax
(0T9K4) 595-010
5110-01-416-7830 c. Ax sheath
(0T9K4) 595-020
5120-01-416-8570 d. Shovel attachment
(0T9K4) 595-040
5120-01-416-8571 e. Mattock attachment
(0T9K4) 595-050
5120-01-416-8573 f. Pick attachment
(0T9K4) 595-060

Section III. BASIC ISSUE ITEMS (Cont'd)

B-10 Change 3

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
Illus National Stock Description Usable Qty
Number Number CAGEC and Part Number On Code U/I rqr
5120-01-416-8572 g. Broad pick attachment
(0T9K4) 595-070
5120-01-416-8577 h. Rake-hoe attachment
(0T9K4) (595-080)
5120-01-416-8574 i. Rake-hoe fastener
(0T9K4) 595-090
5120-01-416-8575 j. Safety locking pins
(0T9K4) 595-999
17

Section III. BASIC ISSUE ITEMS (Cont'd)

338_image_0.png

Change 3 B-11

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
Illus National Stock Description Usable Qty
Number Number CAGEC and Part Number On Code U/I rqr
18 PIONEER TOOL KIT: For all
(on bumper storage hooks) vehicles
up to
serial
number
189191
and for
all basic
and "A1"
vehicles
EA 1
5110-00-293-2336 a. Single bit ax:
(19207) 6150925
5120-00-288-6574 b. Mattock-pick handle: EA 1
(19207) 11677021
5120-00-243-2395 c. Mattock: EA 1
(19207) 11677022
5120-00-293-3336 d. Hand shovel: EA 1
(19207) 11655784
18

Section III. BASIC ISSUE ITEMS (Cont'd)

339_image_0.png

B-12 Change 3

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
Illus National Stock Description Usable Qty
Number Number CAGEC and Part Number On Code U/I rqr
EA 1
19 5120-00-223-7397 PLIERS, SLIP JOINT: combina
tion, slip joint, straight nose w/ cut
ter, 8 in. long, phosphate finish [in
tool bag]
20 5120-00-234-8913
Phillips type, plastic handle, point
no. 2, 7-1/2 in. long [in tool bag]
(19207) 11655777-12
EA 1
21 5120-00-227-7356 SCREWDRIVER, FLAT TIP: flared
sides, plastic handle, round blade,
7-3/4 in. long
SCREWDRIVER, CROSS TIP:
(19207) 11655775-3
EA 1
3/16 in. wide tip,
(55719) SSDE-66

Section III. BASIC ISSUE ITEMS (Cont'd)

340_image_0.png

Change 3 B-13

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
Illus National Stock Description Usable Qty
Number Number CAGEC and Part Number On Code U/I rqr
22 4910-01-313-8839 SPREADER BAR ASSEMBLY: H15, EA 1
rigging for airlift [below right A15,
lower litter rack] B15,
(19207) 12342102 H16,
B16
23 5120-00-240-5328 WRENCH, ADJUSTABLE: EA 1
open end, 8 in. long [in tool bag]
(34623) MS15461-3
24 5120-01-156-7296 WRENCH, WHEEL LUG: EA 1
1-15/32 - 1-19/64 in.
socket dia., 1-3/16 in. socket
depth, 17-1/2 in. long [on four
door vehicles, item is stored
under rear seat; on two door
vehicles, item is stored under
driver's and/or commander's seat]
(11862) 14009303

Section III. BASIC ISSUE ITEMS (Cont'd)

341_image_0.png

B-14 Change 3

Appendix C Additional Authorization List

Section I. INTRODUCTION C-1. SCOPE This appendix lists additional items authorized for support of M998 series vehicles.

C-2. General

This list identifies items that do not have to accompany the vehicle and do not have to be turned in with it. These items are all authorized to you by CTA, MTOE, TDA, or JTA.

C-3. Explanation Of Listing

National stock numbers, descriptions, and quantities are provided to help you identify and request the additional items you require to support this vehicle. The items are listed in alphabetical sequence by item name. If item required differs for different models of this equipment, the model is shown under the "Usable On Code" heading in the description column. These codes are identified as:

Code Used On Code Used On
(Blank) All H18/B18 M1026/M1026A1
HVY/AVY/BVY M1097/M1097A1/M1097A2 H20/A20/B20 M1035/M1035A1/M1035A2
H11/A11 M966/M966A1 H21 M1037
H12 M1036 H24/A24/B24 M1045/M1045A1/M1045A2
H13/A13 M998/M998A1 H25/A25/B25 M1043/M1043A1/M1043A2
H14/A14 M1038/M1038A1 H26/A26 M1044/M1044A1
H15/A15/B15 M997/M997A1/M997A2 H27/A27 M1046/M1046A1
H16/B16 M996/M996A1 H28 M1042
H17/B17/C17 M1025/M1025A1/M1025A2 MMM M1121
NNN M1123
(1) (2) (3) (4)
NATIONAL DESCRIPTION
STOCK QTY
NUMBER CAGEC AND PART NUMBER USABLE ON CODE U/I AUTH
6665-00-935-6955 ALARM: chemical agent, M8 EA 1
(81361) C5-15-8803
2540-00-670-2459 BAG: pamphlet, cotton duck, EA 1
3 in. x 9-1/4 in. x 11-1/4 in.,
optional use for first-aid kit
(19207) 11676920
2510-01-276-9249 BAR: suspension, tiedown, [in H21, H28, EA 2
tool bag behind driver's seat] HVY, AVY,
(34623) 5598373 BVY
2540-00-678-3469 BLOCK: chock EA 2
(96906) MS52127-3
3940-00-151-6769 BLOCK: tackle H12, H14, A14, EA 1
(19207) 11676932 H18, B18, H26,
A26, H27, A27, H28
2510-01-050-9770 BRACKET: support, decontamination EA 1
apparatus (19207) 11644841
2540-01-276-9250 BRACKET: suspension tiedown H21, H28, EA 2
[in tool bag behind driver's door] HVY, AVY,
(34623) 5598408 BVY
2590-00-473-6331 BRACKET: water/gasoline can EA 2
(96906) MS53052-1
2590-01-222-7946 CABLE, NATO SLAVE: AY 1
intervehicular power cable,
12 ft long (19207) 11682379-4
7240-00-089-3827 CAN: water, military, plastic, 5 gal. EA 1
(81349) MIL-C-43613
4240-00-368-6361 CARRIER, HEADPIECE: hospital protector EA
assembly (81361) D5-4-1002 H15, A15, 4
B15
H16, B16 2

Section II. ADDITIONAL AUTHORIZATION LIST

(1) (2) (3) (4)
NATIONAL DESCRIPTION
STOCK QTY
NUMBER CAGEC AND PART NUMBER USABLE ON CODE U/I AUTH
2540-01-214-1264 CHAIN: tire, 9/32 side x SET 2
1/4 cross link
(34623) 5569255
4010-00-443-4845 CHAIN: tow, 9/32 side x EA 1
12 ft long (34623) 10944642-5
4230-01-133-4124 DECONTAMINATION APPARATUS: EA 1
M-13 (81361) E5-51-527
4230-00-720-1618 DECONTAMINATION APPARATUS: EA 1
portable, DS-2, 1-1/2 UT, ABC-M11
w/bracket (81361) D5-51-269
6230-00-163-1856 FLASHLIGHT: 2 x 3-1/2, GFST x 8 in. EA 1
(82214) 1259
5920-01-085-0825 FUSE, ENCLOSED LINK H15, H16 EA 1
(75915) 257020
4910-00-204-3170 GAGE: tire pressure EA 1
(19207) 7081758
5120-00-198-5390 KEY, MACHINE: differential fillplug EA 1
(58536) A-A-2473
5315-00-732-1019 KEY, MACHINE: geared hub oil drainplug, EA 1
straight bar key, 1/2 in. square, 2-1/2 in. long
(96906) MS20066-543
6530-00-783-7905 LITTER: folding H15, A15, B15 EA 4
(90142) 51L1976 H16, B16, EA 2
H20, A20, B20
MASK, CHEMICAL, BIOLOGICAL: EA 1
4240-00-994-8751 M25A1 mask, small size
4240-00-994-8750 M25A1 mask, medium size
4240-00-994-8752 M25A1 mask, large size H15, A15, B15 4
H16, B16 2
5340-00-158-3805 PADLOCK SET: EA 1
(96906) MS35647-10
5820-00-223-7473 RADIO SET: 9 x 14 x 16 in. EA 1
(80058) AN/GRC-160
5120-00-222-8852 SCREWDRIVER: flat tip, flared EA 1
sides, plastic handle, round blade,
1/4 in. wide tip (80063) SCC539502-2

Section II. ADDITIONAL AUTHORIZATION LIST (Cont'd)

(1) (2) (3) (4)
NATIONAL STOCK DESCRIPTION QTY
NUMBER CAGEC AND PART NUMBER USABLE ON CODE U/I AUTH
7240-00-177-6154 SPOUT: can, gas, flexible with filter EA 1
screen, 16 in. long
(19207) 11677020
2610-01-171-4746 TIRE: pneumatic, bias, nylon EA 1
breaker, 36 x 12.50 x 16.50 (81348)
ZZT-381/36-12.50-16.5/C/G2A/LTTR
2610-01-333-7632 TIRE: radial, 37 x 12.50R16.5LT EA 1
(73842) 5935336
9905-00-148-9546 TRIANGLES: folding, reflective SET 1
(81348) RR-W-1817
1005-00-322-9716 TRIPOD MOUNT: w/cover, H17, B17, C17, EA 1
M3, mach. gun H18, B18
(19204) 8403398
5340-01-277-2460 TURNBUCKLE ASSY: H21, H28, EA 2
suspension tiedown HVY, AVY,
(34623) 5598406 BVY
WHEEL AND RUNFLAT, BIAS: All except EA 1
(41885) 89305 HVY, "A1", "A2"
vehicles
WHEEL AND RUNFLAT, RADIAL: EA 1
3,850 lb.
(19207) 12460176
WHEEL AND RUNFLAT, RADIAL: All except EA 1
3,400 lb. "A2"
(19207) 12342641 vehicles
5120-01-279-4788 WRENCH: open end, H21, H28 EA 1
1-1/8 x 18 in. long HVY, AVY, BVY
(34623) 5598407

Section II. ADDITIONAL AUTHORIZATION LIST (Cont'd)

(1) (2) (3) (4)
NATIONAL STOCK DESCRIPTION QTY
NUMBER CAGEC AND PART NUMBER USABLE ON CODE U/I AUTH
THE FOLLOWING ITEMS ARE ADDED
AAL FOR MARINE CORPS USE ONLY
7510-00-889-3494 BINDER, LOOSE-LEAF: equipment log EA 1
book, 6-7/20 in. x 9-1/2 in.
(19207) 11677003
4210-01-149-1356 FIRE EXTINQUISHER: EA 1
hand, type 1, class 2, All except
5 lb capacity, w/bracket M1123 and
(19207) 12255633-1 "A2" vehicles
FIRE EXTINQUISHER: M1123 and EA 1
hand, type 1, class 2, size 5 "A2" vehicles
(19207) 12460466
6545-00-922-1200 FIRST-AID KIT, GENERAL PURPOSE: 3 in. x 5-13/16 in. x 8-7/32 in. EA 1
(19207) 11677011
7510-01-065-0166 FOLDER, EQUIP RECORD:
2-1/2 in. x 8 in. x 10 in. EA 1
(72094) 43986-1
5120-00-926-5175 BRUSH, WIRE, BATTERY: steel
(50888) AGH3024 EA 1
7240-01-337-5269 CAN, GASOLINE, MILITARY:
fuel, plastic, 5 gal EA 1
(81349) MIL-C-53109 Type 1
0000-00-000-9304 FOLDER, NAVMC-696D
EA 1
4390-00-266-9182 OILER, HAND: steel, 8 oz. capacity
(96906) MS15764-1 EA 1
5120-00-611-7525 TERMINAL CLAMP SPREADER, REAMER,
AND POST: steel, 7-1/2 in. long EA 1
(70786) 20-C
7920-00-269-1259 BRUSH, WIRE, SCRATCH: steel bristles
(76861) 387-SS EA 1

Section II. ADDITIONAL AUTHORIZATION LIST (Cont'd)

(1) (2) (3) (4)
NATIONAL STOCK DESCRIPTION QTY
NUMBER CAGEC AND PART NUMBER USABLE ON CODE U/I AUTH
5120-00-944-4268 PULLER, BATTERY TERMINAL: spring EA 1
loaded steel jaws
(70786) 21
5120-00-234-8912 SCREWDRIVER, CROSS TIP: EA 1
plastic handle, size 3 tip
(21340) 125570
5120-00-227-7338 SCREWDRIVER, FLAT TIP: EA 1
flared side, ½ in. tip width
(77948) D339
5120-00-895-9569 WRENCH, BOX AND OPEN END, EA 1
COMBINATION:
steel, 0.500 in. 12-point wrenching ends
[part of combination wrench set
(80244) 5120-00-895-9566]
5120-00-895-9570 WRENCH, BOX AND OPEN END, EA 1
COMBINATION:
steel, 0.562 in. 12-point wrenching ends
[part of combination wrench set
(80244) 5120-00-895-9566]
5120-01-054-7130 WRENCH, BOX AND OPEN END, EA 1
COMBINATION: steel, 12 mm hex and oval
(93389) 1212M
5120-01-045-4906 WRENCH, BOX AND OPEN END, EA 1
COMBINATION:
steel, 12 mm oval and 12-point
(55719) GOEXM12
5120-01-054-7131 WRENCH, BOX AND OPEN END, EA 1
COMBINATION:
steel, 13 mm oval and 12-point
(15526) 600-13 mm x 13 mm
5120-01-054-7132 WRENCH, OPEN END, COMBINATION: EA 1
steel, 14 mm oval and 12-point
(15526) 600-14 mm x 14 mm

Section II. ADDITIONAL AUTHORIZATION LIST (Cont'd)

Appendix D Expendable/Durable Supplies And Materials Ust Section I. Introduction

D-1. Scope

This appendix lists expendable/durable supplies and materials you will need to operate and maintain M998 series vehicles. These items are authorized to you by CTA 50-970, Expendable Items (except Medical, Class V, Repair Parts, and Heraldic Items.)

D-2. Explanation Of Columns

a. Column (1) - Item Number. This number is assigned to each entry in the listing. b. Column (2) - Level. This column identifies the lowest level of maintenance that requires the listed item: C - Operator/Crew c. Column (3) - National Stock Number. This is the National stock number assigned to the item; use it to request or requisition the item.

d. Column (4) - Description. Indicates the Federal item name and, if required, a description to identify the item. The last line for each item listing indicates the Commercial and Government Entity Code (CAGEC) in parenthesis followed by the part number.

e. Column (5) - Unit of Measure (U/M ). Indicates the measure used in performing the actual maintenance function. This measure is expressed by an alphabetical abbreviation (QT, GAL.). If the unit of measure differs from the unit of issue, requisition the lowest unit of issue that will satisfy your requirements.

MATERIALS LIST
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
ITEM NATIONAL STOCK
NUMBER LEVEL NUMBER DESCRIPTION U/M
1 C ADHESIVE: silicone rubber
(81349) MIL-A-46106
8040-01-010-8758 1 Kit KT
1.1 C ALCOHOL, ISOPROPYL EA
6810-01-205-7039 (61757) MDC00395-1243-16
1.2 C ANTIFREEZE: arctic-type
(81349) MIL-A-11755
6850-00-174-1806 55 Gallon Drum GAL.
2 C ANTIFREEZE: ethylene glycol,
inhibited, heavy duty, single
package (81349) MIL-A-46153
6850-00-181-7929 1 Gallon Container GAL.
6850-00-181-7933 5 Gallon Container GAL.
6850-00-181-7940 55 Gallon Drum GAL.
3 C CLEANING COMPOUND:
windshield washer
(81348) O-C-1901
6850-00-926-2275 1 Pint PT
4 C DETERGENT: general purpose
(74188) ORVUS WA PASTE
7930-01-107-6997 Container N/A
5 C DETERGENT: general purpose,
liquid (81349) MIL-D-16791
7930-00-282-9699 1 Gallon Container GAL.
5.1 C DETERGENT: laundry
(81348) P-D-245
7830-00-985-6904 20 Oz. Box OZ

Section II. EXPENDABLE/DURABLE SUPPLIES AND Section II. EXPENDABLE/DURABLE SUPPLIES AND MATERIALS LIST (Cont'd)

(1) (2) (3) NATIONAL (4) (5)
ITEM NUMBER LEVEL STOCK NUMBER DESCRIPTION U/M
6 C DRYCLEANING SOLVENT:
(81348) SD-3
6850-00-110-4498 1 Pint Can PT
6850-00-274-5421 5 Gallon Drum GAL.
6850-00-285-8011 55 Gallon Drum GAL.
6850-00-637-6135 Bulk GAL.
7 C FUEL OIL: diesel, regular,
DF-2 (81348) VV-F-800
9140-00-286-5296 55 Gallon Drum GAL.
9140-00-286-5294 Bulk GAL.
8 C FUEL OIL: diesel, winter,
DF-1 (81348) VV-F-800
9140-00-286-5288 55 Gallon Drum GAL.
9140-00-286-5286 Bulk GAL.
9 C FUEL OIL: diesel, arctic,
DF-A (81348) VV-F-800
9140-00-286-5284 55 Gallon Drum GAL.
9140-00-286-5283 Bulk GAL.
9.1 C 9130-01-031-5816 TURBINE FUEL: aviation, JP8 GAL.
(81349) MILT83133GRJP8
10 C GREASE: automotive and
artillery (81349) MIL-G-10924
9150-00-935-1017 14 Ounce Cartridge OZ
9150-00-190-0904 1-3/4 Pound Can LB
9150-00-190-0905 6-1/2 Pound Can LB
10.1 C GREASE: molybdenum
(30719) LS2267
9150-01-015-1542 14.5 Ounce Cartridge OZ
10.2 C GREASE, wire rope:
9150-00-530-6814 exposed gear (81349) MIL-G-18458 CN

Change 3 D-3

MATERIALS LIST (Cont'd)
(1) (2) (3) NATIONAL (4) (5)
ITEM STOCK
NUMBER LEVEL NUMBER DESCRIPTION U/M
11 C HAND CLEANER
(19410) PAXSOLV16
8520-00-082-2146 Container, 1 Pound LB
12 C HYDRAULIC FLUID: trans
mission (24617) Dexron® II
9150-00-698-2382 1 Quart Can QT
9150-00-657-4959 5 Gallon Can GAL.
13 C HYDRAULIC FLUID: trans
mission (24617) Dexron® III
9150-01-353-4799 1 Quart (plastic) Can QT
9150-01-114-9968 55 Gallon Drum GAL.
14 Deleted
15 Deleted
16 Deleted
17 C LUBRICATING OIL: gear,
multipurpose, GO 75
(81349) MIL-L 2105
9150-01-035-5390 1 Quart Can QT
9150-01-035-5391 5 Gallon Drum GAL.
18 C LUBRICATING OIL: gear,
multipurpose, GO 80/90
(81349) MIL-L-2105
9150-01-035-5392 1 Quart Can QT
9150-01-035-5393 5 Gallon Drum GAL.
19 C LUBRICATING OIL: general
purpose, preservative, PL-S
(81348) VV-L-800
9150-00-231-6689 1 Quart Can QT

Section II. EXPENDABLE/DURABLE SUPPLIES AND Section II. EXPENDABLE/DURABLE SUPPLIES AND

MATERIALS LIST (Cont'd)
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
ITEM NATIONAL STOCK
NUMBER LEVEL NUMBER DESCRIPTION U/M
20 C LUBRICATING OIL: internal
combustion engine, arctic, OEA
(81349) MIL-L-46167
9150-00-402-4478 1 Quart Can QT
9150-00-402-2372 5 Gallon Drum GAL.
9150-00-491-7197 55 Gallon Drum GAL.
21 C LUBRICATING OIL:
internal combustion engine,
tactical service, OE/HDO 10
(81349) MIL-L-2104
9150-00-189-6727 1 Quart Can QT
9150-00-186-6668 5 Gallon Drum GAL.
9150-00-191-2772 55 Gallon Drum GAL.
22 C LUBRICATING OIL:
internal combustion engine,
tactical service, OE/HDO 30
(81349) MIL-L-2104
9150-00-186-6681 1 Quart Can QT
9150-00-188-9858 5 Gallon Drum GAL.
9150-00-189-6729 55 Gallon Drum GAL.
23 C LUBRICATING OIL: internal
combustion engine, tactical
service, OE/HDO 15/40
(81349) MIL-L-2104
9150-01-152-4117 1 Quart Can QT
9150-01-152-4118 5 Gallon Drum GAL.
9150-01-152-4119 55 Gallon Drum GAL.
MATERIALS LIST (Cont'd)
(1) (2) (3) NATIONAL (4) (5)
ITEM STOCK
NUMBER LEVEL NUMBER DESCRIPTION U/M
24 C 7930-00-935-3794 POLISH: plastic,
liquid, removable
(80244) P-P-560, Type I
7930-00-634-5340 1 Pint Container PT
25 C RAG: wiping, cotton and
cotton-synthetic
(58536) A-A-531
7920-00-205-1711 50 Pound Bale LB
26 C CREAM CLEANER: plastic,
liquid
8520-00-262-7177 1 Pint Container PT
27 C DISTILLED WATER:
6810-00-682-6867 1 Gallon Container GAL.
6810-00-356-4936 5 Gallon Container GAL.
28 C LUBRICANT: solid film
(8F024) Perm-slik RAC
9150-01-380-4470 11 ounce can, aerosol (P0329) OZ
29 C LUBRICANT: interlock
(96980) Zipperease
9150-00-999-7548 1 Box OZ

Section II. EXPENDABLE/DURABLE SUPPLIES AND

Ign Guide Iwage /

E-1. Scope

This appendix shows the location for stowage of equipment and material required to be carried on M998, A1, A2 series, and M1123 vehicles.

1

E-2. General

The equipment stowage locator is designed to help inventory items required for safe and efficient operation. This equipment locator is representative of BII and applicable AAL stowage on M998, A1, A2 series, and M1123 vehicles. Refer to appendix F for specific deviations from this equipment locator for other vehicles and to para. 2-2 for additional information concerning stowage of equipment.

E-3. Stowage Locations

Applicable models: All

354_image_0.png

Change 1

E-4. Sign Guide

LOCATION OF CREW AREA AND EXTERIOR DECALS AND DATA PLATES
KEY ITEM VEHICLE APPLICATION
1 Decal, caution, windshield cleaning M996, M996A1, M997, M 9 9 7 A 1 , M997A2, M1025, M1025A1,
M1025A2, M1026, M1026A1,
M1036, M1043, M1043A1,
M1043A2, M1044, M1044A1,
M1045, M1045A1, M1045A2,
M1046, M1046A1
2 Plate, identification, ignition A l l
3 Decal, neutral start, warning A l l
4 Plate, instruction, steering wheel lock A l l
5 Decal, speedometer A l l
6 Decal, warning, hand throttle A l l
7 Plate, identification, heater, defroster, A l l
temperature, fan
8 Decal, identification, M16 rifle, front M966, M966A1, M1025,
M1025A1, M1025A2, M1026,
M1026A1, M1036, M1043, M1043A1, M1043A2, M1044,
M1044A1, M1045, M1045A1,
M1045A2, M1046, M1046A1, M11 2 1
9 Plate, instruction, heater air control A l l
1 0 Decal, service and data manuals A l l
11 Decal, procedures, tiedown A l l
1 2 Plate, instruction, seatbelt retractor (front) A l l
1 3 Plate, instruction, operating A l l
1 4 Decal, identification, M16 rifle, rear M1043, M1043A1, M1043A2,
M1044, M1044A1
1 5 Plate, instruction, seatbelt retractor (rear) All except M996, M996A1,
M997, M997A1, M997A2,
M1035, M1035A1, M1035A2,
M1037, M1042
1 6 Plate, instruction, driver's seat adjustment A l l
1 7 Plate, identification, vehicle A l l
1 8 Decal, identification, fire extinguisher A l l
1 9 Plate, information, deep water fording Vehicles so equipped
2 0 Plate, sling and tiedown/weights and A l l
dimensions data
2 1 Plate, instruction, battery cable connections A l l
2 2 Decal, 24V A l l
2 3 Plate, identification, slave receptacle A l l

356_image_0.png

E-3

E-4. Sign Guide (Cont'D)

LOCATION OF CREW AREA AND EXTERIOR DECALS AND DATA PLATES
VEHICLE
KEY ITEM APPLICATION
1 Decal, warning, fan blade All
2 Decal, no step All
3 Decal, sling All
4 Decal, no step All
5 Decal, identification, USMC registration number USMC vehicles only
6 Decal, warning, surge tank cap All
7 Decal, no step All
8 Decal, instruction, sling guide All except M996, M996A1,
M997, M997A1, M1097A2,
M1037, M1042
9 Decal, identification, sling and tiedown All except M996, M996A1,
M997, M997A1, M997A2,
M1037, M1042
10 Decal, identification, star Army only, except for
CONUS vehicles and
M996, M996A1, M997,
M997A1, M997A2, M1035,
M1035A1, M1035A2
11 Decal, tire pressure, rear All
12 Decal, identification, vehicle number Army vehicles only
13 Decal, tire pressure, front All
14 Decal, identification, tiedown All

357_image_0.png

E-4. Sign Guide (Cont'D)

LOCATION OF CREW AREA AND EXTERIOR DECALS AND DATA PLATES
VEHICLE
KEY ITEM APPLICATION
1 Plate, NBC fuse control box M996, M996A1, M997, M997A1,
M997A2
2 Plate, NBC master control switch M996, M996A1, M997, M997A1,
M997A2
3 Decal, sling M996, M996A1, M997, M997A1,
M997A2, M1037, M1042
4 Decal, tiedown M996, M996A1, M997, M997A1,
M997A2, M1037, M1042
5 Decal, 24V All

358_image_0.png

E-5 E-4. SIGN GUIDE (Cont'd)

LOCATION OF CREW AREA AND EXTERIOR DECALS AND DATA PLATES
KEY ITEM VEHICLE APPLICATION
1 Decal, warning, body heater M996, M996A1, M997, M997A1, M997A2
2 Plate, control system heating/ventilation M996, M996A1
3 Plate, heater/air-conditioner/vent operation M997, M997A1, M997A2
4 Plate, 24-volt outlet M996, M996A1, M997, M997A1, M997A2
5 Plate, harness circuit connections control box M996, M996A1, M997, M997A1, M997A2
6 Plate, lights, 24-volt DC, fuse control M996, M996A1, M997, M997A1, M997A2

360_image_0.png

TOW CARRIER (M966, M966A1, M1036, M1045, M1045A1, M1045A2, M1046, M1046A1,
A N D M 1 1 2 1 )
STOWAGE LOCATION DECALS
KEY ITEM
1 Deleted
2 Decal, Missile Guidance Set (MGS)
3 Decal, traversing unit
4 Decal, radiac meter
5 Decal, night vision goggles
6 Decal, night sight
7 Decal, night sight coolant
8 Decal, boresight collimator
9 Decal, night sight batteries
10 Decal, combat rations
11 Decal, daysight
12 Decal, fuel can
13 Decal, tripod
14 Decal, telephone
15 Decal, cable reel
16 Decal, ammunition
17 Decal, MGS battery
18 Decal, water can
19 Decal, NBC overgarments
20 Decal, NBC chemical mask
21 Decal, no hold warning spring cover
22 Decal, nose end
23 Decal, launch tube

362_image_0.png

362_image_1.png

E-9

363_image_0.png

CARGO/TROOP CARRIER (M998, M998A1, M1038, AND M1038A1) WITH
81MM MORTAR KIT INSTALLED
KEY ITEM
1 Decal, mortar base plate
2 Decal, bipod
3 Decal, 4 round ready rack
4 Decal, M16 chest
5 Decal, aiming post
6 Decal, M14 chest
7 Decal, tool chest
8 Decal, mortar launch tube
9 Decal, cleaning staff

364_image_0.png

LOCATION OF TRANSPORTING AMMUNITION DECAL
AND HEARING PROTECTION DECAL
KEY ITEM
1 Decal, warning, transporting ammunition (M1097,
M1097A1, M1097A2, and M1123 with Howitzer Prime
Mover Kit installed)
2 Decal, caution, hearing protection (M1097 only)
3 Decal, caution, hearing protection (All A1, A2, and
M1123 vehicles)

365_image_0.png

CARGO/TROOP CARRIER (M998, M998A1, M1038, AND M1038A1)
WITH WINTERIZATION KIT INSTALLED
KEY ITEM
1 Plate, instruction, heater operating instructions

Appendix F On-Vehicle Equipment Loading Plans

F-1. Scope

This appendix shows the on-vehicle equipment loading plan for TOW carrier (M966, M966A1, M1036, M1045, M1045A1, M1045A2, M1046, M1046A1, and M1121), armament carriers w/supplemental armor (M1043, M1043A1, M1043A2, M1044, and M1044A1), and heavy variants (M1097, M1097A1, M1097A2, and M1123).

F-2. Tow Carrier Load Plan

This is a standard load plan for the TOW carrier (M966, M966A1, M1036, M1045, M1045A1, M1045A2, M1046, M1046A1, and M1121). It is designed to supplement the stowage and sign guide contained in Appendix E. It includes selected items of personnel and unit equipment issued to most units within the Army or Marine Corps equipped with this vehicle. Vehicles and equipment not shown in either this document or Appendix E may be loaded in accordance with local command policy. Fuel cans cannot be carried in an enclosed vehicle.

Proponent: Commandant US Army Infantry School Fort Benning, GA 31905

LOAD PLAN
NO. ITEM
1 Missile Guidance Set (MGS)
2 M16A1/M203 Rifle
3 Flashlight
4 Binoculars
5 AN/GRC-160 Radio
6 TSEC/KY-57
7 Gasoline Cook Stove (strapped to airlift bracket)
7.1 Jack, Scissors (A2 only)
8 M16A1/M203 Rifle
9 Night Sight Vehicle Power Conditioner
10 Adjustable Gunner's Platform
11 Traversing Unit
12 Radiac Meter
13 Night Vision Goggles (2)
14 NBC Footwear
15 Battery Pack, Night Sight
16 NBC Overgarments (strapped to body)
17 Boresight Collimator
18 Night Vision Sight Case
19 Coolant Cartridge Cases
20 Radio Antenna (on cargo shell)
21 Combat Rations
22 Optical Sight W/Cover
23 Night Sight Battery (under tanker roll)
24 Camouflage Screen and Support System
25 Tanker Rolls
26 Tripod
27 Telephone
28 DR8 Cable Reel
29 Combat Rations
30 M13 Decon Kit
31 Ammunition (M16A1)
32 Water Can
33 NBC Overgarments (strapped to body)
34 MGS Battery Assemblies (2)
35 NBC Footwear (2)
36 Missiles (6)
37 Tanker Roll (strapped to roof)
38 NBC Hood Masks (4)
39 Launch Tube (strapped to door)

TOW CARRIER STOWAGE PLAN INTERNAL TOP VIEW

368_image_0.png

Change 1 F-3

LOAD PLAN
NO. ITEM
1 Missile Guidance Set (MGS)
2 M16A1/M203 Rifle
3 Flashlight
4 Binoculars
5 AN/GRC-160 Radio
6 TSEC/KY-57
7 Gasoline Cook Stove (strapped to airlift bracket)
7.1 Jack, Scissors (A2 only)
8 M16A1/M203 Rifle
9 Night Sight Vehicle Power Conditioner
10 Adjustable Gunner's Platform
11 Traversing Unit
12 Night Vision Goggles (2)
13 Radiac Meter
14 MGS VPC Cable Extension
15 NBC Footwear (2)
16 Night Vision Sight
17 NBC Overgarments (strapped to body)
18 Optical Sight W/Cover
19 Boresight Collimator
20 Combat Rations
21 Radio Antenna (on cargo shell)
22 Night Sight Battery Power Conditioner
23 Night Sight Battery (under tanker roll)
24 Camouflage Screen and Support System
25 Tanker Rolls
26 Tripod
27 Telephone
28 DR8 Cable Reel
29 M13 Decon Kit
30 Combat Rations
31 MGS Battery Assemblies (2)
32 Ammunition (M16A1)
33 NBC Overgarments (strapped to body)
34 Water Can
35 Missiles (6)
36 NBC Overgarments (2)
37 Tanker Roll (strapped to roof)
38 NBC Hood Masks (4)
39 Launch Tube (strapped to door)

TOW 2 CARRIER STOWAGE PLAN INTERNAL TOP VIEW

370_image_0.png

Change 1

F-3. Armament Carriers W/Supplemental Armor Load Plan

This is a standard load plan for the armament carriers w/supplemental armor (M1043, M1043A1, M1044, and M1044A1). It is designed to supplement the stowage and sign guide contained in Appendix E. It includes selected items of personnel and unit equipment issued to most units within the Marine Corps equipped with this vehicle. Equipment not shown in either this document or Appendix E may be loaded in accordance with local command policy.

ARMAMENT CARRIER W/SUPPLEMENTAL ARMOR STOWAGE PLAN

LOAD PLAN
NO. ITEM
1 M16A1/M203 Rifle
2 Fire Extinguisher
3 AN/GRC-160 Radio
4 M16A1/M203 Rifle
5 MK64 MOD 4 Mount
6 Pintle Adapter
7 M16A1 Rifle
8 Tool Box
9 Combat Rations (under seat)
10 Ammunition (caliber .50)
11 Night Vision Sight Case
12 Radio Antenna (on cargo shell)
13 MK19 40 mm Grenade Launcher
14 M3 Tripod
15 M2 Caliber .50 Machine Gun
16 Camouflage Screen and Support System
17 Ammunition (MK19)
18 Spare Barrel (M2 caliber .50) and Cleaning Kit
19 Water Can
20 Ammunition (caliber .50)
21 Ammunition (MK19)
22 Ammo Can Mounting Tray (40 mm)
23 Ammunition (caliber .50)
24 Combat Rations (under seat)
25 M16A1 Rifle
26 Adjustable Gunner's Platform

372_image_0.png

INTERNAL TOP VIEW

F-4. Armament Carriers W/Supplemental Armor Load Plan A2 Vehicles

This is a standard load plan for the armament carriers w/basic armor (M1025A2), or w/supplemental armor (M1043A2). It is designed to supplement the stowage and sign guide contained in Appendix E. It includes selected items of personnel and unit equipment issued to most units within the Army equipped with this vehicle. Equipment not shown in this document may be loaded in accordance with local command policy. For Marine Corps Load Plans, refer to TI 11240-24/42.

ARMAMENT CARRIER W/SUPPLEMENTAL ARMOR STOWAGE PLAN

LOAD PLAN
NO. ITEM
1 M16A1/M203 Rifle
2 Rifle M16A1
3 Tool Box
4 Combat Rations (under seat)
4.1 Bulkhead, Cargo
5 Ammunition Tray (caliber 5.56 mm)
6 Radio Antenna (on cargo shell)
7 Camouflage Screen and Support System
8 Water Can Tray
9 Water Can Tray (2)
10 Ammunition Tray (caliber 5.56 mm)
11 40 mm/50 cal/Ammunition Tray
12 Combat Rations (under seat)
13 Pedestal
14 Adjustable Gunner's Platform
15 Fire Extinguisher
16 M16A1/M203 Rifle
17 AN/GRC-160 Radio
18 Jack, Scissors

374_image_0.png

F-9 Change 3

F-5. Armament Carriers Load Plan (Usaf) (Mk19/M60 Machine Gun)

This is a standard load plan for the USAF armament carriers (M1026 and M1026A1). It is designed to supplement the stowage and sign guide contained in Appendix E. It includes selected items of personnel and unit equipment issued to units within the Air Force equipped with this vehicle. Equipment not shown in this document may be loaded in accordance with local command policy. This load plan is for either the MK19 or M60 equipped armament carrier.

Armament Carrier Stowage Plan (Usaf) (Mk19/M60 Machine Gun)

LOAD PLAN
NO. ITEM
1 M16 Rifle
2 Fire Extinguisher
3 Tactical Communications Platform
3.1 Jack, Scissors (A2 only)
4 M16 Rifle
5 MK64 MOD 4 Mount
6 Pintle Adapter
7 Slave Cable/Batteries (under seat)
8 M16 Rifle
9 Combat Rations (under seat)
10 Tool Box (under seat)
11 Ammunition (5.56 mm)
12 Night Vision Sight and Case AN/TVS-5 (MK19) or AN/PVS-4 (M60)
13 Radio Antenna (on cargo shell)
14 MK19 Grenade Launcher or M60 Machine Gun
15 M3 Tripod
16 Camouflage Screen and Support System
17 Pioneer Kit (rear vehicle under carriage)
18 Spare Barrel (M60) and Cleaning Kit
19 Ammunition (40 mm or 7.62 mm)
20 Water Can
21 Ammunition and Feeder Tray (7.62 mm)
22 Ammunition (40 mm or 7.62 mm)
23 Ammunition (7.62 mm)
24 Ammunition (40 mm) and Night Vision Goggles AN/PVS-5
25 Combat Rations (under seat)
26 M16A1/M203 Rifle
27 Adjustable Gunner's Platform
28 Tow and Tire Chains/Jack/Lug Wrench/First Aid Kit (under seat)

NOTE: MG ammunition brackets hold (1) 40 mm or up to (3) 7.62 mm ammunition cans.

Internal Top View

376_image_0.png

F-6. Armament Carrier Load Plan (Mk19/40 Mm)

This is a standard load plan for the armament carrier. It is designed to supplement the stowage and sign guide contained in Appendix E. It includes selected items of personnel and unit equipment issued to most units within the Army equipped with this vehicle. Equipment not shown in this document may be loaded in accordance with local command policy.

ARMAMENT CARRIER STOWAGE PLAN (40 MM)

LOAD PLAN
NO. ITEM
1 M16A1/M203 Rifle
2 Fire Extinguisher
3 AN/GRC-49 Radio
4 Gasoline Cook Stove (strapped to airlift bracket)
4.1 Jack, Scissors (A2 only)
5 M16A1/M203 Rifle
6 MK64 MOD 4 Mount
7 Pintle Adapter
8 M16A1 Rifle
9 Radiac Meter IM 174 PD or AN/VDR-2
10 AN/PVS-5 Night Sight Goggles (2)
11 Hand Grenades (12)
12 Ammunition (5.56/M203-40 mm)
13 AN-TVS-5 Night Sight
14 Radio Antenna (on cargo shell)
15 MK19 Grenade Launcher
16 Camouflage Screen and Support System
17 Ammunition (MK19-40 mm)
18 M3 Tripod
19 Water Can
20 TA-312/PT Telephone
21 Radio Antenna
22 DR8 Cable Reel
23 Ammunition (5.56/M203-40 mm)
24 M13 Decon Kit
25 Ammunition (40 mm) and Mounting Bracket/MK64
26 Ammunition (5.56)
27 Demolition Kit
28 PEWS AN/THS-2
29 AN/PVS-4 Individual Vision Sight
30 Adjustable Gunner's Platform and MK64 Mount
when AN/GRC 49 Radio is installed

Internal Top View

378_image_0.png

F-7. Armament Carrier Load Plan (M2/.50 Cal)

This is a standard load plan for the armament carrier. It is designed to supplement the stowage and sign guide contained in Appendix E. It includes selected items of personnel and unit equipment issued to most units within the Army equipped with this vehicle. Equipment not shown in this document may be loaded in accordance with local command policy.

Armament Carrier (M2/.50 Cal) Army Stowage Plan

LOAD PLAN
NO. ITEM
1 Fire Extinguisher
2 M16A1/M203 Rifle
3 AN/GRC-160 Radio
4 Gasoline Cook Stove (strapped to airlift bracket)
4.1 Jack, Scissors (A2 only)
5 M16A1/M203 Rifle
6 MK64 MOD 4 M2 MG Mount
7 Pintle Adapter
8 M16A1 Rifle
9 Radiac Meter IM 174 PD or AN/VDR-2
10 AN/PVS-5 Night Sight Goggles (2)
11 Hand Grenades (12)
12 Ammunition (5.56/M203-40 mm)
13 Night Sight AN-TVS-5
14 Infrared Viewer AN PAS-7
15 Radio Antenna (on cargo shell)
16 Machine Gun (M2/.50 cal)
17 Camouflage Screen and Support System
18 Infrared Observation Set AN GVS-5 Laser
19 Ammunition (M2/.50 cal)
20 M3 Tripod
21 Water Can
22 Telephone TA-312 PT
23 Antenna AT 784
24 DR8 Cable Reel
25 Spare Barrel (M2/.50 cal) and Cleaning Kit
26 Ammunition (M2/.50 cal) Mounted in MG Feed Tray
27 M13 Decon Kit
28 Demolition Kit
29 PEWS AN/THS-2
30 Individual Vision Sight AN/PVS-4
31 Adjustable Gunner's Platform

Internal Top View

380_image_0.png

F-8. Armament Carrier Load Plan (M60/7.62 Mm)

This is a standard load plan for the armament carrier. It is designed to supplement the stowage and sign guide contained in Appendix E. It includes selected items of personnel and unit equipment issued to most units within the Army equipped with this vehicle. Equipment not shown in this document may be loaded in accordance with local command policy.

ARMAMENT CARRIER STOWAGE PLAN (M60/7.62 MM)

LOAD PLAN
NO. ITEM
1 M16A1/M203 Rifle
2 Gasoline Cook Stove (strapped to airlift bracket)
2.1 Jack, Scissors (A2 only)
3 M16A1/M203 Rifle
4 MK64 MOD/M60 MG Mount
5 Pintle Adapter
6 M16A1/M203 Rifle
7 Adjustable Gunner's Platform
8 Radiac Meter IM 174 PD or AN VDR-2
9 Night Vision Goggles (2)
10 Hand Grenades (12)
11 Ammunition (5.56/M203-40 mm)
12 Night Sight AN-TVS-5
13 Infrared Viewer AN/PAS-7
14 Radio Antenna (on cargo shell)
15 Machine Gun M60
16 Infrared Observation Set AN/GVS-5 Laser
17 Camouflage Screen and Support System
18 M2 Tripod
19 Ammunition (M60/7.62 mm)
20 Water Can
21 Telephone TA-312/PT
22 Antenna AT1784
23 Cable Reel DR-8
24 Spare Barrel (M60/7.62 mm) and Cleaning Kit
25 Ammunition (M60/7.62 mm)
26 M13 Decon Kit
27 Demolition Kit
28 PEWS AN/THS-2
29 Individual Vision Sight AN/PVS-4
30 Fire Extinguisher
31 AN/GRC-160 Radio

Internal Top View

382_image_0.png

F-9. M997, M997A1, And M997A2 Ambulance Load Plan

This is a standard load plan for the M997, M997A1, and M997A2 ambulance. It is designed to supplement the stowage and sign guide contained in Appendix E. It includes selected items of personnel and unit equipment issued to most units within the Army and Marines equipped with this vehicle. Equipment not shown in this document may be loaded in accordance with local command policy.

Ambulance Stowage Plan

LOAD PLAN
NO. ITEM
1 NBC Patient Masks, Hoses, and Fittings
2 Portable Heart Monitor
3 Oxygen Tanks (two on right side)
4 Attendant Seat (stowed position)
5 Short Spineboard (on right wall)
6 Litters (2) (stowage when upper litter rack is used as backrest)
7 Spreader Bar
8 Litters (2) (in upper compartment)
9 Litter Rail Extension (in lower compartment)
10 Medical Bags, Splint Set, and NBC Equipment Stowage (under
litter bench)
11 Long Spineboard (on left wall)
12 Medical Supplies and Equipment (medications and IV bags)
13 External Stowage for Optional Equipment
14 Aspirator/Resuscitator
15 Oxygen Tanks (two on left side)

F-18

384_image_0.png

F-19

F-10. M996 And M996A1 Ambulance Load Plan

This is a standard load plan for the M996 and M996A1 ambulance. It is designed to supplement the stowage and sign guide contained in Appendix E. It includes selected items of personnel and unit equipment issued to most units within the Army and Marines equipped with this vehicle. Equipment not shown in this document may be loaded in accordance with local command policy.

AMBULANCE STOWAGE PLAN

LOAD PLAN
NO. ITEM
1 Aspirator/Resuscitator
2 Blanket Set
3 Splint Set
4 Oxygen Tank (on right wall)
5 NBC Patient Masks, Hoses, and Fittings
6 Attendant Seat (stowed position)
7 Medical Instrument and Supply Set
8 Short Spineboard (on right wall)
9 Litters (2) (stowage when patient seat is open)
10 Spreader Bar
11 Medical Instrument and Supply Set
12 Litter Rail Extension
13 Long Spineboard (on left wall)
14 Portable Heart Monitor
15 External Stowage for Optional Equipment
16 IV Bags
17 Oxygen Tank (on left wall)

386_image_0.png

F-11. Heavy Variant Stowage Plan

This is the standard load plan for the M1097, M1097A1, M1097A2, M1123, and heavy variants equipped with a howitzer prime mover or towed vulcan kit. It is designed to supplement the stowage and sign guide contained in Appendix E. It includes selected items of personnel and unit equipment issued to most units within the Army equipped with this vehicle. Equipment not shown in this document may be loaded in accordance with local command policy.

HEAVY VARIANT STOWAGE PLAN

LOAD PLAN
NO. ITEM
1 Camouflage Screen and Support System
2 Fuel (Diesel) Cans (2)
3 Remote
4 M122 Tripod
5 Telephone
6 DR8 Cable Reels (2)
7 Paralleloscope and Aiming Posts
8 Jack Strut
9 Paralleloscope Spikes (2)
10 Ammo (22 Rounds)
11 M60 Machine Gun
12 Sight Box #2
13 Sight Box #1
14 GDU Battery
15 GDU Box
16 Section Chest
17 Water Cans (2)
18 Spade
19 Jack, Scissors (A2 and M1123 only)

INTERNAL TOP VIEW

388_image_0.png

Change 1

Appendix G Lubrication Instructions

G 1. SCOPE This appendix gives lubrication requirements for the M998 series vehicles which are the responsibility of the operator/crew. G-2. GENERAL LUBRICATION REQUIREMENTS a. Maintaining Lubricant Levels. Lubricant levels must be checked as specified in the PMCS (Chapter 2, Section 2) and Table G-l, Lubrication. Steps must be taken to replenish and maintain lubricant levels.

WARNING · Drycleaning solvent P-D-680 is TOXIC and flammable. Wear protective goggles and gloves, use only in well-ventilated area, avoid contact with skin, eyes, and clothes, and do not breathe vapors. Keep away from heat and flame. Never smoke when using solvent. The flashpoint for type I drycleaning solvent is 100°F (38°C), and for type II, is 138°F (50°C). Failure to do so may result in injury or death to personnel.

· If personnel become dizzy while using cleaning solvent, immediately get fresh air and medical help. If solvent contacts skin or clothes, flush with cold water. If solvent contacts eyes, immediately flush eyes with water and get medical attention.

b. Cleaning Fittings Before Lubrication. Clean parts with drycleaning solvent P-D-680 or equivalent.

Dry before lubricating. Dotted arrow points indicate lubrication on both sides of the equipment.

c. Lubrication After Fording. If fording operation occurs, lubricate all fittings below fording depth and check submerged gear boxes for presence of water.

d. Lubrication After High-Pressure Washing. After a thorough washing, lubricate all grease fittings and oil can points outside and underneath vehicle.

e. Localized Views. A reference to the appropriate localized view is given after most lubrication entries.

Localized views begin on page G-11.

G-1

G-3. Lubrication Intervals

a. Service Interval Under Normal Conditions. Service intervals listed are for normal operation in moderate temperatures, humidity, and atmospheric conditions. Hard time intervals may be shortened if your lubricants are contaminated or if you are operating the equipment under adverse conditions, including longer-than-usual operating hours. Hard time intervals may be extended during periods of low activity, though adequate preservation precautions must be taken. Perform semi-annual service intervals every six months, or 3,000 miles (4,827 km), whichever comes first.

b. Service Interval Under Unusual Conditions. Increase frequency of lubricating service when operating under abnormal conditions such as high or low temperatures, prolonged high speed driving, or extended cross-country operations. Such operation can diminish lubricant's protective qualities. More frequent lubricating service intervals are necessary to maintain vehicle readiness when operating under abnormal conditions.

c. Hard Time Intervals. Intervals shown in this appendix are based on mileage and calendar times. An example of mileage and calendar interval is: 3/S, in which 3 stands for 3,000 mi (4,827 km), and S stands for semiannually (every six months). The lubrication for the vehicle is to be performed at whichever interval occurs first. For equipment under manufacturer's warranty, hard time oil service intervals shall be followed.

d. Army Oil Analysis Program (AOAP). HMMWV engines and transmissions are enrolled in the Army Oil Analysis Program (AOAP). The sampling interval for the engine is every six months or 3,000 miles (4,827 km) (or 100 hours if hour meter is installed) of operation. For the transmission, the sampling interval is every 12 months or 6,000 miles (9,654 km) (or 300 hours if hour meter is installed) of operation.

G - 4 . L U B R I C Ation For Operation Under Extreme Temperat U R E S

a. Changes in Lubricant Grades. Lubricant grades change with weather conditions. Refer to Lubrication Table for lubricant grade changes.

b. Arctic Conditions. Refer to FM 9-207, Operation and Maintenance of Ordnance Materiel in cold Weather (0°F to -65°F) (-18°C to -54°C), or the Lubrication Table.

G-5. Corrosion Control

Refer to para 2-4 for appropriate corrosion control procedures.

G - 2 Change 1

Table G-1. Lubrication
EXPECTED USAGE FLUID/LUBRICANT CAPACITIES
TEMPERATURES
Engine Oil OE/HDO 30 Crankcase: Above + 15° F (-9° C)
(MIL-L-2104) OE/HDO 10 w/o filter +40° to -15° F (+4° to -26° C)
(MIL-L-46167) OEA 7 qt (6.6 L) +40° to -65° F (+4° to -54° C)
w/ filter
8 qt (7.6 L)
Dry System
10 qt (9.5 L)
Engine Ethylene Glycol Radiator:
Coolant and Water 5 qt (4.7 L)
Complete
1/4 Ethylene Glycol, System: 26 qt Above +15° F (-9°C)
3/4 Water (24.6 L)
2/5 Ethylene Glycol, +40° to -15° F (+4° to -26° C)
3/5 Water
3/5 Ethylene Glycol, +40° to -65° F (+4° to -54° C)
2/5 Water
Dexron® II or Transmission Dry 11 qt All Temperatures
Dexron® III (3L80) (10.4 L) (except arctic)
Drain & Refill
6 qt (5.7 L)
Dexron® III (4L80-E) Dry 13.5 qt All Temperatures
(12.8 L) (except arctic)
Drain & Refill
7.7 qt (7.3 L)
OEA Arctic Temperatures
Differentials Multipurpose Gear
GO 80/90 2 qt ea. (1.9 L) All Temperatures
Geared Hubs Multipurpose Gear
GO 80/90 1 pt ea. (0.47 L) All Temperatures
Steering Dexron® II or 1 qt (0.95 L) All Temperatures
System Dexron® III w/Cooler 1.25
qt (1.18 L)
Upper Ball
Joints (all
vehicles), Lower
Ball Joints (A2
and M1123
vehicles only),
Tie Rod Ends, GAA As Required All Temperatures
Pitman Arm,
Propeller
Shafts, etc.
Hinges, Cables,
and Linkages OE/HDO As Required All Temperatures
OE/HDO 15/40 (Grade 15W-40) lubricant may be used when expected temperatures

are above +5°F (–15°C). If OEA lubricant is required to meet the temperature ranges prescribed in the Lubrication Table, then the OEA lubricant is to be used in place of OE/HDO 10 lubricant for all temperature ranges. If operating conditions are severe or abnormal, service chassis lubrication points at 1,000 mi (1,609 km).

Table G-1. Lubrication (Cont'd)

LUBRICANTS EXPECTED
TEMPERATURES
GAA-GREASE, AUTOMOTIVE
AND ARTILLERY ALL TEMPERATURES
(MIL-G-10924)
PL-S-LUBRICATING OIL,
GENERAL PURPOSE,
PRESERVATIVE,
(WATER DISPLACING ALL TEMPERATURES
LOW TEMPERATURE)
(VV-L-800A)
GWR-GREASE, WIRE ROPE
(MIL-G-18458) ALL TEMPERATURES
GO 80/90-LUBRICATING OIL
MULTIPURPOSE GEAR ALL TEMPERATURES
(81349) MIL-L-2105
FUEL REQUIREMENTS - TEMPERATURE LIMITS (VV-F-800)
Grade DF2 Fuel For use above +10°F (-12°C)*
Grade DF1** For use below +10°F (-12°C)
to above -20°F (-29°C)
Grade DFA For use below -20°F (-29°C)
All Temperature Alternate JP8
* Temperature limits may vary dependent on the cloud point of the
actual DF2 fuel being supplied in the geographical area.
** DF1 is not normally procured in CONUS or OCONUS. Refineries will
blend DF2 with kerosene to meet temperature requirements of DF1.

Lubrication Points

393_Image_0.Png

INTERVAL - LUBRICANT

Rope
(See note 2)
HDO (See note 1)
3/S OE/ Heater Control
HDO Shutoff Valve
Lever and Pin
(LV-A)
(See note 1)
HDO (See note 1)
HDO Shift Linkage
(See note 1)
HDO (See note 1)
Door Latches
(See note 1)
Door Front
Paddle Lock
(See note 1)
Door Latches
(See note 1)
3/S OE/ Tailgate Hinges
HDO (See note 1)

NOTE A REFERENCE TO THE LOCALIZED VIEW (LV) IS PROVIDED AFTER LUBRICATION POINT ENTRY, WHERE APPLICABLE.

Lubrication Points (Cont'D)

LUBRICANT - INTERVAL

394_image_0.png

Accelerator OE/ 3/S Linkage HDO (LV-B) (See note 1)

Heater Control Knob and OE/ 3/S Plunger HDO (LV-C) (See note 1)

Transfer Case OE/ 3/S Shift Linkage HDO (See note 1)

Door Handles OE/ 3/S (See note 1) HDO

Cargo Shell PL-S 3/S

Door Rear Wire Handle Lock (See note 1) NOTE A REFERENCE TO THE LOCALIZED VIEW (LV) IS PROVIDED AFTER LUBRICATION POINT ENTRY, WHERE APPLICABLE.

Lubrication Points (Cont'D)

395_Image_0.Png

395_Image_1.Png

INTERVAL - LUBRICANT G A A Front Propeller Shaft Universal Joint and Slip Yokes (3 fittings) (LV-D, LV-E) (See note 4) GAA Upper Control Arm Ball Joints (all vehicles). Lower Control Arm Ball Joints (A2 and M1123 vehicles only) (LV-S, T) (See note 4) OE/ Crankcase HDO Fill (LV-F) (See note 7) Dexron® (LV-G) for 4L80-E Dexron® Transmission II or III Fill and Level for 3L80 (Check Level) III (See note 6) GAA Radius Rods (LV-H) (See note 4)

OE/ Pintle

HD0 (See note 3) (LV-I) NOT E A REFERENCE TO THE LOCALIZED VIEW (LV) IS PROVIDED AFTER LUBRICATION POINT.

LUBRICATION POINTS (Cont'd)

396_image_0.png

NOT E A REFERENCE TO THE LOCALIZED VIEW (LV) IS PROVIDED AFTER LUBRICATION POINT.

397_image_0.png

G-9

Rear Propeller Shaft Universal Joints and Slip Yokes (3 fittings) (LV-N, O) NOTE A REFERENCE TO THE LOCALIZED VIEW (LV) IS PROVIDED AFTER LUBRICATION POINT.

INTERVAL - LUBRICANT Tie Rod Ends (2 fittings) (LV-R) (See note 4) Idler Arm (2 fittings) (LV-M) (See note 4) LUBRICANT - INTERVAL

398_image_0.png

NOTE A REFERENCE TO THE LOCALIZED VIEW (LV) IS PROVIDED AFTER LUBRICATION POINT.

G-10

399_image_0.png

G-11

400_image_0.png

G-12

401_image_0.png

POWER STEERING RESERVOIR

IDLER ARM AND TIE ROD

401_image_1.png

TIE ROD AND PITMAN ARM

G-13

402_image_0.png

LOCALIZED LUBRICATION POINTS (Cont'd)

Notes

1. Oil Can Points.

Lubricate all oil can points every 3,000 mi (4,827 km), or semiannually, whichever occurs first. Use seasonal grade OE on hood hinges, tailgate hinges, door hinges, door handles, transfer case shift linkage, accelerator linkage, transmission shift linkage, heater control shutoff valve lever and pin, and heater control knob and plunger. Lubricate cargo shell door front paddle lock, rear wire handle lock and cargo shell door latches with PL-S, (M996, M996A1, M1025, M1025A1, M1025A2, M1026, M1026A1, M1036, M1043, M1043A1, M1043A2, M1044, M1044A1, M1045, M1045A1, M1045A2, M1046, and M1046A1 only).

2. Winch Wire Rope. .Warning.

Wear leather gloves when handling winch wire rope. Do not handle wire rope with bare hands. Broken wires cause injury.

After each use, clean and lubricate winch wire rope. Clean entire wire rope with wire brush. Lubricate with new OE/HDO. Perform winch wire rope cleaning and lubrication every 3,000 mi (4,827 km) or semiannually, whichever occurs first, when wire rope is not used.

3. Pintle.

Every 3,000 mi (4,827 km), or semiannually, whichever occurs first, clean pintle with wire bush and lubricate rear plate fitting with seasonal grade OE.

4. Steering System. Caution

Do not over lubricate tie rod ends and upper and lower ball joints. One or two shots is adequate. Excessive lubrication will result in the boot rupturing. Observe the boot during lubrication: a seeping condition indicates adequate lubrication; expansion of the boot indicates over lubrication.

Lubricate front propeller shaft, steering column, U-joints, slip yokes, tie rods, upper and lower ball joints, radius rods, pitman arm, intermediate steering shafts, and idler arm with GAA every 3,000 mi (4,827 km), or semiannually, whichever comes first.

5. Power Steering Reservoir. Caution

Check the fluid level in the power steering reservoir and adjust level as necessary. Level must be above "ADD" mark. Fluid does not require periodic changing.

Notes

6. Transmission. Caution

transmission.

- Do not overfill trans
mission. The fluid level
rises as the fluid tem
perature increases. There
fore, do not check level
before the transmission has
reached normal operating
temperature. The safe
operating level is within the
crosshatch marks on the
dipstick. Overfilling will
result in damage to

Check and fill transmission to proper level weekly. Operate transmission through all operating ranges to fill cavities and fluid passages. With vehicle positioned on level ground, allow engine to idle, shift transmission to neutral, and apply parking brake. For vehicles with a park position, shift transmission to park. Check fluid level on dipstick. It should register within the crosshatch marks under the conditions stated above. On vehicles equipped for deep water fording, the dipstick has a seal which fits into the opening of the dipstick tube. The dipstick handle must be turned counterclockwise to be released before dipstick is withdrawn. Turn dipstick handle clockwise to seat after installing dipstick. Have fluid changed every 12,000 mi (19,308 km), or biennially, whichever occurs first.

7. Crankcase Oil Level. Caution

Check crankcase oil level daily. Start engine and visually check for oil leaks at drain plug and oil filter. Stop engine and wait approximately one minute for oil to drain back into oil pan, then recheck oil level with dipstick. On vehicles equipped for deep water fording, the dipstick has a seal which fits into the opening of the dipstick tube. The dipstick handle must be turned counterclockwise to be released before dipstick is withdrawn. Turn handle clockwise to seat after installing dipstick. Have oil changed every 3,000 mi (4,827 km), or semiannually, whichever occurs first.

TM 9-2320-280-10 INDEX

A Para. Page
Additional authorization list, appendix C C-1
Adjusting driver's seat 2-14 2-114
Air cleaner dump valve servicing 3-16 3-21
Air cleaner servicing (emergency procedure) 3-15 3-18
Ambulance heating, ventilation, and air-conditioning
air intake filter service 3-27 3-34
Ambulance interior electrical controls 2-6 1 2-198
Ambulance interior light bulb replacement 3-28 3-38
Ambulance litter rack operation 2-6 2 2-202
Ambulance load plan (M996 and M996A1) F-10 F-20
Ambulance load plan (M997, M997A1, and M997A2) F-9 F-18
Ambulance NBC system operation 2-6 3 2-212
Ambulance operation, general 2-57 2-191
Ambulance rear step assembly operation 2-6 0 2-197
Ambulance, soft-top (M1035, M1035A1, and M1035A2),
litter rack operation 2-58 2-191
Appendix A, references A-1
Appendix B, components of end item and basic issue items lists . B-1
Appendix C, additional authorization list C-1
Appendix D, expendable/durable supplies and materials list D-1
Appendix E, stowage and sign guide E-1
Appendix F, on-vehicle equipment loading plans F-1
Appendix G, lubrication instructions G-1
Arctic operation (All except M1123 and A2 vehicles) 2-39 2-156
Arctic operation (A2 vehicles) 2-40 2-160
Armament carriers, armored (M1025, M1025A1, M1025A2,
M1026, and M1026A1) 1-13 1-12
Armament carriers w/supplemental armor load plan F-3 F-6
Armament carriers w/supplemental armor load plan
(A2 vehicles) F-4 F-8
Armament carriers load plan (MK19/40 mm) F-6 F-12
Armament carriers, w/supplemental armor (M1043, M1043A1,
M1043A2, M1044, and M1044A1) 1-14 1-14
Armament carriers load plan (M2/.50 cal) F-7 F-14
Armament carriers load plan (M60/7.62 mm) F-8 F-16
Armament carriers load plan (USAF) (MK19/M60 machine gun) . F-5 F-10
Armament weapon station operation 2-55 2-189
Army regulations A-8 A-2
Axle weights (Table 1-20) 1-18 1-35
B
Basic issue items, appendix B B-1
Batteries, servicing 3-11 3-14
Break-in service, general information 1-6 1-3
Break-in service, operation under usual conditions 2-9 2-105
Bridge classification, vehicle (table 1-19) 1-34

Change 3 Index 1

Tm 9-2320-280-10

INDEX
Para. Page
C
Capacities (table 1-2) 1-23
Cargo barrier extension, removal and installation of 2-51 2-182
Cargo barrier and net, removal and installation of 2-51.1 2-182.2
Cargo shell door operation 2-53 2-184
Cargo tiedown operation 2-4 5 2-167
Cargo/troop carriers (M998, M998A1, M1038, and M1038A1) . . . 1-9 1-4
Cleaning compound to water ratio (table 3-2) 3-14 3-18
Cleaning instructions 2-4 2-60
Cold weather starting below +32°F (0°C) 2-30 2-139
Companion seat assembly and battery box cover replacement . . . 2-15 2-115
Components of end item and basic issue items lists, appendix B . B-1
Controls, indicators, and equipment 2-2 2-2
Controls, interior electrical, ambulance 2-61 2-198
Coolant surge tank, servicing 3-9 3-12
Cooling system data (table 1-6) 1-25
D
Deep water fording operation 2-37 2-148
Defroster operation (All except A2 vehicles) 2-17 2-117
Defroster operation (A2 vehicles) 2-18 2-118
Department of the Army pamphlets A-2 A-1
Differences between models (table 1-1) 1-22
Driver's seat, adjusting 2-14 2-114
Dusty, sandy areas, operating in 2-32 2-141
E
Electric winch operation 2-26 2-134
Emergency fan clutch override 3-23 3-30
Engine data (6.2 L) (table 1-4) 1-25
Engine data (6.5 L) (table 1-5) 1-25
Engine oil servicing 3-17 3-22
Engine, starting the 2-10 2-105
Equipment characteristics, capabilities, and features 1-7 1-3
Equipment improvement report and maintenance
digest (EIR MD) 1-5 1-3
Expendable/durable supplies and materials list, appendix D D-1
Extreme cold, on ice, or snow, operating in 2-31 2-140
Extreme heat, operating in 2-34 2-143
F
Fan clutch override, emergency 3-23 3-30
Field manuals A-4 A-1
Fire extinguisher operation 2-27 2-136
First-aid kit relocation 3-12 3-15
Fluid leakage 2-6 2-63
Fording operation, deep water 2-37 2-148
Fording operation, shallow water 2-36 2-145
Forms, references A-3 A-1
Four-man cargo area soft top enclosure, removal and installation of . . . 2-49 2-178
Index 2 Change 1

INDEX

Para. Page
F (Cont'd)
Four-man crew area soft top and arctic soft top enclosures,
removal and installation of 2-48 2-174
Fuel filter maintenance 3-10 3-13
Fuel tank servicing 3-21 3-26
G
General cleaning instructions (table 2-1) 2-61
General information 1-1
General lubricating instructions under unusual conditions 3-3 3-1
General lubrication instructions 3-2 3-1
General service data (table 1-3) 1-24
Gunner's platform operation 2-56 2-190
H
Hand receipt manual 1-3 1-2
Heater operating instructions, troop/cargo winterization 2-41 2-164
Heater operation (All except A2 vehicles) 2 - 1 9 2 - 11 9
Heater operation (A2 vehicles) 2 - 2 0 2 - 1 2 0
Heating, ventilation, and air-conditioning air intake filter service . . . 3-27 3-34
Heavy variant cargo/troop carriers (M1097, M1097A1,
M1097A2, and M1123) 1-10 1-6
Heavy variant stowage plan F-11 F-22
Hydraulic winch operation 2-26.1 2-134.2
L
2-litter ambulance, armored (M996 and M996A1); 4-litter
ambulance armored (M997, M997A1, and M997A2) 1-16 1-18
2-litter ambulance, soft top (M1035, M1035A1, and M1035A2). . . 1-17 1-20
Light bulb replacement, ambulance interior 3-28 3-38
Light switch, operation of vehicle 2-13 2-112
Litter rack operation, ambulance 2-62 2-202
Litter rack operation, soft top ambulance (M1035, M1035A1,
and M1035A2) 2-58 2-191
Lubrication for continued operation below 0°F (-18°C) 3-4 3-1
Lubrication instructions 3-1 3-1
Lubrication instructions G-1
Lubrication instructions, general 3-2 3-1
Lubrication instructions under unusual conditions, general 3-3 3-1
Lubrication requirements 2-7 2-63
M
Maintenance forms and records 1-2 1-2
Max tool kit stowage operation 2-22.1 2-124.1
Maximum vehicle operating speeds (3L80) (table 1-11) 1-29
Maximum vehicle operating speeds (4L80-E) (table 1-12) 1-29
Metric system 1-8 1-3
Mirror adjustment, rearview (vehicle serial number 99,999
and below) 3-24 3-31

Tm 9-2320-280-10

INDEX

Para. Page
M (Cont'd)
Mirror adjustment, rearview (vehicle serial number 100,000
and above) 3-25 3-32
Miscellaneous publications A-7 A-2
Mud, operating in 2-33 2-142
N
NBC system operation, ambulance 2-63 2-212
O
On-vehicle equipment loading plans, appendix F F-1
Operating in dusty, sandy areas 2-32 2-141
Operating in extreme cold, on ice, or snow 2-31 2-140
Operating in extreme heat 2-34 2-143
Operating in mud 2-33 2-142
Operating in rainy or humid conditions 2-35 2-144
Operating on unusual terrain 2-29 2-138
Operation of vehicle light switch 2-13 2-112
Operator's controls and indicators, description and use of 2-1
P
Parking brake adjustment and cleaning 3-13 3-17
Pioneer tool stowage rack operation 2-22 2-122
Placing vehicle in motion 2-11 2-108
Plastic window cleaning 3-18 3-23
Power steering fluid servicing 3-20 3-25
Preventive maintenance checks and services (PMCS) 2-5 2-62
R
Rainy or humid conditions, operating in 2-35 2-144
Raising and securing hood 3-8 3-10
Rearview mirror adjustment (vehicle serial number 99,999
and below) 3-24 3-31
Rearview mirror adjustment (vehicle series number 100,000
and above) 3-25 3-32
References, appendix A A-1
Removal and installation of cargo barrier and net 2-51.1 2-182.2
Removal and installation of cargo barrier extension 2-51 2-182
Removal and installation of four-man cargo area soft top
e n c l o s u r e 2-49 2-178
Removal and installation of four-man crew area soft top and
arctic soft top enclosures 2-48 2-174
Removal and installation of S250 shelter carrier rear
suspension tiedown kit 2-50 2-180
Removal and installation of soft top ambulance (M1035,
M1035A1, and M1035A2) enclosure 2-59 2-193
Removal and installation of troop area soft top enclosures 2-47 2-172
Removal and installation of two-man crew area soft top
enclosure 2-46 2-168
Reporting equipment improvement recommendations (EIR) 1-4 1-2

Index 4 Change 1 TM 9-2320-280-10

R (Cont'd) Para. Page
Restraining net installation 3-29 3-40
Runflat operations 2-38 2-156
Runflat operation (table 2-4) 2-156
S
Scope of manual 1-1 1-1
Seatbelt operation 2-16 2-116
Service data, general (table 1-3) 1-24
Servicing batteries 3-11 3-14
Servicing coolant surge tank 3-9 3-12
Servicing windshield washer reservoir 3-14 3-18
Shallow water fording operation 2-36 2-145
Slave starting operation 2-23 2-125
Soft top ambulance (M1035, M1035A1, and M1035A2)
enclosure, removal and installation of 2-59 2-193
Soft top ambulance (M1035, M1035A1, and M1035A2)
litter rack operation 2-58 2-191
Special instructions 2-28 2-137
Starting the engine 2-10 2-105
Step assembly operation, rear, ambulance 2-60 2-197
Stopping the vehicle and engine 2-12 2-110
Stowage and sign guide, appendix E E-1
S250 shelter carriers (M1037 and M1042) 1-15 1-16
S250 shelter carrier rear suspension tiedown kit,
removal and installation of 2-50 2-180
T
Tables:
1-1. Differences Between Models 1-22
1-2. Capacities 1-23
1-3. General Service Data 1-24
1-4. Engine Data (6.2 L) 1-25
1-5. Engine Data (6.5 L) 1-25
1-6. Cooling System Data 1-25
1-7. Transmission Data (3L80) 1-26
1-8. Transmission Data (4L80-E) 1-26
1-9. Transfer Case Data (218) 1-27
1-10. Transfer Case Data (242) 1-28
1-11. Maximum Vehicle Operating Speeds (3L80 Transmission) . 1-29
1-12. Maximum Vehicle Operating Speeds (4L80-E Transmission) 1-29
1-13. Vehicle Dimensions (All except M1123 and A2 Vehicles) . 1-30
1-14. Vehicle Dimensions (M1123 and A2 Vehicles) 1-31
1-15. Vehicle Cruising Range 1-32
1-16. 6,000 lb Winch Data 1-33
1-17. 9,000 lb Winch Data (Optional) 1-33
1-17.1. 10,500 lb Winch Data (Optional) 1-33
1-18. Curb Weight 1-34
1-19. Vehicle Bridge Classification 1-34
1-20. Axle Weights 1-35
Change 3 Index 5

INDEX

Tm 9-2320-280-10

INDEX
Para. Page
T (Cont'd)
2-1. General Cleaning Instructions 2-61
2-2. Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services 2-62
2-3. Towing Operations 2-126
2-3.1 Vehicle Trailer Towing Requirements 2-132.2
2-4. Runflat Operations 2-156
3-1. Troubleshooting 3-3
3-2. Cleaning Compound-to-Water Ratio 3-18
Tabulated data (table 1-1) 1-22
Tailgate operation 2-21 2-121
Technical bulletins A-6 A-2
Technical manuals A-5 A-2
Tire chain installation and removal 3-22 3-28
TOW 2 carrier stowage plan F-4
TOW/armament carrier operation 2-184
TOW carrier load plan F-2 F-1
TOW carrier stowage plan F-2
TOW carriers, armored (M966, M966A1, M1036, and M1121) . . . 1-11 1-8
TOW carriers, w/supplemental armor (M1045, M1045A1,
M1045A2, M1046, and M1046A1) 1-12 1-10
TOW weapon station operation 2-54 2-188
Towing operation 2-24 2-126
Towing operations (table 2-3) 2-126
Trailer towing 2-25 2-132.1
Trailer towing requirements, vehicle (table 2-3.1) 2-132.2
Transfer case data (218) (table 1-9) 1-27
Transfer case data (242) (table 1-10) 1-28
Transmission data (3L80) (table 1-7) 1-26
Transmission data (4L80-E) (table 1-8) 1-26
Transmission fluid servicing 3-19 3-24
Troop area soft top enclosures, removal and installation of 2-47 2-172
Troop/cargo winterization heater operating instructions 2-41 2-164
Troop seat kit operation 2-44 2-167
Troubleshooting (table 3-1) 3-3
Troubleshooting procedures 3-6 3-2
Two-man crew area soft top enclosure, removal and
installation of 2-46 2-168
V
Vehicle and engine, stopping the 2-12 2-110
Vehicle cruising range (table 1-15) 1-32
Vehicle dimensions (M1123 and A2 vehicles) (table 1-14) 1-31
Vehicle dimensions (All except M1123 and A2 vehicles) (table 1-13) . . 1-30
Vehicle light switch, operation of 2-13 2-112
Vehicle operating speeds, maximum (3L80 transmission)
(table 1-11) 1-29
Vehicle operating speeds, maximum (4L80-E transmission)
(table 1-12) 1-29
Index 6 Change 2

TM 9-2320-280-10 INDEX

Para Page
W (Cont'd)
Weight, curb (table 1-18) 1-33
Wheel assembly replacement 3-26 3-33
Winch operation, electric 2-26 2-134
Winch operation, hydraulic 2-26.1 2-134.2
Winch data, 9,000 lb (Optional) (table 1-17) 1-33
Winch data, 6,000 lb (table 1-16) 1-33
Winch data, 10,500 lb (Optional) (table 1-17.1) 1-33
Windshield assembly operation 2-43 2-166
Windshield washer reservoir, servicing 3-14 3-18

By Order of the Secretary of the Army: DENNIS J. REIMER General, United States Army Chief of Staff Official: YVONNE M. HARRISON Administrative Assistant to the Secretary of the Army 01393 By Order of the Secretary of the Air Force: RONALD R. FOGLEMAN General, United States Air Force Chief of Staff Official: HENRY VICCELLIO, JR.

General, United States Air Force Commander, Air Force Materiel Command By Order of the Marine Corps: D. R. BLOOMER Colonel, USMC Director, Program Support Marine Corps Systems Command DISTRIBUTION: To be distributed in accordance with DA Form 12-38-E, block 0377, requirements for TM 9-2320-280-10.

413_image_0.png

DA FORM 2028, FEB 74 REPLACES DA FORM 2028, 1 DEC 68, WHICH WILL BE USED.

USAPPC V3.00

TO: (Forward direct to addressee listed in publication) FROM: (Activity and location) (include ZIP code) DATE:

AMSTA-LC-CI Tech Pubs, TACOM-RI

414_image_0.png

TELEPHONE EXCHANGE/AUTOVON, PLUS EXTENSION:

TYPED NAME, GRADE, OR TITLE:

SIGNATURE:

415_image_0.png

DA FORM 2028, FEB 74 REPLACES DA FORM 2028, 1 DEC 68, WHICH WILL BE USED.

USAPPC V3.00

416_image_0.png

TELEPHONE EXCHANGE/AUTOVON,
PLUS EXTENSION:

TYPED NAME, GRADE, OR TITLE:

SIGNATURE:

The Metric System And Equivalents

LINEAR MEASURE 1 Centimeter = 10 Millimeters = 0.01 Meters = 0.3937 Inches 1 Meter = 100 Centimeters = 1,000 Millimeters = 39.37 Inches 1 Kilometer = 1,000 Meters = 0.621 Miles SQUARE MEASURE 1 Sq Centimeter = 100 Sq Millimeters = 0.155 Sq Inches 1 Sq Meter = 10,000 Sq Centimeters = 10.76 Sq Feet 1 Sq Kilometer = 1,000,000 Sq Meters = 0.386 Sq Miles CUBIC MEASURE 1 Cu Centimeter = 1,000 Cu Millimeters = 0.06 Cu Inches 1 Cu Meter = 1,000,000 Cu Centimeters = 35.31 Cu Feet LIQUID MEASURE 1 Milliliter = 0.001 Liters = 0.0338 Fluid Ounces 1 Liter = 1,000 Milliliters = 33.82 Fluid Ounces TEMPERATURE Degrees Fahrenheit (F) = °C · 9 ÷ 5 + 32 Degrees Celsius (C) = °F - 32 · 5 ÷ 9 212° Fahrenheit is equivalent to 100° Celsius 89.96° Fahrenheit is equivalent to 32.2° Celsius 32° Fahrenheit is equivalent to 0° Celsius WEIGHTS 1 Gram = 0.001 Kilograms = 1,000 Milligrams = 0.035 Ounces 1 Kilogram = 1,000 Grams = 2.2 Lb 1 Metric Ton = 1,000 Kilograms = 1 Megagram = 1.1 Short Tons

Approximate Conversion Factors

ALL ROAMAIL VALLERIAL INSTANT
TO CHANGE TO MULTIPLY BY
Inches Millimeters 25.400
Inches . Centimeters 2.540
Feet . Meters 0.305
Yards . . . Meters 0.914
Miles . Kilometers 1.609
Square Inches Square Centimeters 6.451
Square Feet Square Meters 0.093
Square Yards Square Meters 0.836
Square Miles Square Kilometers 2.590
Acres . Square Hectometers 0.405
Cubic Feet Cubic Meters 0.028
Cubic Yards Cubic Meters 0.765
Fluid Ounces Milliliters 29.573
Pints Liters . . 0.473
Quarts Liters . . . 0.946
Gallons . . Liters . . . 3.785
Ounces . . . Grams 28.349
Pounds . . . Kilograms 0.4536
Short Tons Metric Tons 0.907
Pound-Feet Newton-Meters 1.356
Pounds Per Square Inch Kilopascals 6.895
Miles Per Gallon Kilometers Per Liter 0.425
Miles Per Hour Kilometers Per Hour 1.609
TO CHANGE TO MULTIPLY BY
Millimeters Inches . 0.03937
Centimeters Inches . 0.3937
Meters Feet . 3.280
Meters Yards . 1.094
Kilometers Miles . 0.621
Square Centimeters Square Inches 0.155
Square Meters Square Feet . 10.764
Square Meters Square Yards . 1.196
Square Kilometers Square Miles 0.386
Square Hectometers Acres 2.471
Cubic Meters Cubic Feet 35.315
Cubic Meters Cubic Yards 1.308
Milliliters Fluid Ounces 0.034
. . . Liters Pints 2.113
Liters . . Quarts 1.057
Liters . . Gallons 0.264
Grams . Ounces . . 0.035
Kilograms . . . . Pounds 2.2046
Metric Tons Short Tons 1.102
Newton-Meters . Pound-Feet 0.738
Kilopascals . Pounds Per Square Inch 0.145
Kilometers Per Liter Miles Per Gallon 2.354
Kilometers Per Hour Miles Per Hour 0.621

418_image_0.png

This site is open source. Improve this page.